BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition View / The Manual Brxuserm

User Manual: View / the Manual BRX Do-more Platform User Manual and Inserts

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 734

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Manual Number: BX-USER-M

BRX Do-more! Platform

120/240VAC

24VDC

35VA

0.3A

10-Point Unit
18-Point Unit

No Onboard I/O Unit

36-Point Unit

~ WARNING ~
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com®, doing business as,
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or
uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or
operating the equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national
codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area
and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and
to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these
codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical
Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). There may be local
regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for
safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable
codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for
your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or
operation.
Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as
on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). AutomationDirect
specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog.
If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
additional information, please call us at 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to
make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.
This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

Trademarks
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The
product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners.
AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2017, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written
consent of Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all
information included in this document.

~ ADVERTENCIA ~
Gracias por comprar equipo de automatización de Automationdirect.com®. Deseamos que su nuevo equipo
de automatización opere de manera segura. Cualquier persona que instale o use este equipo debe leer esta
publicación (y cualquier otra publicación pertinente) antes de instalar u operar el equipo.
Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo debido a problemas de seguridad, debe seguir todos los códigos de seguridad
locales o nacionales aplicables que regulan la instalación y operación de su equipo. Estos códigos varian de
área en área y usualmente cambian con el tiempo. Es su responsabilidad determinar cuales códigos deben ser
seguidos y verificar que el equipo, instalación y operación estén en cumplimiento con la revisión mas reciente
de estos códigos.
Como mínimo, debe seguir las secciones aplicables del Código Nacional de Incendio, Código Nacional Eléctrico,
y los códigos de (NEMA) la Asociación Nacional de Fabricantes Eléctricos de USA. Puede haber oficinas de
normas locales o del gobierno que pueden ayudar a determinar cuales códigos y normas son necesarios para una
instalación y operación segura.
Si no se siguen todos los códigos y normas aplicables, puede resultar en daños al equipo o lesiones serias a
personas. No garantizamos los productos descritos en esta publicación para ser adecuados para su aplicación
en particular, ni asumimos ninguna responsabilidad por el diseño de su producto, la instalación u operación.
Nuestros productos no son tolerantes a fallas y no han sido diseñados, fabricados o intencionados para uso
o reventa como equipo de control en línea en ambientes peligrosos que requieren una ejecución sin fallas,
tales como operación en instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de navegación aérea, o de comunicación, control de
tráfico aéreo, máquinas de soporte de vida o sistemas de armamentos en las cuales la falla del producto puede
resultar directamente en muerte, heridas personales, o daños físicos o ambientales severos (“Actividades de Alto
Riesgo”). Automationdirect.com específicamente rechaza cualquier garantía ya sea expresada o implicada
para actividades de alto riesgo.
Para información adicional acerca de garantía e información de seguridad, vea la sección de Términos
y Condiciones de nuestro catálogo. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre instalación u operación de este equipo, o
si necesita información adicional, por favor llámenos al número 770-844-4200 en Estados Unidos.
Esta publicación está basada en la información disponible al momento de impresión. En Automationdirect.
com nos esforzamos constantemente para mejorar nuestros productos y servicios, así que nos reservamos el
derecho de hacer cambios al producto y/o a las publicaciones en cualquier momento sin notificación y sin
ninguna obligación. Esta publicación también puede discutir características que no estén disponibles en ciertas
revisiones del producto.

Marcas Registradas
Esta publicación puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compañías. Los nombres de las
compañías y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad única de sus respectivos dueños. Automationdirect.com,
renuncia cualquier interés propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros.
PROPIEDAD LITERARIA 2017, AUTOMATIONDIRECT.COM® INCORPORATED
Todos los derechos reservados
No se permite copiar, reproducir, o transmitir de ninguna forma ninguna parte de este manual sin previo consentimiento por escrito
de Automationdirect.com® Incorprated. Automationdirect.com retiene los derechos exclusivos a toda la información incluida en
este documento. Los usuarios de este equipo pueden copiar este documento solamente para instalar, configurar y mantener el equipo
correspondiente. También las instituciones de enseñanza pueden usar este manual para propósitos educativos.

~ AVERTISSEMENT ~
Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté l’équipement d’automatisation de Automationdirect.com®, en faisant des
affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d’automatisation fonctionne en
toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de l’installer ou de l’utiliser.
Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d’éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux
et nationaux applicables régissant l’installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d’une
région à l’autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et
de vous assurer que l’équipement, l’installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la
plus récente de ces codes.
Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies,
du Code national de l’électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer
les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs.
L’omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l’équipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication
conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n’assumons aucune responsabilité à l’égard de la conception, de
l’installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l’utilisation ou la revente
en tant qu’équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue,
par exemple, l’exploitation d’installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le
contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d’armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du
produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux
(«activités à risque élevé»). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à
l’emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de cet
équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n’hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au
770-844-4200.
Cette publication s’appuie sur l’information qui était disponible au moment de l’impression. À la société
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d’améliorer nos produits et services. C’est pourquoi nous
nous réservons le droit d’apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni
quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne
pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.

Marques de commerce
La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d’autres entreprises. Les
désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à
leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations.
Copyright 2017, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
Tous droits réservés

Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le
consentement préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les
droits exclusifs à l’égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.

Notes

Do-more! BRX Hardware Manual

Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below,
when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.
Manual Number:

BX-USER-M

Issue:

2nd Edition

Issue Date:

9/17
Publication History

Issue

Date

Description of Changes

1st Edition

02/17

Original

Rev A

03/17

Made minor corrections throughout the manual.

2nd Edition

09/17

Added Analog I/O Expansion Modules.
Updated BX-P-ECOMLT specifications.
Made minor corrections throughout the manual.

Notes

Table of Contents
Introduction
Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines
Safety Guidelines....................................................................................................... 1-2
Introduction to the BRX Mechanical Design.............................................................. 1-5
Dimensions and Installation....................................................................................... 1-6
Mounting Guidelines................................................................................................. 1-9
Wiring Guidelines.................................................................................................... 1-14
I/O Module Wiring Options.................................................................................... 1-21
System Wiring Strategies......................................................................................... 1-23

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring
Overview................................................................................................................... 2-2
BX-DM1E-M Wiring................................................................................................... 2-4
BX-DM1E-M-D Wiring............................................................................................... 2-6

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring
BX 10/10E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).......................................................................... 3-2
Overview................................................................................................................... 3-2
BX 10/10E MPUs ...................................................................................................... 3-2
BX 10/10E Wiring Termination Selection................................................................... 3-5
Terminal Block Connectors........................................................................................ 3-5
ZIPLink Prewired Cable Solutions.............................................................................. 3-6
ZIPLink System Examples.......................................................................................... 3-7
BX 10 Micro PLC Units (MPUs)................................................................................. 3-8
BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring.......................................................................................... 3-8
BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring........................................................................................ 3-14
BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring.......................................................................................... 3-20

Table of Contents
BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring.......................................................................................... 3-26
BX 10E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).............................................................................. 3-32
BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring.................................................................................... 3-32
BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring.................................................................................... 3-40
BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring...................................................................................... 3-48
BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring...................................................................................... 3-56

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring
Overview................................................................................................................... 4-2
BX 18/18E MPUs ...................................................................................................... 4-2
General Specifications............................................................................................... 4-3
BX 18/18E MPU Wiring Termination Selection.......................................................... 4-5
Terminal Block Connectors........................................................................................ 4-5
ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cable Solutions............................................................................ 4-7
ZIPLink System Examples.......................................................................................... 4-9
BX 18 Micro PLC Units (MPUs)............................................................................... 4-10
BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring .......................................................................................... 4-10
BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring........................................................................................ 4-16
BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring .......................................................................................... 4-22
BX-DM1-18ED2-D Wiring........................................................................................ 4-28
BX-DM1-18ER Wiring.............................................................................................. 4-34
BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring.......................................................................................... 4-40
BX-DM1-18AR Wiring............................................................................................. 4-46
BX 18E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).............................................................................. 4-52
BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring........................................................................................ 4-52
BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring.................................................................................... 4-61
BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring........................................................................................ 4-70
BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring.................................................................................... 4-79
BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring.......................................................................................... 4-88
BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring...................................................................................... 4-97
BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring........................................................................................ 4-106

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring
Overview................................................................................................................... 5-2
BX 36/36E MPUs ...................................................................................................... 5-2
BX 36/36E Wiring Termination Selection................................................................... 5-5

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Table of Contents
Terminal Block Connectors........................................................................................ 5-5
ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cable Solutions............................................................................ 5-7
ZIPLink System Examples.......................................................................................... 5-9
BRX 36 Micro PLU Units (MPUs)............................................................................. 5-10
BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring........................................................................................... 5-10
BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring........................................................................................ 5-16
BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring........................................................................................... 5-22
BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring........................................................................................ 5-28
BX-DM1-36ER Wiring.............................................................................................. 5-34
BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring.......................................................................................... 5-40
BX-DM1-36AR Wiring............................................................................................. 5-46
BX 36E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).............................................................................. 5-52
BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring........................................................................................ 5-52
BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring.................................................................................... 5-61
BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring........................................................................................ 5-70
BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring.................................................................................... 5-79
BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring.......................................................................................... 5-88
BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring...................................................................................... 5-97
BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring........................................................................................ 5-106

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)
Overview................................................................................................................... 6-2
General Specifications............................................................................................... 6-2
Module Installation.................................................................................................... 6-3
BX-P-SER2-TERM ...................................................................................................... 6-4
BX-P-SER4-TERM ...................................................................................................... 6-6
BX-P-SER2-RJ12 ........................................................................................................ 6-8
BX-P-ECOMLT .......................................................................................................... 6-9
BX-P-USB-B ............................................................................................................ 6-10

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules
Overview................................................................................................................... 7-2
Module Types........................................................................................................... 7-3
Discrete Input Modules............................................................................................. 7-3
Discrete Output Modules.......................................................................................... 7-3
Discrete Combo Input/Output Modules.................................................................... 7-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

iii

Table of Contents
Wiring Termination Options...................................................................................... 7-5
Terminal Block Connectors........................................................................................ 7-5
ZIPLink Wiring System.............................................................................................. 7-6
General Specifications............................................................................................... 7-8
Module Installation .................................................................................................. 7-9
BX-08NF3 Sinking/Sourcing 3–5 VDC Input............................................................ 7-10
BX-xxND3 Sinking/Sourcing 12–24 VDC Input....................................................... 7-11
BX-xxNB 12–24 VAC Input...................................................................................... 7-13
BX-xxNA 120–240 VAC Input................................................................................. 7-15
BX-xxTD1 Sinking 12–24 VDC Output.................................................................... 7-17
BX-xxTD2 Sourcing 12–24 VDC Output.................................................................. 7-19
BX-xxTR Relay Output............................................................................................. 7-21
BX-05TRS Relay Output........................................................................................... 7-23
BX-xxTA 120–240 VAC Output............................................................................... 7-24
BX-08CD3R Combination DC Input/Relay Output................................................... 7-26
BX-xxCD3D1 Combination DC Input/Sinking DC Output....................................... 7-29
BX-xxCD3D2 Combination DC Input/Sourcing DC Output..................................... 7-32

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules
Overview................................................................................................................... 8-2
Module Types........................................................................................................... 8-2
Wiring Termination Options...................................................................................... 8-4
General Specifications............................................................................................... 8-6
Dimensional Information........................................................................................... 8-6
Module Installation.................................................................................................... 8-7
Module Configuration............................................................................................... 8-8
Analog Tips and Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 8-9
BX-08AD-1 Analog Current Sinking Input............................................................... 8-16
BX-08AD-2B Analog Voltage Input.......................................................................... 8-21
BX-04THM Thermocouple Input............................................................................. 8-26
BX-08DA-1 Analog Current Source Output............................................................. 8-32
BX-08DA-2B Analog Voltage Output....................................................................... 8-37

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Table of Contents

Chapter 9: Future Release of BRX Specialty Expansion Modules
Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
Overview................................................................................................................. 10-2
Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 10-3
BRX Do-more! Designer System Requirements........................................................ 10-4
Step 1: Install Do-more! Designer Software............................................................ 10-5
Step 2: Launch the Do-more! Designer Software .................................................. 10-8
Step 3: Prepare the Hardware.............................................................................. 10-11
Step 4: Apply Power to the PLC........................................................................... 10-14
Step 5: Establish PC to BRX MPU Communications.............................................. 10-15
Step 6: Verify Hardware Configuration................................................................. 10-20
Step 7: Create a Ladder Logic Program................................................................ 10-23
Step 8: Save Project............................................................................................. 10-33
Step 9: Write Project to the BRX MPU.................................................................. 10-34
Step 10: Testing Project Using Data View............................................................. 10-37
Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates.............................................. 10-41
Updating the Firmware......................................................................................... 10-42
Live Update........................................................................................................... 10-45
Update Operating System..................................................................................... 10-46
Update Gate Array and Loader.............................................................................. 10-48
Dashboard ........................................................................................................... 10-50
Help File................................................................................................................ 10-53

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications
The BRX Platform ................................................................................................... 11-2
BRX Do-more! CPU Common Specifications............................................................ 11-3
Memory Features.................................................................................................... 11-5
CPU Status Indicators.............................................................................................. 11-7
Mode Switch Functions........................................................................................... 11-8
DIP Switch Specifications......................................................................................... 11-9
Battery Replacement............................................................................................. 11-12
microSD Slot......................................................................................................... 11-13
Customizing the Logo Window............................................................................. 11-14
RS-232/485 Port Specifications.............................................................................. 11-15
Ethernet Port Specifications................................................................................... 11-17

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Table of Contents
POM Slot.............................................................................................................. 11-17

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
Overview................................................................................................................. 12-2
Unsuitable Applications........................................................................................... 12-3
BRX Wiring Examples: High-Speed Inputs .............................................................. 12-4
BRX Wiring Examples: High-Speed Outputs, continued........................................... 12-8
Available High-Speed Input and Output Features.................................................. 12-11
1. Input Filters................................................................................................. 12-12
2. Interrupt Setup........................................................................................... 12-14
3. High-Speed I/O .......................................................................................... 12-23
BRX High-Speed Examples.................................................................................... 12-34
BRX High-speed Instructions ................................................................................ 12-56
AXCAM........................................................................................................... 12-57
AXCONFIG...................................................................................................... 12-63
AXFOLLOW..................................................................................................... 12-67
AXGEAR.......................................................................................................... 12-71
AXHOME........................................................................................................ 12-75
AXJOG............................................................................................................ 12-82
AXPOSSCRV.................................................................................................... 12-84
AXPOSTRAP.................................................................................................... 12-89
AXRSTFAULT................................................................................................... 12-94
AXSETPROP..................................................................................................... 12-96
AXVEL............................................................................................................. 12-99
TDODECFG................................................................................................... 12-102
TDOPLS........................................................................................................ 12-104
TDOPRESET................................................................................................... 12-114

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications
Overview................................................................................................................. 13-3
Terminology............................................................................................................ 13-3
General Concepts.................................................................................................... 13-4
USB Communications.............................................................................................. 13-5
Serial Communications............................................................................................ 13-6
RS-232.................................................................................................................... 13-6
RS-485.................................................................................................................... 13-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Table of Contents
Serial Port Settings................................................................................................ 13-10
Serial Protocols...................................................................................................... 13-13
MRX Instruction.................................................................................................... 13-16
MWX Instruction................................................................................................... 13-18
K-Sequence........................................................................................................... 13-20
ASCII..................................................................................................................... 13-21
STREAMIN Instruction........................................................................................... 13-22
STREAMOUT Instruction........................................................................................ 13-24
Ethernet................................................................................................................ 13-26
Wiring................................................................................................................... 13-27
IP Addressing and Subnets.................................................................................... 13-27
Port Numbers........................................................................................................ 13-28
Ethernet Protocols................................................................................................. 13-29
PEERLINK Instruction............................................................................................. 13-29
Do-more! Protocol................................................................................................. 13-30
RX......................................................................................................................... 13-30
WX........................................................................................................................ 13-34
Modbus TCP/IP..................................................................................................... 13-38
MRX Instruction.................................................................................................... 13-40
MWX Instruction................................................................................................... 13-42
HOST Ethernet Protocol........................................................................................ 13-44
DLRX..................................................................................................................... 13-45
DLWX.................................................................................................................... 13-47
EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging)........................................................................... 13-49
EtherNet/IP Client (Master)................................................................................... 13-52
SMTP – EMAIL....................................................................................................... 13-57
EMAIL.................................................................................................................... 13-60

Chapter 14: Future Release of BRX Remote I/O
Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Hardware Maintenance........................................................................................... 15-2
Diagnostics.............................................................................................................. 15-3
CPU Indicators........................................................................................................ 15-5
PWR Indicator ........................................................................................................ 15-6
RUN Indicator......................................................................................................... 15-7

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

vii

Table of Contents
ERR Indicator........................................................................................................... 15-7
Communications Problems...................................................................................... 15-7
I/O Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 15-8
Noise Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 15-10

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)
European Union (EU) Directives................................................................................. A-2
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines.............................................................................. A-5

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting
Power Budget Form.................................................................................................. B-2
Power Budget Worksheet.......................................................................................... B-3
BRX MPU Available Expansion Power........................................................................ B-4
BRX MPU POM Power Consumed............................................................................. B-5
BRX MPU Expansion Module Power Consumed........................................................ B-6
Power Budget Examples............................................................................................ B-9

viii

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Introduction:
BRX Platform
BRX Introduction........................................................................................................ii
Conventions Used..........................................................................................................iii
BRX Overview................................................................................................................ iv
BRX Platform..................................................................................................................v
User Manual Layout....................................................................................................... vi

Introduction: BRX Platform

BRX Introduction
Purpose of this Manual
The hardware user manual provides information that will help you install, set up, program,
troubleshoot, and maintain your BRX platform. The user manual also includes information
that is critical to the safety of the personnel who will install and use the controller, and to
the integrity of machinery, processes, and equipment controlled by the BRX Micro PLC Unit
(MPU).
The manual also includes important information about power and signal wiring, mounting of
the BRX MPU, and configuring the BRX MPU system.

About Getting Started
If you are familiar with programmable controllers in general, then following the simple steps
in this manual may be all you require to start being productive using a BRX Do-more MPU
system. After you have completed the steps, your BRX MPU will be running the ladder logic
project that you programmed.

Online Help Files and Other Documentation
BRX Do-more! Designer programming software is available as a download from our website.
See http://support.automationdirect.com/products/domore.html.
The Do-more! Designer software includes researchable online help topics covering all aspects
of the software, instruction set, module setup, and communications.
In addition, each BRX MPU, I/O expansion module and Pluggable Option Module (POM)
module ships with an insert document containing technical data and installation instructions.

Technical Support
We have an extensive library of free online videos that cover a vast array of technical topics.
Follow this link: https://www.automationdirect.com/videos/tutorials, and chose the “In-depth
Product Tutorials” tab for product specific videos.
If you cannot find the solution to your particular situation, or, if for any reason you need
additional technical assistance, our technical support group is glad to work with you in
answering your questions. Please contact us at:
By Telephone: 770-844-4200
(Mon.-Fri., 9:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. E.T.)
On the Web: support.automationdirect.com
We also encourage you to visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical
information about our products and our company.
Visit us at www.automationdirect.com

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Introduction: BRX Platform

Conventions Used
When you see the “note pad” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a
special note. Notes represent information that may make your work quicker or more efficient. The word
NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

When you see the “exclamation point” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right
will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death in extreme
cases. Any warning in this manual should be regarded as critical information that should be read in its
entirety. The word WARNING in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

Key Topics for Each Chapter
The beginning of each chapter will list the key
topics that can be found in that chapter.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

iii

Introduction: BRX Platform

BRX Overview
The BRX platform is a very versatile modular Micro PLC system that combines powerful
features in a compact, standalone footprint. The BRX platform is designed to be used as a
stand-alone controller or can be expanded using a wide variety of expansion modules that easily
snap onto the side of any BRX Micro PLC Unit (MPU) creating a sturdy and rugged PLC
platform. The foundation of the platform consists of 4 unique MPU form factors that provide
for a strong system design to fit your application requirements precisely while keeping the cost
of the system to a minimum. Shown below are the four unique Micro PLC form factors.

BX ME
No Built-In I/O
Ethernet Port

BX 10
10 Discrete I/O
No Analog I/O
No Ethernet Port

BX 10E
10 Discrete I/O
2 Analog I/O
Ethernet Port

BX 18
18 Discrete I/O
No Analog I/O
No Ethernet Port

PWR
W

BX 18E
18 Discrete I/O
2 Analog I/O
Ethernet Port

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX
RX
RX

GN
GND
RX/D
RX/DTX/D
TX/D+

BX 36
36 Discrete I/O
No Analog I/O
No Ethernet Port

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX 36E
36 Discrete I/O
6 Analog I/O
Ethernet Port

Introduction: BRX Platform

BRX Platform
Below is a quick look at some of the standard features available on the BRX Platform.
External Power
12–24 VDC or
120–240 VAC.

Large Terminal Blocks
Removable 5mm pitch.

microSD Card Slot
Data Logging and
File Management
capability.

Do-more! DM1 Technology
Existing Do-more! projects
can port over 100%.
Expansion Port
Expandable up to (8)
16-point Expansion
Modules for a total of
128 additional I/O points.

Customizable
Label Window
Available on
BX18/18E and
BX36/36E
MPUs.

Built-in Serial Port
RS232 or RS485
software selectable.
Built-in Ethernet Port
Full functioning Ethernet
port including EtherNet/IP
available on select models.

Built-in High Speed I/O
Up to 10 DC inputs &
half of the DC outputs.

Built-in Analog I/O
On select models.

Pluggable Option
Module (POM) Slot
Increase functionality
of MPU with additional
serial port, Ethernet
port, or USB port.

The BRX platform allows you to choose from various communications ports. All BRX MPU
models have a built-in RS232C/485 (software-selectable) serial port. However, an RJ45
Ethernet port (10/100Mbps) is provided on select units. With support for EtherNet/IP,
Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU, ASCII, K-sequence (DirectLOGIC users) and custom protocols,
the BRX MPU platform provides supreme versatility for any application. In addition, all BRX
MPUs have an extra plug-in slot that allows for additional user-selected communications port.
These optional communications ports are called Pluggable Option Modules (POMs) and are
available in 3-pin serial RS232, RJ12 serial RS232, 3-pin serial RS485, USB and Ethernet
versions. Simply choose the extra port you want, plug it in and go.
BRX hardware is built to last and is engineered, assembled and supported right here in America;
designed and fabricated by industrial automation veterans with hardware facilities in Tennessee
and Florida. The compact modular architecture results in an outstanding controller package,
with high performance, a small footprint, at a very low cost. The BRX platform is an extremely
versatile modular system that you can customize to your specific controller needs. BRX
has four distinct form factors, built-in high-speed I/O, motion control, an interchangeable
communications port, on-board analog I/O, and many I/O expansion modules from which to
choose. The BRX MPU platform allows you to build the ideal controller for your application
that delivers the quality and reliability you expect at an unexpectedly lower cost.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Introduction: BRX Platform

BRX Platform, Continued
FREE, fully-functional Do-more! Designer programming software was developed to be
powerful, flexible and easy to use. The user-friendly, fill-in-the-blank software design makes
complex operations like PID and motion control a cinch. It is available to download online
whenever you choose, as often as you’d like. Take it for a spin or start your project immediately,
there are never any licensing fees or service charges.

User Manual Layout
This BRX user manual is intended to be used as a reference manual for the BRX hardware. It
is laid out into 3 sections as follows:
Installation, Wiring and Specifications
•

Chapter 1: Hardware Installation, General Wiring Guidelines and Strategies

•

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

•

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

•

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

•

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

•

Chapter 6: Pluggable Option Module (POM)

•

Chapter 7: Digital I/O Expansion Modules

•

Chapter 8: Analog Expansion Modules (For Future Release)

•

Chapter 9: Specialty Expansion Modules (For Future Release)

Programming and Software
•

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

•

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

•

Chapter 12: High Speed I/O and Motion Control

•

Chapter 13: Communications

•

Chapter 14: Remote I/O (For Future Release)

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

•

Chapter 15: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

•

Appendix A: EU Directive

•

Appendix B: Power Budgeting

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

General Installation
and Wiring Guidelines

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Safety Guidelines........................................................................................................ 1-2
Introduction to the BRX Mechanical Design............................................................. 1-5
Dimensions and Installation....................................................................................... 1-6
Mounting Guidelines.................................................................................................. 1-9
Wiring Guidelines..................................................................................................... 1-14
I/O Module Wiring Options..................................................................................... 1-21
System Wiring Strategies......................................................................................... 1-23

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1 Safety Guidelines
NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards
2
as specified by CE directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the
instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available
3
on our Web site at http://www.automationdirect.com.
WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility
4
and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail
and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Do not
5
rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external
electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of the MPU application
to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage. Every
6
automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for your particular application.
Make sure you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the proper installation
and use of your equipment.
7
Plan for Safety
8
The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment
safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine
9
which areas are critical to operator or machine safety. If you are not familiar with PLC system
installation practices, or your company does not have established installation guidelines, you
should obtain additional information from the following sources.
10
• NEMA — The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in Washington, D.C.,
publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. You can
11
order these publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
ICS 3, Industrial Systems
12
ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
• NEC — The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and use of
13
various types of electrical equipment. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from
your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library.
14
• Local and State Agencies — many local governments and state governments have additional
requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local
Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.
15
A
B
C
D
1-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

Three Levels of Protection
WARNING: The control program must not be the only form of
protection for any problems that may result in a risk of personal
injury or equipment damage.

The publications mentioned provide many ideas and
requirements for system safety. At a minimum, you
should follow these regulations. Also, you should use the
following techniques, which provide three levels of system
control.
1. Orderly system shutdown sequence in the MPU control
program.

Jam
Detect

2. Mechanical disconnect for output module power.
3. Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power.

Turn off
Saw
RST
RST
Retract
Arm

Orderly System Shutdown
The first level of fault detection is ideally the MPU control program in which you would
identify any likely problems. Certain shutdown sequences should be performed. Some types
of problems that are likely to occur are issues such as jammed parts or other process failures,
that may not pose a risk of personal injury or equipment damage however, would need to be
cleared prior to restarting the MPU control program.

System Power Disconnect
You should also use electromechanical devices, such as master control relays and/or limit
switches, to prevent accidental equipment startup at an unexpected time. These safety devices
should be installed in a manner that will prevent any machine operations from occurring where
there maybe a possibility of injury to personnel or equipment.
For example, if the machine in the illustration above has a jammed part, the MPU control
program can turn off the saw blade and retract the arbor. If the operator must open the guard
to remove the part, you should also include a bypass switch that disconnects all system power
any time the guard is opened.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

Emergency Stop Circuits

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Emergency stop (E-Stop) circuits are a critical part of automation safety. For each machine
controlled by an MPU, provide an E-Stop device that is hardwired external to the MPU and
easily accessed by the machine operator.
E-stop devices are commonly hardwired through a master control relay (MCR) or a safety
control relay (SCR) that will isolate power from the MPU I/O system in an emergency.
MCRs and SCRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O system
during an emergency situation. By de-energizing an MCR (or SCR) coil, power to the input
(optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when any emergency stop switch
opens. However, the MPU continues to receive power and operate even though all its inputs
and outputs are disabled.
The MCR circuit could be extended by placing an MPU fault relay (closed during normal
MPU operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This would cause the
MCR circuit to drop the MPU I/O power in case of an MPU failure (memory error, I/O
communications error, etc.).

ENC
EMERG
STOP

Guard
Limit
Switch
L1

Use E-Stop and Master
Maste Control Relay
E-Stop

Power On

Limit
S
Switch

Master
Control
Relay (MCR)

MCR

CR1

Saw Arbor

WARNING: For some applications, field device power may still be present on the terminal block even
though the MPU is turned off. To minimize the risk of electrical shock, remove all field device power
before you expose or remove MPU wiring.

1-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

Introduction to the BRX Mechanical Design
The BRX platform is designed to be used as a stand-alone controller or can be expanded.
Using a combination of expansion modules, that simply snap on, you can create a sturdy and
rugged PLC platform that can handle all your automation control applications.

Typical BRX Do-more Platform System

Expansion
Modules

Panel
Mount
Lugs

Custom
Label
Window

DIN Rail
Mount
MPU
Removable
Terminal
Block

Pre-wired
Cable
System

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1 Dimensions and Installation
Before installing the BRX Micro PLC Unit (MPU) you will need to know the dimensions
of the components considered. The diagrams on the following pages provide the nominal
2
dimensions of each MPU series and Expansion modules, which you can use when designing
your enclosure. Remember to leave room for potential expansion to the right of the MPU.
3
The height is the same for all components. The width varies depending on your choice of
MPU and expansion modules. Allow adequate space to the right of MPU for mounting and
4
dismounting additional Expansion modules. The BRX platform is designed to be mounted on
standard 35mm DIN rail, or it can be surface mounted. Make sure you follow the installation
guidelines for proper unit spacing.
5
6
NOTE: Downloadable Dimensional drawings for MPUs and Expansion modules are available at
AutomationDirect.com.
7
BX ME MPU Dimensions, mm[inch]
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
1-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

BX 10/10E MPU Dimensions, mm[inch]

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 18/18E MPU Dimensions, mm[inch]

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-7

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 36/36E Modules Dimensions, mm[inch]

BRX Expansion Modules Dimensions, mm[inch]
NOTE: Allow a minimum of 45mm (1.75 in) to the right of MPU chassis for mounting and dismounting
Expansion modules.

1-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

Mounting Guidelines
Enclosures
Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper operation of your
BRX platform system. Applications for the BRX platform can vary and may require additional
hardware considerations. The minimum considerations for enclosures include:
•

Conformance to electrical standards

•

Protection from the elements in an industrial environment

•

Common ground reference

•

Maintaining specified ambient temperature

•

Access to the equipment

•

Security or restricted access

•

Sufficient space for proper installation and maintenance of the equipment

Mounting Position
Mount the BRX MPU horizontally, as shown in the illustration on the following page, to
provide proper ventilation. Do not mount the BRX MPU vertically, upside down, or on a flat
horizontal surface.

Mounting Clearances
Provide a minimum clearance of 2 inches (50mm) on all sides of the BRX MPU:
•
Between the MPU and all sides of the enclosure.
•

Between the MPU and enclosure door mounted operator panels and other door mounted items.

•

Between the MPU and any wire duct.

Grounding
A good common ground reference (earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the BRX
platform. One side of all control circuits, power circuits and the ground lead must be properly
connected to earth ground by either installing a ground rod in close proximity to the enclosure
or by connecting to the incoming power system ground. There must be a single-point ground
(i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in the enclosure that require an earth ground.

Temperature Considerations
The BRX platform should be installed in an operating environment that complies with
the equipment temperature specifications (Please review Chapter 11 for information about
environmental specifications). If the enclosure temperature has the potential to fluctuate
above or below the specifications, cooling or heating the enclosure should be considered.

Power Considerations
The BRX platform units have a wide range of DC or AC power supply options. Some require a
12–24 VDC power supply where others are capable of using 120–240 VAC power supply.
The BRX platform requires the use of EMF/RFI line noise filters on the AC power supply to
achieved CE certification. Please review the European Union (CE) material in Appendix A for
more information.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Ground Braid
Copper Lugs
Panel or
Single Point
Ground

Panel

2″ (50mm)
Minimum
from Enclosure

2″ (50mm)
Minimum
from Wire Duct

Star Washers

2″ (50mm)
Minimum from
Enclosure
2″ (50mm) Minimum
from Enclosure

2″ (50mm)
Minimum
from Enclosure

2″ (50mm)
Minimum
from Wire Duct

NOTE: Removable terminal block kits and ZIPLink wiring
systems are sold separately. Detailed information is
available in the BRX MPU Wiring chapters.

1-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Star Washers

NOTE: Add 2ʺ to mounting
depth when using ZIPLink
cable.
2ʺ

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines
In addition to the panel layout guidelines, other specifications can affect the installation of an
MPU. Always consider the following:
•

Environmental Specifications

•

Power Requirements

•

Agency Approvals

•

Enclosure Selection and Component Dimensions

WARNING: Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be
non–hazardous.

Agency Approvals
Some applications require agency approvals for particular components. The BRX platform
agency approvals are listed below:
•

UL (Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.)

•

CUL (Canadian Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.)

•

CE (European Economic Union)

NOTE: See the “EU Directives(CE)” in Appendix A in this manual for more information.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Using DIN Rail Mounts
The BRX platform can be secured to the cabinet using DIN rails. Use DIN rail that conforms
to DIN EN standard 50022. We offer a complete line of DIN rail and DIN rail mounted
apparatus. These rails are approximately 35mm high, with a depth of 7.5 mm. If you mount
the BRX MPU on a rail, you should also consider using end brackets on each side. The end
brackets keep the BRX MPU from sliding horizontally along the rail. This minimizes the
possibility of accidentally pulling connecting circuit wiring loose.
End Bracked
DIN(Part
Rail
(Part No. DN-R35S1)
No. DN-EB35)

DIN Rai
DIN
D
Rail
Dimensions
D
Di
mens
7.5 m
7
mm

35
3
5 mm
m

End Bracket (Part No. DN-EB35)

If you examine the bottom of the
BRX MPU, you’ll notice retaining
clips. To secure to a DIN rail,
hook the unit on to the DIN rail
at the top of the mounting slot
and gently press on the bottom
of the unit until the unit snaps on
to the DIN rail. The clips lock
the BRX MPU onto the rail. To
remove, pull down on the bottom
retaining clips, slightly rotate the
unit away from the DIN rail, lift
the unit up off the DIN rail and
pull it away from the rail.

Hook base
onto DIN
rail at top of
mounting slot.

base
into position.
2 Rotate

Direct Panel Mount
The BRX MPU can be surface mounted
directly to a panel. Along the back, top and
bottom, of the BRX MPU you will find tabs
with holes. Pull these out revealing mounting
holes through which to screw down the BRX
MPU to a panel, without the need for a DIN
rail.

1-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Gently push up
retaining clip to
lock component
onto DIN rail.

Lift upper tabs to
install mounting
hardware for panel
installation.

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

Installing the Expansion I/O Modules
You can add additional I/O points to the BRX MPU by installing expansion I/O modules.
Information on how many expansion modules are supported is found in the chapter associated
with each of the BRX MPUs.
NOTE: Allow a minimum of 45mm (1.75 in) to the right of MPU chassis or Expansion Modules for mounting
and dismounting Expansion modules.

Expansion modules are installed to the right of the BRX MPU. Before installing the module,
be sure the expansion connector cover is removed.
When adding Expansion modules to a DIN rail mounted BRX MPU, the Expansion Module
must be mounted to the rail first then connected to the BRX MPU. To install the expansion
module on DIN rail, place the module onto the top of the rail and gently push the bottom
down and in towards the rail. The spring loaded retaining clips will snap into the rail keeping
the module on the rail. Slide the module to the left until it locks into the BRX MPU.
To install the expansion module to a panel mounted BRX MPU, align the expansion module
connector with the MPU expansion slot and insert into the BRX MPU until it locks into place.
Pull out the top and bottom screw mount tabs and screw the expansion module into the panel.

To remove, depress
disengagement plungers
at top and bottom
of module

To Install, remove
Connector Cover

PWR
RUN

ERR

RUN
TERM
STOP

TX
RX

LNK
ACT

2
Align
expansion
connectors, insert,
and listen for “Click”
as the lock engages

IMPORTANT!

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Wiring Guidelines
Power Wiring Connection
Connect the power source wiring for the BRX MPU as shown. Observe the precautions stated
in this manual.
See the appropriate BRX MPU wiring chapter in this manual for technical specifications on
wire size and screw torque recommendations on various terminal block connections available.
NOTE: With external power supply off, terminal block may be removed for ease of wiring and then reinserted
prior to applying power to the MPU.

BX ME MPUs
Power Supply Connections

AC Powered Units
Part Number
BX-DM1E-M

External Power
120–240 VAC

AC Power In

120–240 VAC

AC
Power

L
N
GND
VV+

–
+
Auxillary out

24VDC

BX-DM1E-M
120–240 VAC

300mA max.

DC Powered Units
Part Number
BX-DM1E-M-D

External Power
12–24 VDC

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

GND
PWRPWR+

BX-DM1E-M-D
12–24 VDC

1-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

BRX 10/10E MPUs
Power Supply Connections
All BX 10/10E MPUs require 12–24 VDC external power supply. With power supply off,
the terminal block may be removed for ease in wiring and then reinserted prior to applying
power to the MPU. Follow the wiring termination diagram below for proper power supply
connections.

DC Powered Units
Part Number

External Power

BX 10 MPUs
BX-DM1-10ED1-D
BX-DM1-10ED2-D
BX-DM1-10ER-D
BX-DM1-10AR-D

12–24 VDC

BX 10E MPUs
BX-DM1E-10ED13-D
BX-DM1E-10ED23-D

BX 10 Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
No Built-in Analog or Ethernet

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D
BX-DM1E-10AR3-D

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 18/18E MPUs
Power Supply Connections, 120–240 VAC

AC Powered Units
Part Number

External Power

BX 18 MPUs
BX-DM1-18ED1
BX-DM1-18ED2
BX-DM1-18ER
BX-DM1-18AR

BX 18E MPUs

24VDC

120–240 VAC
35VA
35V
35
VA

BX-DM1E-18ED13

0.3A

BX-DM1E-18ED23
BX-DM1E-18ER3
BX-DM1E-18AR3

AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA

1-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

BX 18/18E MPUs, Continued
Power Supply Connections, 12–24 VDC

DC Powered Units
Part Number

External Power

BX 18 MPUs
BX-DM1-18ED1-D
BX-DM1-18ED2-D
BX-DM1-18ER-D

BX 18E MPUs

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D
BX-DM1E-18ED23-D
BX-DM1E-18ER3-D

DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 36/36E MPUs
Power Supply Connections, 120–240 VAC

AC Powered Units
Part Number

External Power

BX 36 MPUs
BX-DM1-36ED1
BX-DM1-36ED2
BX-DM1-36ER
BX-DM1-36AR

BX 36E MPUs

24VDC

120–240 VAC
35VA
35V
35
VA

BX-DM1E-36ED13

0.3A

BX-DM1E-36ED23
BX-DM1E-36ER3
BX-DM1E-36AR3

AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA

1-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

BX 36/36E MPUs, Continued
Power Supply Connections, 12–24 VDC

DC Powered Units
Part Number

External Power

BX 36 MPUs
BX-DM1-36ED1-D
BX-DM1-36ED2-D
BX-DM1-36ER-D

BX 36E MPUs

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D
BX-DM1E-36ED23-D
BX-DM1E-36ER3-D

DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

Grounding
A good common ground reference (earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the BRX
MPU. One side of all control circuits, power circuits and the ground lead must be properly
connected to a common earth ground by either installing a ground rod in close proximity to
the enclosure or by connecting to the incoming power system ground. There must be a singlepoint ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in the enclosure that require an earth ground.
WARNING! Do not operate the BRX MPU without proper earth grounding.

Fuse Protection
The BRX MPU I/O circuits do not have internal fuses. In order to protect the MPU, we
suggest you add external fuses to your I/O wiring. A fast-blow fuse with a lower current
rating than the I/O bank common current rating can be wired to each common; or a fuse
with a rating of slightly less than the maximum current per output point can be added to each
output. Refer to the BRX MPU specifications for the model you are working with to find the
maximum current per output point or per output common. Adding the external fuse does not
guarantee the prevention of MPU damage, but it will provide added protection.
The image below shows a BRX platform MPU with Expansion Modules, where an external
power supply is wired through a fused terminal block. Various other I/O is wired to DIN rail
mounted fused terminal blocks.

PWR

RUN
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485

35VA

0.3A

GND
RX/DTX/D+

LNK

BX-DM1E-18ED13

1-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

ACT

ETHERNET

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

I/O Module Wiring Options
There are two available methods for wiring BRX MPUs and expansion modules: hand wiring
to the optional removable terminal blocks or using the ZIPLink wiring system (recommended).
Refer to the appropriate BRX MPU chapter to review detailed information on the wiring
options.

ZIPLink Wiring
System

ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cable

ZIPLink Remote
Feedthrough Terminal
Block Module

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Planning the I/O Wiring Routes
The following guidelines provide general information on how to wire the I/O connections
to the BRX platform. For specific information on wiring a particular component of the
BRX platform, refer to the wiring specifications in Chapters 2 through 5 for BRX MPUs and
Chapter 7 for I/O expansion modules.
1. If using removable terminal blocks or ZIPLink connector blocks, follow the wire size given
for the connection method.
2. Always use a continuous length of wire from BRX MPU to I/O connections or junction
panel terminations. Do not splice wires to attain a needed length.
3. Use the shortest run possible between devices.
4. Use conduit or wire trays for routing where possible.
5. Avoid running low voltage control wires near high voltage wiring.
6. Avoid confusion by separating input wiring runs from output wiring runs where possible.
7. To minimize voltage drops when wires must run long distances, consider using multiple
wires for the return line.
8. Avoid running DC wiring in close proximity to AC wiring where possible.
9. Avoid creating sharp bends in wire runs; follow accepted Electrical Code standards.
10. Route communications wiring separately from control and power wiring.

Auxiliary DC Power Supply
On AC powered BRX MPUs an integral auxiliary isolated 24VDC power supply with its
own isolation boundary is included. Since this is isolated it can be used to power input and/
or output circuits.
In some cases using the built-in auxiliary 24VDC supply can result in a cost savings for your
control system precluding the purchase of an addition external DC power source. It can
power combined loads up to 300mA. Be careful not to exceed the current rating of the supply.
As a system designer, you may be able to design or select field devices which can take advantage
of the 24VDC auxiliary supply.
WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

1-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

System Wiring Strategies
The BRX platform is very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations. By
studying this section before actual installation, you can find the best wiring strategy for your
application. This will help to lower system cost and wiring errors, while avoiding potential
safety problems.

MPU Isolation Boundaries
MPU circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries, shown in
the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, such that a fault in one area does not
damage another. The transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between the
primary and secondary sides. Optical isolators provide isolation in Input and Output circuits.
This isolates logic circuitry from the field side I/O. The discrete inputs are isolated from the
discrete outputs because each is isolated from the logic side. Isolation boundaries protect the
devices which are connected to the communication ports, such as PCs and HMIs, from power
input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a BRX MPU, it is extremely important to avoid
making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other.
PC, HMI, or other
communication devices

Power Input

Power
Input

MPU

Input

Output

Logic
Circuit

Input
Circuit

Output
Circuit

Filter
Optional
Logic Circuit

Com
Ports

Isolation Boundary

Logical Representation of Isolation Boundaries

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sinking/Sourcing Concepts
Before wiring field devices to the BRX MPU I/O, it’s necessary to have a basic understanding
of “sinking” and “sourcing” concepts. Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output
circuit discussions. The purpose of this section is to explain the terms. The short definitions
are as follows:
Sinking = Path to supply ground (–) or switching ground
Sourcing = Path to supply source (+) or switching +V

These terms only apply to DC circuits, not AC circuits. Input and output points that are
either sinking or sourcing can conduct current in only one direction. This means it is possible
to wire the external supply and field device to the I/O point with current trying to flow in the
wrong direction, in which case the circuit will not operate.
The diagram on the left shows a “sinking” MPU input.
MPU
Input
To properly connect the external supply, connect it so
(sinking)
that the input provides a path to ground (–). Start
+
at the MPU input terminal, follow through the input
Input
sensing circuit, exit at the common terminal, and
Sensing
–
connect the supply (–) to the common terminal.
Common
The switch between the supply (+) and the input
completes the circuit. Current flows in the direction
of the arrow when the switch is closed. By applying the circuit principle above to the four
possible combinations of input/output sinking/sourcing types, we have the four circuits as
shown below.
Sinking Input

Sinking Output
Input

MPU

Output

Load

+
–

+
Common

Input
Sensing

Sourcing Input
MPU

1-24

–

Common

Sourcing Output

Common

–

Output
Switch

Input

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Input
Sensing

MPU

Common
+

Output
Switch

Output

Load

–

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

I/O “Common Terminal” Concepts
In order for a BRX MPU I/O circuit to operate, current must enter at one terminal and exit at
another. This means at least two terminals are associated with every I/O point. In the figure
below, the input or output terminal is the main path for the current. One additional terminal
must provide the return path to the power supply.
If there was unlimited space then every I/O point could have two dedicated terminals as the
figure below shows. Providing this level of flexibility is not practical or necessary for most
applications.
MPU
Field
Device

Main Path
(I/O point)

I/O
Circuit

+
–
Return Path

Most I/O point groups share the return path (common) among two or more I/O points. The
figure below shows a group (or bank) of four input points which share a common return path.
In this way, the four inputs require only five terminals instead of eight.
MPU
Input Sensing
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
+
–

Common

Electrical Common
To All Input Points

NOTE: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is equal to the sum of the energized channels.
This is especially important in output circuits, where larger gauge wire is sometimes needed for the
commons.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

DC Input Wiring Methods
MPU DC Input

Input

Common

DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. The
dual diodes (shown in this diagram) allow current to flow in either
direction. Inputs grouped by a common point must be either all
sinking or all sourcing. DC inputs typically operate in the range of
12–24 VDC.

Sinking Input Sensor (NPN Type) to BRX MPU Sourcing Input
In the following example, a field device has an open-collector NPN transistor output. When
energized, it sinks current to ground from the DC input point. The input current is sourced
from the common terminal connected to power supply (+).
Field Device

Input
(sourcing)

Output
(sinking)

DC NPN Sensor
(Sinking)

MPU DC Input

MPU Input
(Sourcing)

Supply
Ground

–

Common

Sourcing Input Sensor (PNP Type) to BRX MPU Sinking Input
In the following example, a field device has an open-emitter PNP transistor output. When
energized, it sources current to the input point, which sinks the current to ground. Since the
field device loop is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required for the module.
Field Device

DC PNP Sensor
(Sourcing)

Input
(sinking)

MPU Input
(Sinking)

Output (sourcing)
Ground

Common

DC Output Wiring Methods
DC output circuits are wired as all current sinking or all current sourcing depending on which
output module part number is used. DC outputs typically operate in the range of 12–24 VDC.
MPU Sinking Output to Sourcing Load Device
Many applications require connecting a MPU output point to a DC input on a field device
load. This type of connection is made to carry a low-level DC signal.
In the following example, the MPU output point sinks current to ground (common) when
energized. The output is connected to a field device load with a sourcing input.
MPU DC Output
+DC Power

MPU Output
(Sinking)

Field Device
Power
Output
(sinking)

Common

1-26

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

+
–

Input
(sourcing)
12–24 VDC
Ground

DC Load
(Sourcing)

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines
MPUs DC Sinking Output to Sinking Load Device
In the example below, a sinking output point is connected to the sinking input of a field device
load. In this case, both the MPU output and field device input are sinking type. Since the
circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, we add sourcing capability to the MPU
output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit below, we connect Rpull-up from the output
to the DC output circuit power input.
MPU DC Output

MPU Output
(Sinking with
Pull-up Resistor)

+DC pwr

DC NPN Load
(Sinking)

Power
Field Device

pull-up
(sourcing)

(sinking)

Output
Supply
Common

Input
(sinking)

–

Ground

R input

NOTE: DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25mA) with this pull-up method.
NOTE: Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output point
logic. In other words, the field device input is energized when the MPU output is OFF, from a ladder logic
point-of-view. Your ladder program must take this into consideration and generate an inverted output. Or,
you may choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device.

It is important to choose the correct value of Rpull-up. In order to do so, we need to know the
nominal input current to the field device (Iinput) when the input is energized. If this value
is not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15mA). Then use Iinput and
the voltage of the external supply to compute Rpull-up. Then calculate the power Ppull-up (in
watts), in order to size Rpull-up properly.

I input =
R pull-up =

P pull-up =

Vinput

(turn–on)

R input
Vsupply – 0.7
I input

– R input

Vsupply
R pull-up

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Relay Outputs - Wiring Methods
Relays are best for the following applications:
• Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can deliver
• Cost-sensitive applications
• Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when some loads
require different voltages than other loads)
Relay with Form A contacts
Relay with Form A contacts Relay outputs are available in two contact arrangements. Form
A type, or SPST (single pole, single throw) type. They are
normally open and are the simplest to use. The Form C, or
SPDT (single pole, double throw) type has a center contact
which moves and a stationary contact on either side. This
provides a normally closed contact and a normally open contact.
Relay with Form C contacts
Relay with Form C contacts

The relays in some relay output modules share common
terminals, which connect to the wiper contact in each relay of
the bank. Other relay modules have relays which are completely
isolated from each other. In all cases, the module drives the
relay coil when the corresponding output point is on.

Some applications where relays would NOT be used:
• Loads that require currents under 10mA
• Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle.

1-28

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines

Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System
The following pages are intended to give a quick overview of the negative effects of transient
voltages on a control system and provide some simple advice on how to effectively minimize
them (Transient Voltage Suppression or TVS). The need for transient voltage suppression is
often not apparent to the newcomers in the automation world. Many mysterious errors that
can afflict an installation can be traced back to a lack of transient suppression.
What is a Transient Voltage and Why is it Bad?
Inductive loads (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages as they transition from being
energized to being de-energized. If not suppressed, the transient can be many times greater
than the voltage applied to the coil. These transient voltages can damage the BRX MPU
outputs or other sensitive electronic devices connected to the circuit, and cause unreliable
operation of adjacent electronics. Transients must be managed with suppressors (TVS) for
longer component life while sustaining reliable operation of the control system.
Examples of coil driven devices include: Relays, Contactors, Solenoids, Motor starters, Motors,
and Welders. This example shows a simple circuit with a small 24V/125mA/3W relay. As
you can see, when the switch is opened, thereby de-energizing the coil, the transient voltage
generated across the switch contacts peaks at 140V.
Example: Circuit with no Suppression

Oscilloscope

Volts
160
140
120

24 VDC

100

Relay Coil
(24V/125mA/3W,
AutomationDirect part no.
750R-2C-24D)

60
40
20
0
-20

In the same circuit, replacing the relay with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay will generate a
transient voltage exceeding 800V (not shown). Transient voltages like this can cause many
problems, including:
•

elay contacts driving the coil may experience arcing, which can pit the contacts and reduce the
R
relay’s lifespan.

•

S olid state (transistor) outputs driving the coil can be damaged if the transient voltage exceeds
the transistor’s ratings. In extreme cases, complete failure of the output can occur the very first
time a coil is de-energized.

•

I nput circuits, which might be connected to monitor the coil or the output driver, can also be
damaged by the transient voltage.

A very destructive side-effect of the arcing across relay contacts is the electromagnetic
interference (EMI) it can cause. This occurs because the arcing causes a current surge, which
releases RF energy. The entire length of wire between the relay contacts, the coil, and the power
source carries the current surge and becomes an antenna that radiates the RF energy. It will
readily couple into parallel wiring and may disrupt the MPU and other electronics in the area.
This EMI can make an otherwise stable control system behave unpredictably at times.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines
MPU’s Integrated Transient Suppressors
Although the BRX MPU outputs have integrated suppressors to protect against transients, they
are not capable of handling them all. It is usually necessary to have some additional transient
suppression for an inductive load.
Here is another example using the same 24V/125mA/3W relay used earlier. This example
measures the PNP transistor output of a typical MPU, which incorporates an integrated Zener
diode for transient suppression. Instead of the 140V peak in the first example, the transient
voltage here is limited to about 40V by the Zener diode. While the MPU will probably
tolerate repeated transients in this range for some time, the 40V is still beyond the module’s
peak output voltage rating of 30V.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Example: Small Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression
2VFLOORVFRSH

9ROWV
)RUWKLVH[DPSOHD9P$:
UHOD\LVXVHG $XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW
SDUWQR5&'

9'&

5HOD\
&RLO

The next example uses the same circuit as above, but with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay,
thereby creating a larger inductive load. As you can see, the transient voltage generated is much
worse, peaking at over 50V, yet considerably below the 800V mentioned earlier. Driving an
inductive load of this size(66% above rate voltage) without additional transient suppression is
very likely to permanently damage the MPU output.
Example: Larger Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression
2VFLOORVFRSH

9ROWV
)RUWKLVH[DPSOHDP$:
UHOD\LVXVHG $XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW
SDUWQR6&(*9'&

9'&

5HOD\
&RLO

Additional transient suppression should be used in both these examples. If you are unable
to measure the transients generated by the connected loads of your control system, using
additional transient suppression on all inductive loads would be the safest practice.

1-30

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines
Types of Additional Transient Protection
DC Coils:
The most effective protection against transients from a DC coil is a flyback diode. A flyback
diode can reduce the transient to roughly 1V over the supply voltage, as shown in this example.
DC Flyback Circuit

Volts
30

Oscilloscope

24 VDC

+
_

15
10
5
0
-5

Sinking

Sourcing

Many AutomationDirect socketed relays and motor starters have add-on flyback diodes
that plug or screw into the base, such as the AD-ASMD-250 protection diode module and
784-4C-SKT-1 socket module shown below. If an add-on flyback diode is not available for
your inductive load, an easy way to add one is to use AutomationDirect’s DN-D10DR-A
diode terminal block, a 600VDC power diode mounted in a slim DIN rail housing.

AD-ASMD-250
Protection Diode Module

784-4C-SKT-1
Relay Socket

DN-D10DR-A
Diode Terminal Block

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1-31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: General Installation and Wiring Guidelines
Two more common options for DC coils are Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) or TVS diodes.
These devices should be connected across the coil for best protection as shown below. The
optimum voltage rating is the lowest rated voltage available for the suppressor that will NOT
conduct at the supply voltage, while still allowing a safe margin.
AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-24 transorb module is a good choice for 24VDC circuits. It is
a bank of 8 uni-directional 30V TVS diodes. Since they are uni-directional, be sure to observe
the polarity during installation. MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes would install at the same
location, but have no polarity concerns.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

DC MOV or TVS Diode Circuit

24 VDC _

ZL-TSD8-24
Transorb Module

Sinking

Sourcing

AC Coils:
Two options for AC coils are MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes. These devices are most
effective at protecting the driver from a transient voltage when connected across the coil. The
optimum voltage rating for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that will NOT
conduct at the supply voltage, while still allowing a safe margin.
AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-120 transorb module is a good choice for 120VAC circuits. It
is a bank of eight bi-directional 180V TVS diodes.
AC MOV or Bi-Directional Diode Circuit

VAC

ZL-TSD8-120
Transorb Module

NOTE: Manufacturers of devices with coils frequently offer MOV or TVS diode suppressors as an
add-on option that mount conveniently across the coil. Before using them, carefully check the suppressor
ratings. Just because the suppressor is made specifically for that part does not mean it will reduce the
transient voltages to an acceptable level for your application.

For example, a MOV or TVS diode rated for use on 24–48 VDC coils would need to have a
high enough voltage rating to NOT conduct at 48V. That suppressor might typically start
conducting at roughly 60VDC. If it were mounted across a 24V coil, transients of roughly
84V (if sinking output) or -60V (if sourcing output) could reach the MPU output. Many
semiconductor MPU outputs cannot tolerate such levels.

1-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX ME Wiring

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Overview..................................................................................................................... 2-2
BX-DM1E-M Wiring.................................................................................................... 2-4
BX-DM1E-M-D Wiring................................................................................................ 2-6

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

1 BX ME Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
Overview
2
The BX ME Micro PLC Unit (MPUs) includes two different
versions. Both have the same appearance and basic features,
the only difference being that one unit is externally powered
3
with 12–24 VDC and the other unit is externally powered with
120–240 VAC.
4
The units have no built-in I/O points. This allows use as a
standalone controller unit with no I/O or you can customize
5
the I/O to meet the needs of your application by adding BRX
Expansion Modules. All MPUs can expand their capacity with
the addition of as many as eight (8) BRX Expansion Modules,
6
allowing more flexibility while keeping control cost down.
7
General Specifications
•
Support for 8 additional Expansion Modules (See Chapter 7).
•
No built-in discrete I/O points
8
•
No built-in analog I/O points
•
Serial port for RS232/485 communications
9
•
RJ45 port for Ethernet communications
•
MicroSD slot
10
•
Pluggable Option Module (POM) for an additional
communications port
11
Power Supply Connector
12
The power supply terminal block connectors are included
with this MPU. The power supply connectors are a screw
type, removable terminal block. Replacement connectors and
13
specifications are listed in the tables that follow.
14
15
A
B
C
D
2-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX-DM1E-M
120–240 VAC

BX-DM1E-M-D
12–24 VDC

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

BX-DM1E-M AC Power Supply Connector Specifications
BX-RTB05
(Included w/Unit)

Part Number

BX-RTB05-1

BX-RTB05-2

Connector Type

Screw Type-90 deg

Spring Clamp Type-180 deg

Screw Type-180 deg

Wire Exit

180 deg

Pitch

5.0 mm

Screw Size

M2.5

N/A

M2.5

Recommended Screw Torque

< 3.98 lb·in (0.45 N·m)

N/A

< 3.98 lb·in (0.45 N·m)

Screwdriver Blade Width

3.5 mm

Wire Gauge (Single wire)

28–12 AWG

28–14 AWG

Wire Gauge (Two wire)

28–16 AWG

28–16 AWG
(Dual Wire Ferrule Required)

Wire Strip Length

0.3 in (7.5 mm)

0.37 in (9.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle P/N

5ESDV-05P-BK

5ESDSR-05P-BK

BX-RTB05-1

BX-RTB05

BX-RTB05-2

BX-DM1E-M-D DC Power Supply Connector Specifications

Part Number

BX-RTB03 (Included w/Unit)

BX-RTB03-1

Connector Type

Screw Type-90 deg

Spring Clamp Type-180 deg

Wire Exit

180 deg

Pitch

5.0 mm

Screw Size

M2.5

N/A

Recommended Screw Torque

< 3.98 lb·in (0.45 N·m)

N/A

Screwdriver Blade Width

3.5 mm

Wire Gauge (Single wire)

28–12 AWG

28-14 AWG

Wire Gauge (Two wires)

28–16 AWG

28-16 AWG
(Dual Wire Ferrule Required)

Wire Strip Length

0.3 in (7.5 mm)

0.37 in (9.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle P/N

5ESDV-03P-BK

5ESDSR-03P-BK

BX-RTB03

BX-RTB03-1

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

2-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-M Wiring
•

Serial port for RS232/485 communications

•

RJ45 port for Ethernet communications

•

MicroSD slot

•

Pluggable Option Module (POM) for an additional
communications port

•

No built-in discrete I/O

•

No built-in analog I/O

•

Requires an external 120–240 VAC external power supply.

•

Includes an integral 24VDC auxiliary output power supply.
BX-DM1E-M

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to add I/O capability.

Power Supply Specifications

2-4

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Output Protection for Over Current, Over
Voltage, and Over Temperature

Self resetting

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting
short circuit protection

Operating Design Life

10 years at full load at 40°C ambient, 5 years at 60°C ambient

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

BX-DM1E-M Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Connections, 120–240 VAC
Pin

Connection

GND

V–

V+

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AC Power In

120–240 VAC

AC
Power

–
+

L
N
GND
VV+

Auxillary out

24VDC

300mA max.

Removable Connector Included
ADC Part # BX-RTB05

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

2-5

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-M-D Wiring
•

Serial port for RS232/485 communications

•

RJ45 port for Ethernet communications

•

MicroSD slot

•

Pluggable Option Module (POM) for an additional
communications port

•

No built-in discrete I/O

•

No built-in analog I/O

•

Requires an external 12–24 VDC external power supply.

•

No integral 24VDC auxiliary output power supply.
BX-DM1E-M-D

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to add I/O capability.

Power Supply Specifications

2-6

Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Output Protection for Over Current,
Over Voltage, and Over Temperature

Self resetting

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Operating Design Life

10 years at full load at 40°C ambient, 5 years at 60°C ambient

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

BX-DM1E-M-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Connections, 12–24 VDC
Pin

Connection

1
2
3

GND
In –
In +

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

GND
PWRPWR+

Removable Connector Included
ADC Part # BX-RTB03

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

2-7

Chapter 2: BX ME Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Notes:

2-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX 10/10E Wiring

Chapter

In This Chapter...
BX 10/10E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).......................................................................... 3-2
Overview..................................................................................................................... 3-2
BX 10/10E MPUs ........................................................................................................ 3-2
BX 10/10E Wiring Termination Selection.................................................................. 3-5
Terminal Block Connectors......................................................................................... 3-5
ZIPLink Prewired Cable Solutions.............................................................................. 3-6
ZIPLink System Examples........................................................................................... 3-7
BX 10 Micro PLC Units (MPUs).................................................................................. 3-8
BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring........................................................................................... 3-8
BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring......................................................................................... 3-14
BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring............................................................................................ 3-20
BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring........................................................................................... 3-26
BX 10E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).............................................................................. 3-32
BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring..................................................................................... 3-32
BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring..................................................................................... 3-40
BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring........................................................................................ 3-48
BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring....................................................................................... 3-56

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1 BX 10/10E Micro PLC Units (MPUs)
Overview
2
The BX 10/10E Micro PLC Unit (MPU) includes eight different versions. All have the same
appearance and basic features. All units have six (6) discrete input points, and four (4) discrete
output points built-in. Units with DC inputs have six (6) selectable high-speed inputs and
3
units with DC outputs have two (2) selectable high-speed outputs. All MPUs can expand their
capacity with the BRX Expansion Modules to allow for more flexibility while keeping control
4
cost down. BX 10E units have an additional one (1) analog input and one (1) analog output
built-in that are current/voltage selectable within the software.
5
The units ship without wiring terminals. This allows you to select the terminal block type that
best fits your application. There are several wiring options available, including screw terminal
6
connectors, spring clamp terminal connectors and prewired ZIPLink cable solutions.
BX 10/10E MPUs
7
BX 10/10E MPUs can be divided into two distinct groups, BX 10 and BX 10E. The BX 10
MPUs have no built-in analog I/O or Ethernet port. The BX 10E MPUs have the same features
8
of the BX 10, plus built-in analog I/O and an Ethernet port.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
3-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX 10 MPUs
General Specifications
10 discrete I/O points: 6 inputs, 4 outputs
No built-in analog I/O points
All units are externally powered by a nominal 12–24 VDC
Models with DC inputs have 6 high speed inputs up to 250kHz
Models with DC inputs can accept 12–24 nominal voltages AC or DC
Models with DC inputs can be wired as sinking or sourcing
Models with AC inputs can accept 120–240 nominal voltages
Output types available are DC sinking, DC sourcing, and relay
Models with DC outputs have 2 high speed outputs up to 250kHz
Support for 2 additional Expansion Modules

BX 10
Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
No Built-in Analog or Ethernet

The following table shows the available MPUs with the BX 10 feature set.

BX 10 MPUs
Part Number

External
Power

Discrete Input

12–24 VDC

6 HighSpeed,
Sinking or
Sourcing

2 High-Speed
2 Standard
DC Sourcing

BX-DM1-10ER-D
BX-DM1-10AR-D

Expansion
Modules

2 High-Speed
2 Standard
DC Sinking

BX-DM1-10ED1-D

BX-DM1-10ED2-D

Discrete Output

6 Standard
AC

4 Form A Relay

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 10E MPUs
General Specifications
10 discrete I/O points: 6 in/4 out
All units are externally powered by a nominal 12–24 VDC
Models with DC inputs:

- have 6 high speed inputs up to 250kHz
- accept 12–24 nominal voltages AC or DC
- can be wired as sinking or sourcing.
Models with AC inputs can accept 120–240 nominal voltages
All units have a built-in RJ-45 Ethernet port, 10/100 Mbps
All units have 1 analog input (current/voltage software selectable)
Output types available are DC sinking, DC sourcing, and relay

BX 10E
Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
Built-in Analog or Ethernet

Models with DC outputs have 2 high speed outputs up to 250kHz
Support for 2 additional Expansion Modules

The following table shows the available MPUs with the BX 10E feature set.

BX 10E MPUs
Part Number

External
Power

Discrete
Inputs

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D

6 High-Speed,
Sinking or
Sourcing

12–24 VDC

Discrete
Output

2 High-Speed
2 Standard
DC Sourcing
4 Form A Relay

6 Standard AC

* Analog can be current or voltage software selectable per channel.

3-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Input

Output

Expansion
Modules

2 High-Speed
2 Standard
DC Sinking

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D
BX-DM1E-10AR3-D

Analog*

1
1 Current
Current
or
or
Voltage
Voltage

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX 10/10E Wiring Termination Selection
The BX 10/10E MPUs ship without wiring terminals. This allows you to select the terminal
block type that best fits your application. There are several wiring options available, including
removable screw terminal connectors, removable spring clamp terminal connectors and prewired
ZIPLink cable solutions.

Terminal Block Connectors
The terminal block connectors are provided in kits and can be easily ordered as a single part
number to receive all the terminal block connectors needed. Each kit for the BX 10/10E MPU
comes with two (2) 10-pin, 3.8 mm terminal blocks. On the BX 10/10E MPUs the terminals
are organized into groups consisting of 3 inputs with an isolated common and 2 outputs with
an isolated common, e.g., Inputs X0-X2 are in a group with their common terminal.
The terminal block connector kit part numbers and connector specifications are listed in the
table below.

Terminal Block Connector Specifications

Kit Part Number

BX-RTB10

BX-RTB10-1

BX-RTB10-2

Connector Type

Screw Type-90 degree

Spring Clamp Type-180 degree

Screw Type-180 degree

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

3.81 mm

Screw Size

N/A

Recommended
Screw Torque

<1.77 lb·in
(0.2 N·m)

N/A

<1.77 lb·in
(0.2 N·m)

Screwdriver
Blade Width

2.5 mm

Wire Gauge
(Single Wire)

28–16 AWG

28–18 AWG

30–16 AWG

Wire Gauge
(Dual Wire)

28–16 AWG

30–20 AWG
(Dual Wire Ferrule Required)

30–18 AWG

Wire Strip Length

0.24 in (6mm)

0.35 in (9mm)

0.26 in (6.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle
part #

EC381V-10P-BK

ESC381V-10-BK

EC381F-10P-BK

BX-RTB10

BX-RTB10-1

BX-RTB10-2

NOTE: For replacement terminal blocks, the appropriate part number in the table above should be ordered.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

ZIPLink Prewired Cable Solutions
ZIPLinks eliminate the normally tedious process of wiring between devices by utilizing prewired
cables and DIN rail mount connector modules. It’s as simple as plugging in a cable connector
at either end or terminating wires at only one end. Prewired cables keep installation clean
and efficient, using less space at a fraction of the cost of standard terminal blocks. ZIPLink
prewired cables can connect directly to a ZIPlink remote terminal block module or with the
pigtail option they can allow for a convenient solution to wire the BRX platform to 3rd party
devices. For the BX 10/10E MPUs, one cable and one feedthrough module is needed to
connect to onboard wiring termination points. There are two feedthrough module options
available, the ZL-RTB20 and the ZL-RTB20-1. The ZL-RTB20 is a standard feedthrough
terminal module and the ZL-RTB20-1 is a compact feedthrough terminal block module and
has a compact footprint which takes up less space in the control cabinet.
The ZIPLink system options for the BX 10/10E MPUs are listed in the table below.

BX 10/10E ZIPLink Selector
MPU Part Number

Component

Module Part No.

Cable Part No.*

BX-DM1-10ED1-D
BX-DM1-10ED2-D
BX-DM1-10ER-D
BX-DM1-10AR-D

Feedthrough

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D
BX-DM1E-10ED23-D

ZL-RTB20
(Standard)
OR
ZL-RTB20-1
(Compact)

ZL-BX-CBL20
ZL-BX-CBL20-1
ZL-BX-CBL20-2

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D
BX-DM1E-10AR3-D

* Select the cable length: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, -2 = 2.0 m.
Available pigtail cables: ZL-BX-CBL20-1P = 1.0 m, ZL-BX-CBL20-2P = 2.0 m.

ZIPLink Prewired Cables
Custom molded ZIPLink prewired cables allow for fast and easy connection of field wiring and
remote I/O to the BRX platform. The prewired cables are available in 0.5 meter, 1 meter and
2 meter lengths. Pigtail cables are used to connect the BRX platform directly to third-party
devices, lowering your wiring cost and time. The pigtail cables are available in 1 meter and 2
meter lengths.

ZL-BX-CBL20
ZIPLink Prewired Cable

3-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

ZL-BX-CBL20-1P
ZIPLink Pigtail Cable

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

ZIPLink Remote Feedthrough Modules
Feedthrough modules provide low-cost and compact field wiring screw termination solutions
for quickly connecting with the BRX platform. There are 2 modules available for use with
the BRX platform. The ZL-RTB20 and the ZL-RTB20-1. The ZL-RTB20 is a standard 2
row, 20-pin, DIN rail mountable feedthrough module. The ZL-RTB20-1 is a compact 3 row,
24-pin DIN rail mountable feedthrough module with a smaller footprint design.
The ZIPLink remote feedthrough module specifications are listed in the table below.

ZIPLink Module Specifications
Part Number
Number of
positions

ZL-RTB20
(Maximum of 2 Needed)
20 screw terminals, 2 rows

Screwdriver Width

ZL-RTB20-1
(Maximum of 2 Needed)
24 screw terminals, 3 rows

1/8 in (3.8 mm) maximum

Screw Torque

4.4 lb·in (0.5 N·m)

ZL-RTB20

ZL-RTB20-1

ZIPLink System Examples

BX 10E with ZIPLink
Pigtail Cable
ZL-BX-CBL20-1P
BX 10E MPU with ZIPLink
System pre-wired cable and
feedthrough module.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1 BX 10 Micro PLC Units (MPUs)
BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring
2
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the
3
front left of the unit; organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated
common each.
Four (4) discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the front left of the
4
unit. The outputs are organized into groups of 3 terminals consisting of 2 outputs and an isolated
common each.
5
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
6
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The three (3) terminals between the power supply and
7
the inputs are not used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO
THESE TERMINALS!
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NOTE: Two (2) Expansion modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.
A
B
C
D
BX-DM1-10ED1-D

3-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

< 9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-9

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X5
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

3-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

AC Input
nC

All Expansion units with
Xn 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3
Xn
Xn

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

COM

9-30 VDC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-11

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (2 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y1

Y2...Y3

< 2µs

< 5ms

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

External fusing recommended

1. All outputs may be used as standard outputs. Only the first 2 outputs (Y0...Y1) are capable of high
speed DC operation.
2. When the high-speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.

3-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
Sinking Output

nC
Yn

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Yn
Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
LOAD

LOAD

OUTPUT

LOAD

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

COM

5-36 VDC
OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

NOTE: When the high speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.
FAULT
DETECT

COM

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition
5-36 VDC

3-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the
front left of the unit; organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated
common in each group.
Four (4) discrete outputs - sourcing; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the front left of
the unit. The outputs are organized into groups of 3 terminals consisting of 2 outputs and an isolated
common in each group.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The three (3) terminals between the power supply and
the inputs are not used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO
THESE TERMINALS.

BX-DM1-10ED2-D

NOTE: Two (2) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

3-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-15

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X5
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

3-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

AC Input
nC

Xn
AllX Expansion units with 12-24
VDC inputs – ND3
Xn
Xn

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

COM

9-30 VDC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-17

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (2 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y1

Y2...Y3

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

3-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

Sourcing Output
Y

LOAD

nC
Yn
Yn

5-36 VDC

LOAD

COM
Logic
Output

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
COM
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT

COM
FAULT
DETECT

LOAD

5-36 VDC

NOTE: When
the high speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on.
Logic
Output
The output
LED’s will remain operational even though theOUTPUT
output circuitry is turned off and no power is
LOAD
flowing. This condition is not reported to the CPU.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the
front left of the unit; organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated
common in each group.
Four (4) discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located
along the front left of the unit. The outputs are organized into groups of three terminals consisting
of two outputs and an isolated common in each group.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The three (3) terminals between the power supply and
the inputs are not used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING
TO THESE TERMINALS!

BX-DM1-10ER-D

NOTE: Two (2) Expansion modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

3-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-21

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X5
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

3-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

AC Input
nC

Xn
AllX Expansion units with 12-24
VDC inputs – ND3
Xn
Xn

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

COM

* Same for both Standard and High Speed
9-30 VDC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-23

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (2 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC), 300µA (AC) due to RC snubber circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y3

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

3-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Relay Output
Y

LOAD

nC
Yn

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion
with Relay, form A, – TR
Yn
LOAD

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-25

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - AC rated for 120–240 VAC. They are located along the front left of the unit;
organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated common in each group.
Four (4) discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located
along the front left of the unit. The outputs are organized into groups of 3 terminals consisting of 2
outputs and an isolated common in each group.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The three (3) terminals between the power supply and
the inputs are not used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO
THESE TERMINALS.

BX-DM1-10AR-D

NOTE: Two (2) Expansion modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

3-26

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-27

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range

85–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

264VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

15kΩ

Input Current (typical)

9mA @ 120VAC, 13mA @ 220VAC

Maximum Input Current

14mA @ 120VAC, 20mA @ 220VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 85VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 40VAC

Maximum OFF Current

2.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Type

Standard

Location

X0..X5

OFF - ON Response

10ms

ON - OFF Response

10ms

Input Details

3-28

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AC Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry

DI 110/220VAC Input

Internal Circuitry
IN

Logical Input

COM

85-264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-29

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range
Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC), 300µA (AC) due to RC snubber circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y3

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

3-30

5–60 VDC
18–264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1-10AR-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Relay Output
Y

nC
Yn
Yn

LOAD

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR
LOAD

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-31

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1 BX 10E Micro PLC Units (MPUs)
BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring
2
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the
front left of the unit; organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated
3
common in each group.
Four (4) discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the front left of the
4
unit. The outputs are organized into groups of 3 terminals consisting of 2 outputs and an isolated
common in each group.
5
One (1) analog input and one (1) analog output. The analog inputs and outputs are located along
the front left side of the unit. The analog inputs and outputs are grouped together on 3 terminals
consisting of 1 analog input, 1 analog output and a shared analog common.
6
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
7
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20 mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
8
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
NOTE: Two (2) Expansion modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.
C
D
BX-DM1E-10ED13-D

3-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-33

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC

Location

X0...X5
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

3-34

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

AC Input

nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

All Expansion units with 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

COM

9-30 VDC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-35

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (2 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y1

Y2...Y3

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Output Type
Location

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

3-36

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
Sinking Output

nC
Yn

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion
units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
Yn
LOAD

LOAD

OUTPUT

LOAD

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

COM

5-36 VDC
OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM

BRX User Manual, 2nd
Edition
5-36 VDC

3-37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Connections Options
Analog Voltage Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

WX0

Fuse

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

1C
WX0
WY0

.032A WX0
-

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

3-Wire Transmitter

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

Power
Supply

Fuse
.032A

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

1C
WX0
WY0

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

Fuse
.032A

–

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

3-38

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Conversion

< 1ms

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connections Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

1C
WX0
WY0

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A

WY0

Fuse

Load
Power Supply

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-39

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the
front left of the unit; organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated
common in each group.
Four (4) discrete outputs - sourcing; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the front left of
the unit. The outputs are organized into groups of 3 terminals consisting of 2 outputs and an isolated
common in each group.
One (1) analog input and one (1) analog output. The analog inputs and outputs are located along
the front left side of the unit. The analog inputs and outputs are grouped together on 3 terminals
consisting of 1 analog input, 1 analog output and a shared analog common.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20 mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D

NOTE: Two (2) Expansion modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

3-40

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Operating Design Life

10 years at full load at 40°C ambient, 5 years at 60°C ambient

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-41

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X5
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

3-42

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

AC Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

All Expansion units with 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

COM

9-30 VDC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-43

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (2 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y1

Y2...Y3

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

3-44

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

Sourcing Output
Y

LOAD

nC
Yn
Yn

LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

COM12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-45

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Connections Options
Analog Voltage Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

1C
WX0
WY0

.032A WX0
-

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

3-Wire Transmitter

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

Power
Supply

Fuse
.032A

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

1C
WX0
WY0

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

3-46

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connections Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

1C
WX0
WY0

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A

WY0

Fuse

Load
Power Supply

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-47

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the
front left of the unit; organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated
common in each group.
Four (4) discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 6–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located
along the front left of the unit. The outputs are organized into groups of 3 terminals consisting of 2
outputs and an isolated common in each group.
One (1) analog input and one (1) analog output. The analog inputs and outputs are located along
the front left side of the unit. The analog inputs and outputs are grouped together on 3 terminals
consisting of 1 analog input, 1 analog output and a shared analog common.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20 mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D

NOTE: Two (2) Expansion modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

3-48

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specification

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Operating Design Life

10 years at full load at 40°C ambient, 5 years at 60°C ambient

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-49

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X5
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

3-50

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

AC Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

All Expansion units with 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

COM

9-30 VDC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-51

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (2 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC), 300µA (AC) due to RC snubber circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y3

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

3-52

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Relay Output
nC

Y
Yn
PLC with Relay,
form A – R and Expansion
with Relay, form A, – TR
LOAD

LOAD

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-53

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Connections Options
Analog Voltage Input Circuits

AC or DC

WX0

.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter

Fuse

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

1C
WX0
WY0

.032A WX0
-

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

3-Wire Transmitter

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

Power
Supply

Fuse
.032A

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

1C
WX0
WY0

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

3-54

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connections Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

1C
WX0
WY0

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A

WY0

Fuse

Load
Power Supply

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-55

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring
This MPU has 10 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
Six (6) discrete inputs - AC rated for 120–240 VAC. They are located along the front left of the unit;
organized into groups of 4 terminals consisting of 3 inputs and an isolated common in each group.
Four (4) discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 6–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located
along the front left of the unit. The outputs are organized into groups of 3 terminals consisting of 2
outputs and an isolated common in each group.
One (1) analog input and one (1) analog output. The analog inputs and outputs are located along
the front left side of the unit. The analog inputs and outputs are grouped together on 3 terminals
consisting of 1 analog input, 1 analog output and a shared analog common.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20 mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D

NOTE: Two (2) Expansion modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

3-56

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

14W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Operating Design Life

10 years at full load at 40°C ambient, 5 years at 60°C ambient

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power In

12–24 VDC

DC
Power -

G
ININ+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-57

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (3 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range

85–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

264VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

15kΩ

Input Current (typical)

9mA @ 120VAC, 13mA @ 220VAC

Maximum Input Current

14mA @ 120VAC, 20mA @ 220VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 85VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 40VAC

Maximum OFF Current

2.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Type

Standard

Location

X0..X5

OFF - ON Response

10ms

ON - OFF Response

10ms

Input Details

3-58

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AC Input
nC
Xn
Xn
Xn

DI 110/220VAC Input

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry

Internal Circuitry
IN

Logical Input

COM

85-264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-59

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (2 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC), 300µA (AC) due to RC snubber circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y3

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

3-60

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Relay Output
Y

LOAD

nC
Yn
Yn

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR
LOAD

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-61

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Connections Options
Analog Voltage Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

1C
WX0
WY0

.032A WX0
-

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

3-Wire Transmitter

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

Power
Supply

Fuse
.032A

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

1C
WX0
WY0

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

3-62

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connections Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

1C
WX0
WY0

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A

WY0

Fuse

Load
Power Supply

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

3-63

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: BX 10/10E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Notes:

3-64

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX 18/18E Wiring
In This Chapter...

Chapter

Overview..................................................................................................................... 4-2
BX 18/18E MPUs ........................................................................................................ 4-2
General Specifications................................................................................................ 4-3
BX 18/18E MPU Wiring Termination Selection......................................................... 4-5
Terminal Block Connectors......................................................................................... 4-5
ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cable Solutions............................................................................ 4-7
ZIPLink System Examples........................................................................................... 4-9
BX 18 Micro PLC Units (MPUs)................................................................................ 4-10
BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring ............................................................................................ 4-10
BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring......................................................................................... 4-16
BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring ............................................................................................ 4-22
BX-DM1-18ED2-D Wiring......................................................................................... 4-28
BX-DM1-18ER Wiring............................................................................................... 4-34
BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring............................................................................................ 4-40
BX-DM1-18AR Wiring............................................................................................... 4-46
BX 18E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).............................................................................. 4-52
BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring......................................................................................... 4-52
BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring..................................................................................... 4-61
BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring......................................................................................... 4-70
BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring..................................................................................... 4-79
BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring............................................................................................ 4-88
BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring........................................................................................ 4-97
BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring......................................................................................... 4-106

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1 BX 18/18E Micro PLC Units (MPUs)
Overview
2
The BX 18/18E Micro PLC Unit (MPU) includes fourteen different versions having the same
appearance and basic features. All units have 10 discrete input points and 8 discrete output
points built-in. Units with DC inputs have 10 selectable high-speed inputs and units with DC
3
outputs have 4 selectable high-speed outputs. All MPUs can expand their I/O capacity with the
BRX Expansion Modules, allowing for more flexibility while keeping control cost down. BX
4
18E units additionally have 1 analog input and 1 analog output built-in that are current/voltage
selectable within the software.
5
BX 18/18E MPUs
BX 18/18E MPUs are divided into two distinct groups, BX 18 and BX 18E. The BX 18 MPUs
6
have no built-in analog I/O or Ethernet port. The BX 18E MPUs have all the features of the
BX 18, plus built-in analog I/O and an Ethernet port.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
24VDC

35VA

0.3A

BX 18 Micro PLC Unit (MPU) No Built-in Analog or Ethernet

BX 18E Micro PLC Unit (MPU) with
Built-in Analog and Ethernet Port

4-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX 18 MPUs
General Specifications
18 discrete I/O points: 10 input, 8 output

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

24VDC

No built-in analog I/O points

35VA

0.3A

Models with DC inputs:

- have 10 high-speed inputs rated
up to 250kHz
- accept 12–24 nominal voltage,
AC or DC
- can be wired as sinking or
sourcing

BX 18 Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
No Built-in Analog or Ethernet

Models with AC inputs can accept 120–240
nominal voltages

Output types available are DC sinking, DC sourcing, and relay
Models with DC outputs have 4 high-speed outputs rated up to 250kHz
Support for 4 additional Expansion Modules

The following table shows the available BX 18 MPUs.

BX 18 MPUs
Part Number

External
Power

BX-DM1-18ED1

120–240 VAC

BX-DM1-18ED1-D

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1-18ED2

120–240 VAC

BX-DM1-18ED2-D

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1-18ER

120–240 VAC

BX-DM1-18ER-D

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1-18AR

120–240 VAC

Discrete Input

Discrete Output

Expansion
Modules

4 High-Speed
4 Standard
DC Sinking
10 High-Speed,
DC Sinking or
Sourcing

4 High-Speed
4 Standard
DC Sourcing

8 Form A Relay
10 Standard AC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-3

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 18E MPUs
General Specifications
18 Discrete I/O points: 10 inputs, 8 outputs
All units have 1 analog input and 1 analog
output (current/voltage software selectable)
All units have built-in Ethernet port,
10/100 Mbps
Models with DC inputs:

- have 10 high-speed inputs rated
up to 250kHz
- accept 12–24 nominal voltages,
AC or DC
- can be wired as sinking or
sourcing

BX 18E Micro PLC Unit (MPU) with
Built-in Analog and Ethernet Port

Models with AC inputs can accept 120–240 nominal voltages
Output types available are DC sinking, DC sourcing, and relay
Models with DC outputs have 4 high-speed outputs rated up to 250kHz
Support for 8 additional Expansion Modules

The following table shows the available BX 18E MPUs.

BX 18E MPUs
Part Number

External
Power

BX-DM1E-18ED13

120–240 VAC

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1E-18ED23

120–240 VAC

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1E-18ER3

120–240 VAC

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D

12–24 VDC

BX-DM1E-18AR3

120–240 VAC

Discrete
Input

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Analog *
Input

Output

Expansion
Modules

4 High-Speed
4 Standard
DC sinking
10 HighSpeed, DC
Sinking or
Sourcing

4 High-Speed
4 Standard
DC sourcing

8 Form A relay
10 Standard
AC

* Analog can be current or voltage software selectable per channel.

4-4

Discrete
Output

1
Current
or
Voltage

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX 18/18E MPU Wiring Termination Selection
The BX 18/18E MPUs ship without terminal blocks. This allows you to select the
termination type that best suits your application. There are several wiring options available,
including removable screw terminal connectors, removable spring clamp terminal connectors
and pre-wired ZIPLink cable solutions.

Terminal Block Connectors
The terminal block connectors are provided in kits and can be ordered as a single part number.
Each kit contains all the terminal block connectors required: (3) 5-pin 5mm terminal blocks
(BX-RTB05), (2) 6-pin 5mm terminal blocks (BX-RTB06), and (1) 3-pin 5mm terminal block
(BX-RTB03).
The BX 18/18E MPUs terminals are configured into groups of 5 inputs and 4 outputs each
with an isolated common, e.g., inputs X0–X4 are grouped with their common terminal. On
the BX 18E MPU the analogs are grouped as 3 terminals consisting of 1 input, 1 output and
a shared isolated analog common. The I/O termination groups are isolated such that a single
group connector can be removed without affecting other groups of I/O or the external power
source.
The terminal block connector kit part numbers and connector specifications are listed in the
table below.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Kit Part Number

BX-RTB18

BX-RTB18-1

Connector Type

Screw Type-90 degree

Spring Clamp Type-180
degree

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

5.0 mm

Screw Size

M2.5

N/A

Recommended Screw Torque

< 3.98 lb·in (0.45 N·m)

N/A

Screwdriver Blade Width

3.5 mm

Wire Gauge (Single Wire)

28–12 AWG

28–14 AWG

Wire Gauge (Dual Wire)

28–16 AWG

28–16 AWG
(Dual wire ferrule
required)

Wire Strip Length

0.3 in (7.5 mm)

0.37 in (9.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle P/N

5ESDV-0nP-BK*

5ESDSR-0nP-BK*

* Replace n with: (3) 3-terminal, (5) 5-terminal or (6) for 6-terminal.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-RTB18 Screw Terminal Block Kit
This terminal block kit has 90 degree screw terminal blocks. Wire is 180 degree pass through.

5-Pin

6-Pin

3-Pin

BX-RTB18-1 Spring Terminal Block Kit
This terminal block kit has Spring Clamp wire terminal blocks with 180 degree wire pass
through.

5-Pin

6-Pin

3-Pin

Replacement terminal blocks can be ordered online at:
www. automationdirect.com. Single replacement terminal blocks are listed in table below.

Replacement Terminal Blocks
BX-RTB18

4-6

BX-RTB18-1

3-pin

BX-RTB03

BX-RTB03-1

5-pin

BX-RTB05

BX-RTB05-1

6-pin

BX-RTB06

BX-RTB06-1

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cable Solutions
ZIPLinks eliminate the normally tedious process of wiring between devices by utilizing prewired
cables and DIN rail mount connector modules. ZIPLinks are as simple as plugging in a cable
connector at either end or terminating wires at only one end. Prewired cables keep installation
clean and efficient, using less space at a fraction of the cost of standard terminal blocks.
ZIPLink prewired cables can connect directly to a ZIPlink remote terminal block module or
with the pigtail option, allowing for a convenient solution to wire the BRX platform to 3rd
party devices. For the BX 18/18E MPUs, two (2) cables and two (2) ZIPlink feedthrough
modules are needed to connect all the wiring termination points.
There are two (2) feedthrough module options available, the ZL-RTB20 and the ZL-RTB20-1.
The ZL-RTB20 is a standard feedthrough remote terminal module while the RTB20-1 is a
feedthrough remote terminal block having a more compact footprint, requiring less space in
the control cabinet.
The ZIPLink system options for the BX 18/18E MPUs are listed in the table below.

BX 18/18E ZIPLink Selector
Part Number

Module Type

Module Part No.

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20,
(standard)
-ORZL-RTB20-1
(compact)

Max Qty Cable Part No.*
Needed

Max Qty
Needed

BX-DM1-18ED1
BX-DM1-18ED1-D
BX-DM1-18ED2
BX-DM1-18ED2-D
BX-DM1-18ER
BX-DM1-18ER-D
BX-DM1-18AR
BX-DM1E-18ED13
BX-DM1E-18ED13-D

ZL-BX-CBL15
ZL-BX-CBL15-1
ZL-BX-CBL15-2

BX-DM1E-18ED23
BX-DM1E-18ED23-D
BX-DM1E-18ER3
BX-DM1E-18ER3-D
BX-DM1E-18AR3

* Select the cable length: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, -2 = 2.0 m.
Available pigtail cables: ZL-BX-CBL15-1P = 1.0 m, ZL-BX-CBL15-2P = 2.0 m.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

ZIPLink Prewired Cables
Custom molded ZIPLink prewired cables allow for fast and easy connection of field wiring and
remote I/O to the BRX platform. The prewired cables are available in 0.5 meter, 1 meter and
2 meter lengths. Pigtail cables are used to connect the BRX platform directly to third-party
devices, reducing your wiring time and cost. The pigtail cables are available in 1 meter and 2
meter lengths.

ZIPLink Prewired Cable

ZIPLink Pigtail Cable

ZIPLink Remote Feedthrough Modules
Remote Feedthrough modules provide low-cost and compact field wiring screw termination
solutions for quickly connecting with the BRX platform. There are two (2) modules available
for use with the BRX platform. The ZL-RTB20 and the ZL-RTB20-1. The ZL-RTB20 is
a standard 2-row, 20-pin, DIN rail mountable feedthrough module. The ZL-RTB20-1 is a
compact 3-row, 24-pin, DIN rail mountable feedthrough module with a smaller footprint
design.
ZIPLink remote feedthrough module specifications are listed in this table.

ZIPLink Module Specifications
Part Number
Number of
positions

ZL-RTB20
(Maximum of 2 Needed)
20 screw terminals, 2 rows

Screwdriver Width

24 screw terminals, 3 rows

1/8 in (3.8 mm) maximum

Screw Torque

4.4 lb·in (0.5 N·m)

ZL-RTB20

4-8

ZL-RTB20-1
(Maximum of 2 Needed)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

ZL-RTB20-1

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

ZIPLink System Examples

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 18 MPU with ZIPLink pre-wired cables and ZL-RTB20 feedthrough modules.

BX 18 MPU with ZIPLink pigtail cables installed.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-9

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1 BX 18 Micro PLC Units (MPUs)
BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring
2
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
3
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
4
8 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in two (2) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
5
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
6
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 3 terminals to the right of the inputs are not used.
These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.
B
C
D
24VDC

35VA

0.3A

BX-DM1-18ED1

4-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-11

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms 2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms 2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-13

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

< 2µs

< 5ms

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

External Fusing recommended

1. All outputs may be used as standard outputs. Only the first 4 outputs (Y0...Y3) are capable of high
speed DC operation.
2. When the high-speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.

4-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED1 Wiring, continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sinking Output
Y

LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1

nC 0

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
OUTPUT

Logic
Output

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

NOTE: When the Logic
high speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
output LED’s willOutput
remain operational even though the output circuitry OUTPUT
is turned off and no power is flowing.
LOAD
This condition is not reported to the CPU.

BRX User Manual,
2nd Edition
COM

FAULT
DETECT

4-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of six (6) terminals, each comprised of five (5) inputs and an
isolated common.
8 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in two (2)
groups of five (5) terminals, each comprised of four (4) outputs and an isolated common.
The MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The three (3) terminals to the right of the inputs are not used.
These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS.

BX-DM1-18ED1-D

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

4-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All
PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-19

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36 VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Output Type
Location

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External Fusing recommended

4-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

1
2
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
3
4
5
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
6
Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
7
8
9
10
11
Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
12
13
14
15
A
B
NOTE: When the high speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
C
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.
D
Sinking Output

LOAD

nC 0

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM
BRX User Manual,
2nd Edition

4-21

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - sourcing; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in two (2) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 3 terminals to the right of the inputs are not used.
These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS.

24VDC

35VA

0.3A

BX-DM1-18ED2

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

4-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-23

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-25

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36 VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Output Type
Location

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External Fusing recommended

4-26

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED2 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

nC 0

5-36 VDC
COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
COM

FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED2-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - sourcing; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in two (2)
groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common..
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 3 terminals to the right of the inputs are not used.
These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS.

BX-DM1-18ED2-D

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

4-28

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED2-D, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs are capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation..

4-30

Standard 1

High-Speed DC

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-31

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36 VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

< 2µs

< 5ms

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

External Fusing recommended

1. All outputs may be used as standard outputs. Only the first 4 outputs (Y0...Y3) are capable of high speed
DC operation.
2. When the high-speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.

4-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

nC 0

3
5-36 VDC
COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units
COM12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ER Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in two (2) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common..
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 3 terminals to the right of the inputs are not used.
These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS.

BX-DM1-18ER

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

4-34

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ER Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-35

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ER Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-36

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ER Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-37

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ER Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC)
300µA (AC) due to RC Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y7

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External Fusing recommended

Output Details

4-38

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ER Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-39

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs
are configured in two (2) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 3 terminals to the right of the inputs are not used.
These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS.
NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BX-DM1-18ER-D

4-40

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-41

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-42

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-43

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC) 300µA (AC) due to RC
Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y7

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External Fusing recommended

Output Details

4-44

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18ER-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-45

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18AR Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - AC rated for 120–240 VAC. They are located along the bottom of the unit;
configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated common.
8 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in two (2) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common..
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 3 terminals to the right of the inputs are not used.
These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS.
NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BX-DM1-18AR

4-46

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18AR Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-47

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18AR Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range

85–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

264VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

15kΩ

Input Current (typical)

9mA @ 120VAC, 13mA @ 220VAC

Maximum Input Current

14mA @ 120VAC, 20mA @ 220VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 85VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 40VAC

Maximum OFF Current

2.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Type

Standard

Location

X0...X9

OFF - ON Response

10ms

ON - OFF Response

10ms

Input Details

4-48

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18AR Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AC Input
X

DI 110/220VAC Input

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry

Internal Circuitry
IN

Logical Input

COM

85-264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-49

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-18AR Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC) 300µA (AC) due to RC
Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y7

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External Fusing recommended

Output Details

4-50

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1-18AR Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-51

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1 BX 18E Micro PLC Units (MPUs)
BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring
2
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
3
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
4
8 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in two (2) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common..
5
1 analog input and 1 analog output. They are located along the bottom of the unit to the right of the
discrete inputs. The analogs are a group of three (3) terminals, comprised of 1 input, 1 output and a
6
shared isolated common.
The analogs share these common features:
7
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±20mA, ±10VDC
8
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC.
9
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.
D
BX-DM1E-18ED13

4-52

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-53

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-54

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

AC Input

All PLC
X units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-55

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143 Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External Fusing recommended

4-56

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sinking Output

LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units
12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
Y

nC 0 1 units
2 3
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion
12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic

NOTE: When the Output
high speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, theOUTPUT
Common terminal Red LED is on. The
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off LOAD
and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.

FAULT
DETECT

COM

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-57

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

.032A
Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A
-

WX0
1C

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-58

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

WX0

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-59

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED13 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Load
Power Supply

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-60

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in two (2)
groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common..
1 analog input and 1 analog output. They are located along the bottom of the unit to the right of the
discrete inputs. The analogs are a group of three (3) terminals, comprised of 1 input, 1 output and a
shared isolated common.
The analogs share these common features:
current or voltage selectable through software,
16-bit resolution @ ±20 mA, ±10 VDC
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20 mA,
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5 VDC, ±10 VDC.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-61

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

4-62

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC

Location

X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

10ms2

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-63

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

4-64

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36 VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External Fusing recommended

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-65

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sinking Output
Y

LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
LOAD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

nC 0

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

4-66

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

FAULT
DETECT

COM

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

WX0

.032A
Fuse

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A
-

WX0
1C

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-67

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

WX0

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

24VDC User
Supplied Power

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-68

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Load
Power Supply

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-69

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - sourcing; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in two (2) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common..
1 analog input and 1 analog output. They are located along the bottom of the unit to the right of the
discrete inputs. The analogs are a group of three (3) terminals, comprised of 1 input, 1 output and a
shared isolated common.
The analogs share these common features:
current or voltage selectable through software,
16-bit resolution @ ±20mA, ±10VDC
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA,
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC.
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.

BX-DM1E-18ED23

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

4-70

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA..

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-71

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-72

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-73

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36 VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External Fusing recommended

4-74

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

nC 0

5-36 VDC
COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24
VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
COM
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-75

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

.032A
Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A
-

WX0
1C

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-76

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

WX0

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-77

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED23 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Load
Power Supply

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-78

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - sourcing; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit
starting to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in
two (2) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common..
1 analog input and 1 analog output. They are located along the bottom of the unit to the right of the
discrete inputs. The analogs are a group of three (3) terminals, comprised of 1 input, 1 output and a
shared isolated common.
The analog share these common features:
current or voltage selectable through software,
16-bit resolution @ ±20mA, ±10VDC
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA,
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-18E23-D

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-79

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

4-80

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

10ms2

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-81

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

AC
Input
All
PLC
units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

4-82

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36 VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y3

Y4...Y7

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143 Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External Fusing recommended

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-83

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

nC 0

5-36 VDC
COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

COM
PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24
VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

4-84

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

OUTPUT
LOAD

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

.032A
-

3-Wire Transmitter

WX0
1C

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-85

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

WX0

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

24VDC User
Supplied Power

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-86

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Load
Power Supply

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-87

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in two (2) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
1 analog input and 1 analog output. They are located along the bottom of the unit to the right of the
discrete inputs. The analogs are a group of three (3) terminals, comprised of 1 input, 1 output and a
shared isolated common.
The analogs share these common features:
current or voltage selectable through software,
16-bit resolution @ ±20mA, ±10VDC
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA,
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5 VDC, ±10VDC.
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.

BX-DM1E-18ER3

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

4-88

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-89

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

4-90

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10ms2

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-91

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC) 300µA (AC) due to RC
Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y7

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External Fusing recommended

Output Details

4-92

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-93

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

.032A
Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A
-

WX0
1C

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-94

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

WX0

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-95

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ER3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Load
Power Supply

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

4-96

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated
common.
8 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs
are configured in two (2) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
1 analog input and 1 analog output. They are located along the bottom of the unit to the right of the
discrete inputs. The analogs are a group of three (3) terminals, comprised of 1 input, 1 output and a
shared isolated common.
The analogs share these common features:
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±20mA, ±10VDC
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-97

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

4-98

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Inputs Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type

Location
OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Standard 1

High-Speed DC
X0...X9
DC
AC

< 2µs

DC
AC

10ms2

–
< 2µs
–

10ms2

1. All Inputs may be used as standard inputs or high speed inputs independently.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-99

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

4-100

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC) 300µA (AC) due to RC
Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y7

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External Fusing recommended

Output Details

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-101

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

4-102

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

LOAD

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A
-

WX0
1C

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-103

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

WX0

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

24VDC User
Supplied Power

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

4-104

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Load
Power Supply

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs,
and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-105

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 18 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
10 discrete inputs - AC rated for 120–240 VAC. They are located along the bottom of the unit;
configured in two (2) groups of 6 terminals, each comprised of 5 inputs and an isolated common.
8 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in two (2) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
1 analog input and 1 analog output. They are located along the bottom of the unit to the right of the
discrete inputs. The analogs are a group of three (3) terminals, comprised of 1 input, 1 output and a
shared isolated common.
The analogs share these common features:
current or voltage selectable through software,
16-bit resolution @ ±20mA, ±10VDC
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA,
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10 VDC.
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.

BX-DM1E-18AR3

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

4-106

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-107

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Inputs Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (5 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range

85–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

264VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

15kΩ

Input Current (typical)

9mA @ 120VAC, 13mA @ 240VAC

Maximum Input Current

14mA @ 120VAC, 20mA @ 240VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 85VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 40VAC

Maximum OFF Current

2.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Type

Standard

Location

X0...X9

OFF - ON Response

10ms

ON - OFF Response

10ms

Input Details

4-108

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

AC Input
X

DI 110/220VAC Input

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry
IN

Logical Input

COM

85-264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-109

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC) 300µA (AC) due to RC
Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y7

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External Fusing recommended

Output Details

4-110

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-111

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

.032A
Fuse

WX0
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A
-

WX0
1C

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-112

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

WX0

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

WX0

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

WX0
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

4-113

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 4: BX 18/18E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-18AR3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options

1C WX0 WY0

Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

WY0
1C

Load
Power Supply

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

4-114

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX 36/36E Wiring
In This Chapter...

Chapter

Overview..................................................................................................................... 5-2
BX 36/36E MPUs ........................................................................................................ 5-2
BX 36/36E Wiring Termination Selection.................................................................. 5-5
Terminal Block Connectors......................................................................................... 5-5
ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cable Solutions............................................................................ 5-7
ZIPLink System Examples........................................................................................... 5-9
BRX 36 Micro PLU Units (MPUs).............................................................................. 5-10
BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring............................................................................................. 5-10
BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring......................................................................................... 5-16
BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring............................................................................................. 5-22
BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring......................................................................................... 5-28
BX-DM1-36ER Wiring............................................................................................... 5-34
BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring............................................................................................ 5-40
BX-DM1-36AR Wiring............................................................................................... 5-46
BX 36E Micro PLC Units (MPUs).............................................................................. 5-52
BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring......................................................................................... 5-52
BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring..................................................................................... 5-61
BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring......................................................................................... 5-70
BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring..................................................................................... 5-79
BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring............................................................................................ 5-88
BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring........................................................................................ 5-97
BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring......................................................................................... 5-106

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1 BX 36/36E Micro PLC Units
Overview
2
The BX 36/36E Micro PLC Unit (MPU) includes fourteen different versions. All have the same
appearance and basic features. All units have 20 discrete input points and 16 discrete output
3
points built-in. Units with DC inputs have 10 selectable high-speed inputs and units with DC
outputs have 8 selectable high-speed outputs. All MPUs can expand their capacity with the
BRX Expansion Modules to allow for more flexibility while keeping control cost down. BX 36E
4
units have an additional 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs built-in that are current/voltage
selectable within the software.
5
The units ship without wiring terminals. This allows you to select the termination type that
best fits your application. There are several wiring options available, including screw terminal
6
connectors, spring clamp terminal connectors and pre-wired ZIPLink cable solutions.
BX 36/36E MPUs
7
BX 36/36E MPUs are divided into two distinct groups, BX 36 and BX 36E. The BX 36 MPUs
have no built-in analog I/O or Ethernet port. The BX 36E MPUs have all the features of the
8
BX 36, plus built-in analog I/O and an Ethernet port.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
PWR
W

RUN
R

TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR

RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX

RX
RX

GN
GND

RX/DRX/D

TX/D+
TX/D

BX 36 Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
(No Built-in Analog or Ethernet Port)

BX 36E Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
(Built-in Analog and Ethernet Port)

5-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX 36 MPUs
General Specifications

PWR
W

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR

36 discrete I/O points: 20 input,16 output

SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
T
X
RX
RX

No analog I/O points

GN
GND
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

Models with DC inputs:

- have 10 high-speed inputs up to
250kHz
- accept 12–24 nominal voltages AC
or DC
- can be wired as sinking or sourcing

BX 36 Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
(No Built-in Analog or Ethernet port)

Models with AC inputs can accept 120–240 nominal voltages
Output types available are DC sinking, DC sourcing, and relay
Models with DC outputs have 8 high-speed outputs rated up to 250kHz
Support for 4 additional Expansion Modules

The following table shows the available BX 36 MPUs.

BX 36 MPUs
Part Number
BX-DM1-36ED1
BX-DM1-36ED1-D
BX-DM1-36ED2
BX-DM1-36ED2-D
BX-DM1-36ER
BX-DM1-36ER-D
BX-DM1-36AR

External Power

Discrete Input

120–240 VAC
12–24 VDC
120–240 VAC
12–24 VDC

10 High-speed
10 Standard
DC Sinking or
Sourcing

Discrete Output

Expansion
Modules

8 High-speed
8 Standard
DC Sinking
8 High-speed
8 Standard
DC Sourcing

120–240 VAC
12–24 VDC
120–240 VAC

16 Form A Relay
20 AC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 36E MPUs
General Specifications
36 Discrete I/O points: 20 inputs, 16 outputs
All units have 4 analog inputs and 2 analog
outputs (current/voltage software selectable)
All units have built-in Ethernet port,
10/100 Mbps
Models with DC inputs:

BX 36E Micro PLC Unit (MPU)

(Built-in Analog and Ethernet Port)
- have 10 high-speed inputs up to
250kHz
- accept 12–24 nominal voltages, AC or DC
- can be wired as sinking or sourcing

Models with AC inputs can accept 120–240 nominal voltages
Output types available are DC sinking, DC sourcing, and relay
Models with DC outputs have 8 high-speed outputs up to 250kHz
Support for 8 additional Expansion Modules

The following table shows the available BX 36E MPUs.

BX 36E MPUs
Part Number
BX-DM1E-36ED13
BX-DM1E-36ED13-D
BX-DM1E-36ED23
BX-DM1E-36ED23-D
BX-DM1E-36ER3
BX-DM1E-36ER3-D
BX-DM1E-36AR3

External
Power

Discrete
Inputs

120–240 VAC
12–24 VDC
120–240 VAC
12–24 VDC
120–240 VAC

10 High-speed
10 Standard
DC Sinking or
Sourcing

Discrete
Output
8 High-Speed
8 Standard
DC Sinking

8 High-Speed
4
2
8 Standard Current Current
DC Sourcing
or
or
Voltage Voltage
16 Form A
Relay

12–24 VDC
120–240 VAC

20 Standard AC

* Analog can be current or voltage software selectable per channel.

5-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Analog *
Expansion
Input Output Modules

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX 36/36E Wiring Termination Selection
The BX 36/36E MPUs ship without wiring terminals. This allows you to select the terminal
block type that best suits your application. There are several removable terminal block
options available, including screw terminals, spring clamp terminals, as well as pre-wired
ZIPLink module and cable solutions.

Terminal Block Connectors
The terminal block connectors are provided in kits and can be easily ordered as a single
part number. Each kit contains the required number of terminal blocks: (12) 5-pin 5mm
terminal blocks.
The BX 36/36E MPUs terminals are configured into groups consisting of 4 inputs and 4
outputs each with an isolated common, e.g., inputs X0–X3 are grouped with a common
terminal. The groups are isolated such that a single 5-pin connector can be removed without
affecting another group of I/O or the external power source.
The terminal block connector kit part numbers and connector specifications are listed in the
table below.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Kit Part Number

BX-RTB36

BX-RTB36-1

Connector Type

Screw Type-90 degree

Spring Clamp Type-180
degree

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

5.0 mm

Screw Size

M2.5

N/A

Screw Torque

< 3.98 lb·in (0.45 N·m)

N/A

Screwdriver Blade Width

3.5 mm

Wire Gauge (Single Wire)

28–12 AWG

28–14 AWG

Wire Gauge (Dual Wire)

28–16 AWG

28–16 AWG
(Dual wire ferrule required)

Wire Strip Length

0.3 in (7.5 mm)

0.37 in (9.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle P/N

5ESDV-05P-BK

5ESDSR-05P-BK

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-RTB36 Screw Terminal Block Kit
This terminal block kit has 12, 90 degree screw terminal blocks with 180 degree wire pass
through.

5-Pin

BX-RTB36-1 Spring Terminal Block Kit
This terminal block kit has 12, Spring Clamp wire terminal blocks with 180 degree wire pass
through.

5-Pin

Replacement terminal blocks can be ordered online at:
www.automationdirect.com. Single replacement terminal blocks are listed in table below.

Replacement Terminal Blocks
5-pin

5-6

BX-RTB36

BX-RTB36-1

BX-RTB05

BX-RTB05-1

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cable Solutions
ZIPLinks eliminate the normally tedious process of wiring between devices by utilizing
prewired cables and DIN rail mount connector modules. ZIPLinks are as simple as plugging
in a cable connector at either end or terminating wires at only one end. Pre-wired cables
keep installation clean and efficient, using less space at a fraction of the cost of standard
terminal blocks. ZIPLink pre-wired cables connect directly from the MPU to a ZIPlink
remote terminal block module or with the pigtail cable option, that allows for a convenient
solution to wire the BRX platform to third-party devices. For the BX 36/36E MPUs, four
(4) cables and four (4) ZIPLink feedthrough modules are needed to connect all the wiring
termination points.
There are two (2) feedthrough module options available, the ZL-RTB20 and the ZL-RTB20-1.
The ZL-RTB20 is a standard feedthrough remote terminal module while the ZL-RTB20-1 is
a feedthrough remote terminal block having a more compact footprint, requiring less space in
the control cabinet.
The table below lists the ZIPLink system options for the BX 36/36E MPUs.

BX 36/36E ZIPLink Selector
Part No.

Component
Type

Module Part No.

Max Qty
Needed

Cable Part No.*

Max Qty
Needed

ZL-BX-CBL15
ZL-BX-CBL15-1
ZL-BX-CBL15-2

BX-DM1-36ED1
BX-DM1-36ED1-D
BX-DM1-36ED2
BX-DM1-36ED2-D
BX-DM1-36ER
BX-DM1-36ER-D
BX-DM1-36AR
BX-DM1E-36ED13
BX-DM1E-36ED13-D

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20
(Standard)
-ORZL-RTB20-1
(Compact)

BX-DM1E-36ED23
BX-DM1E-36ED23-D
BX-DM1E-36ER3
BX-DM1E-36ER3-D
BX-DM1E-36AR3

* Select the cable length: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, -2 = 2.0 m.
Available pigtail cables: ZL-BX-CBL15-1P = 1.0 m, ZL-BX-CBL15-2P = 2.0 m.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

ZIPLink Pre-wired Cables
Custom molded ZIPLink pre-wired cables allow for fast and easy connection of field wiring
and remote I/O to the BRX platform. The prewired cables are available in 0.5 meter, 1 meter
and 2 meter lengths. Pigtail cables are used to connect the BRX platform directly to 3rd party
devices, reducing your wiring time and cost. The pigtail cables are available in 1 meter and 2
meter lengths.

Pre wired ZIPLink Cable

ZIPLink Pigtail Cable

ZIPLink Remote Feedthrough Modules
Feedthrough modules provide low-cost and compact field wiring screw termination solutions
for quickly connecting with the BRX platform. There are two (2) modules available for use
with the BRX platform. The ZL-RTB20 and the ZL-RTB20-1. The ZL-RTB20 is a standard
2-row, 20-pin, DIN rail mountable feedthrough module. The ZL-RTB20-1 is a compact
3-row, 24-pin, DIN rail mountable feedthrough module with a smaller footprint design.
The ZIPLink feedthrough module specifications are listed in the table below.

ZIPLink Module Specifications
Part Number

ZL-RTB20
(Maximum of 4 needed)

Number of
positions

20 screw terminals, 2 rows

Screwdriver Width

1/8 in (3.8 mm) maximum

Screw Torque

4.4 lb·in (0.5 N·m)

ZL-RTB20

5-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

ZL-RTB20-1
(Maximum of 4 needed)
24 screw terminals, 3 rows

4.4 lb·in (0.5 N·m)

ZL-RTB20-1

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

ZIPLink System Examples

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX 36 MPU with ZIPLink pre-wired cables and ZL-RTB20 feedthrough modules.

BX 36 MPU with ZIPLink pigtail cables installed.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-9

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1 BRX 36 Micro PLU Units (MPUs)
BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring
2
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
3
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
4
16 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in four (4) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
5
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
6
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 5 terminals to the right of the input and output rails
are not used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE
7
TERMINALS
NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
PWR
W

RUN
R

TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR

RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX

RX
RX

GND
GN

RX/DRX/D

TX/D+
TX/D

BX-DM1-36ED1

5-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms 2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-13

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

1. All outputs may be used as standard outputs. Only the first 8 outputs (Y0...Y7) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. When the high-speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red
LED is on. The output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is
turned off and no power is flowing. This condition is not reported to the CPU.

5-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED1 Wiring, Continued

1
2
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
3
4
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1 5
6
Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
7
8
9
10
11
Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
12
13
14
15
A
B
NOTE: When the high speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
C
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.
D
Discrete Output Connection Options

Sinking Output

LOAD

nC 0

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

FAULT

DETECT User Manual,
COM
BRX
2nd Edition

5-15

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in four (4)
groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 5 terminals to the right of the input and output
rails are not used. These input and output terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT
ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS

PWR
W

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX
RX
RX

GND
GN
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

BX-DM1-36ED1-D

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

5-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz 2

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-19

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Output Type
Location

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

1. All outputs may be used as standard outputs. Only the first 8 outputs (Y0...Y7) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. When the high-speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red
LED is on. The output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned
off and no power is flowing. This condition is not reported to the CPU.

5-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED1-D Wiring, Continued

Sinking Output

LOAD

nC 0

LOAD

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

BRX User Manual,
2nd Edition
COM

FAULT
DETECT

5-21

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs, sourcing, rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in four (4) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 5 terminals to the right of the input and output
rails are not used. These input and output terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT
ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS

PWR
W

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX
RX
RX

GND
GN
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

BX-DM1-36ED2

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

5-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-25

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

< 2µs

< 5ms

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

External fusing recommended

5-26

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED2 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

nC 0

3
5-36 VDC
COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units
COM12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs, sourcing, rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in four (4)
groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 5 terminals to the right of the input and output
rails are not used. These input and output terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT
ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS
NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

PWR
W

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX
RX
RX

GND
GN
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

BX-DM1-36ED2-D

5-28

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-30

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-31

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

1. All outputs may be used as standard outputs. Only the first 8 outputs (Y0...Y7) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. When the high-speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal
Red LED is on. The output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry
is turned off and no power is flowing. This condition is not reported to the CPU.

5-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ED2-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

nC 0

3
5-36 VDC
COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units
12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
COM
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ER Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 5 terminals to the right of the input and output
rails are not used. These input and output terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT
ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

PWR
W

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX
RX
RX

GND
GN
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

BX-DM1-36ER

5-34

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ER Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-35

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ER Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON` to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-36

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ER Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-37

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ER Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC)
300µA (AC) due to RC Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y15

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

5-38

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ER Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-39

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs
are configured in four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 5 terminals to the right of the input and output
rails are not used. These input and output terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT
ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

PWR
W

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX
RX
RX

GND
GN
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

BX-DM1-36ER-D

5-40

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-41

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms 2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms 2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-42

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-43

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC)
300µA (AC) due to RC Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y15

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

5-44

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36ER-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-45

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36AR Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs, AC, rated for 120–240 VAC. They are located along the bottom of the unit;
configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated common.
16 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
WARNING: No analog I/O is included on this unit. The 5 terminals to the right of the input and output
rails are not used. These input and output terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT
ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS

NOTE: Four (4) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

PWR
W

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
TX
RX
RX

GND
GN
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

BX-DM1-36AR

5-46

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36AR Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-47

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36AR Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range

85–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

264VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

15kΩ

Input Current (typical)

9mA @ 120VAC, 13mA @ 220VAC

Maximum Input Current

14mA @ 120VAC, 20mA @ 220VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 85VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 40VAC

Maximum OFF Current

2.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Type

Standard

Location

X0...X19

OFF - ON Response

10ms

ON - OFF Response

10ms

Input Details

5-48

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36AR Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

AC Input
X

DI 110/220VAC Input

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry

Internal Circuitry
IN

Logical Input

COM

85-264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-49

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1-36AR Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC)
300µA (AC) due to RC Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y15

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

5-50

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1-36AR Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-51

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1 BX 36E Micro PLC Units (MPUs)
BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring
2
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
3
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
4
16 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in four (4) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
5
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs. The analog inputs are located along the bottom of the unit to
the right of the discrete inputs. The analog inputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of 4
6
input and a shared analog input common. The analog outputs are located along the top of the unit to
the right of the discrete outputs. The analog outputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of
2 outputs and 3 shared analog output common terminals:
7
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
8
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
9
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.
C
D
BX-DM1E-36ED13

5-52

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-53

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-54

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-55

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

5-56

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued

1
2
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
3
4
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1 5
6
Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
7
8
9
10
Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
NOTE: When the high speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
C
output LED’s will remain operational even though the output circuitry is turned off and no power is flowing.
This condition is not reported to the CPU.
D
Discrete Output Connection Options

Sinking Output

LOAD

nC 0

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM
BRX User Manual,
2nd Edition

5-57

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

0-3
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A

0-3

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-58

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

0-3

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

0-3

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

0-3
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-59

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED13 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
.032A

mA Load

Fuse

0, 1
WY

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Load
Power Supply

Commons
Internally
Connected

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-60

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs - sinking; rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit
starting to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in
four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs. The analog inputs are located along the bottom of the unit to
the right of the discrete inputs. The analog inputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of 4
input and a shared analog input common. The analog outputs are located along the top of the unit to
the right of the discrete outputs. The analog outputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting
of 2 outputs and 3 shared analog output common terminals.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-61

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

5-62

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms 2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms 2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-63

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

5-64

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sinking

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-65

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sinking Output
Y

LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
LOAD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

nC 0

PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion
units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs – TD1
OUTPUT
LOAD

Logic
Output

COM

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

FAULT
DETECT

COM

5-36 VDC

NOTE: When the high
Logic speed outputs are in an overcurrent situation, the Common terminal Red LED is on. The
OUTPUT
output LED’s will Output
remain operational even though the output circuitry is
turned off and no power is flowing.
LOAD
This condition is not reported to the CPU.

5-66

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

FAULT
DETECT

COM

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

0-3
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A

0-3

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-67

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

0-3

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

0-3
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

0-3
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-68

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Load
Power Supply

Commons
Internally
Connected

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-69

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs, sourcing, rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit starting
to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are configured in four (4) groups
of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs. The analog inputs are located along the bottom of the unit to
the right of the discrete inputs. The analog inputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of 4
input and a shared analog input common. The analog outputs are located along the top of the unit to
the right of the discrete outputs. The analog outputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of
2 outputs and 3 shared analog output common terminals.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.

BX-DM1E-36ED23

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

5-70

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-71

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-72

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-73

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

OFF to ON Response

< 2µs

< 5ms

ON to OFF Response

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

External fusing recommended

5-74

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

nC 0

3
5-36 VDC
COM

Logic
Output

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
COM12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-75

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

0-3
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A

0-3

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-76

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

0-3

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

0-3

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

0-3
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-77

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED23 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Load
Power Supply

Commons
Internally
Connected

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-78

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs, sourcing, rated at 12–24 VDC. They are located along the top of the unit
starting to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs are configured in
four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs. The analog inputs are located along the bottom of the unit to
the right of the discrete inputs. The analog inputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of 4
input and a shared analog input common. The analog outputs are located along the top of the unit to
the right of the discrete outputs. The analog outputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting
of 2 outputs and 3 shared analog output common terminals.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-79

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

5-80

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-81

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

5-82

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Sourcing

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output
No derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Details
Output Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum Switching Frequency
Overcurrent, Short Circuit Protection
and Short to Ground
Overcurrent Trip Level 2
Fusing

High-Speed

Standard 1

Y0...Y7

Y8...Y15

< 2µs

< 5ms

< 2µs

< 2ms

1m cable - 250kHz
10m cable - 100kHz

143Hz

Current limit by
Common Group,
self-resetting

N/A

Between 4A and 8A

N/A

External fusing recommended

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-83

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Sourcing Output

LOAD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

nC 0

3
5-36 VDC
COM

Logic
Output

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-36 VDC
COM
Logic
Output
OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

Discrete High-Speed Output Internal Circuitry
COM12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units
FAULT
DETECT

Logic
Output

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

COM
FAULT
DETECT

5-36 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

5-84

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

0-3
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A

0-3

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-85

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

0-3

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

0-3
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

0-3
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-86

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options
Analog Output Wiring

Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Load
Power Supply

Commons
Internally
Connected

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-87

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs. The analog inputs are located along the bottom of the unit to
the right of the discrete inputs. The analog inputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of 4
input and a shared analog input common. The analog outputs are located along the top of the unit to
the right of the discrete outputs. The analog outputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of
2 outputs and 3 shared analog output common terminals.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.

BX-DM1E-36ER3

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

5-88

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-89

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard 1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms 2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms 2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

5-90

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-91

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC)
300µA (AC) due to RC Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y15

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

5-92

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-93

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

0-3
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A

0-3

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-94

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

0-3

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

0-3

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

0-3
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-95

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ER3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range *

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range *

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

* Software selectable per channel.

Analog Output Connection Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
.032A

mA Load

Fuse

0, 1
WY

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Load
Power Supply

Commons
Internally
Connected

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-96

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - sinking/sourcing; rated for 12–24 VAC/VDC. They are located along the bottom
of the unit; configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated
common.
16 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC external power supply terminals. The outputs
are configured in four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs. The analog inputs are located along the bottom of the unit to
the right of the discrete inputs. The analog inputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of 4
input and a shared analog input common. The analog outputs are located along the top of the unit to
the right of the discrete outputs. The analog outputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of
2 outputs and 3 shared analog output common terminals.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 12–24 VDC power supply. The DC power supply connection is
located on the top left side of the unit. There is no 24VDC auxiliary output supply.

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-97

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Range

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

10–36 VDC

Maximum Input Voltage Ripple

< ±10%

Maximum Input Power

30W

Cold Start Inrush Current

5A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

5A, 2ms

Internal Input Protection

Reverse polarity protection and undervoltage lockout via
transistor circuit

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

85%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

<9VDC

Heat Dissipation

3.2 W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC power Inputs to ground applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
DC Power

DC Power In

12–24 VDC

- +

NC NC G

V- V+

WARNING: No External AC power supply needed on this unit. The two terminals marked “NC” are not
used. These terminals are not internally connected. DO NOT CONNECT ANYTHING TO THESE TERMINALS!

5-98

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC/VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC/VDC

Maximum Voltage

30 VAC/VDC

DC Frequency

0–250 kHz - High-speed

Minimum Pulse Width

0.5 μs - High-speed

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30 VAC/VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC/VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF Current

1.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Details
Input Type
Location
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response

High-Speed

Standard1

X0...X9

X10...X19

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

< 2µs

2ms

—

10ms2

1. All inputs may be used as standard inputs. Only the first 10 inputs (X0...X9) are
capable of high speed DC operation.
2. 240Hz filter must be set in software for AC operation.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-99

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

nC 0

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E
AC Input
X

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry *
Internal Circuitry
Logical Input
IN

Sinking

COM

Sourcing

AC
9-30 VDC/VAC

5-100

* Same for both Standard and High Speed

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC)
300µA (AC) due to RC Snubber Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y15

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-101

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

5-102

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

LOAD

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

0-3
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A

0-3

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-103

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

AC or DC

0-3

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

0-3
1C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

0-3
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-104

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Analog Output Connection Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
mA Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Load
Power Supply

Commons
Internally
Connected

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-105

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring
This MPU is made up of 36 discrete I/O points. The connections are grouped as follows:
20 discrete inputs - AC rated for 120–240 VAC. They are located along the bottom of the unit;
configured in five (5) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 inputs and an isolated common.
16 discrete outputs - Form A Relay (SPST); rated 5–48 VDC/ 24–240 VAC. They are located along
the top of the unit starting to the right of the 24VDC auxiliary output terminals. The outputs are
configured in four (4) groups of 5 terminals, each comprised of 4 outputs and an isolated common.
4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs. The analog inputs are located along the bottom of the unit to
the right of the discrete inputs. The analog inputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of 4
input and a shared analog input common. The analog outputs are located along the top of the unit to
the right of the discrete outputs. The analog outputs are grouped together on 5 terminals consisting of
2 outputs and 3 shared analog output common terminals.
current or voltage selectable through software
16-bit resolution @ ±10V, ±20mA
current signal ranges of 4–20 mA, ±20mA
voltage signal ranges of 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC, ±5VDC, ±10VDC
This MPU requires an external 120–240 VAC power supply. The AC power supply connection and
the 24VDC auxiliary output supply terminals are located on the top left side of the unit.

BX-DM1E-36AR3

NOTE: Eight (8) Expansion Modules can be connected to extend I/O capacity.

5-106

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued
Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply Specifications
Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

85–264 VAC

Rated Operating Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Input Power

40VA

Cold Start Inrush Current

1.5 A, 2ms

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

1.5 A, 2ms

Internal Input Fuse Protection

Micro fuse 250V, 2A Non-replaceable

Acceptable External Power Drop Time

10ms

Efficiency

80%

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

80VAC

Input Transient Protection

Input choke and line filter

Heat Dissipation

8W Max

Isolated User 24VDC Output

24VDC @ 0.3 A max, <1V P-P Ripple, Integrated self-resetting short
circuit protection

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

1500VAC Power Inputs to Ground applied for 1 minute
1500VAC Ground to 24VDC Output applied for 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Power Supply Connections
AC Power

AC Power In

Auxillary out

120–240 24VDC
VAC 300mA max.

- +

V- V+

WARNING: Do not exceed the 24VDC auxiliary power supply load limit of 300mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-107

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Input Specifications

Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Total Inputs per Module

Commons

5 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range

85–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

264VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

15kΩ

Input Current (typical)

9mA @ 120VAC, 13mA @ 220VAC

Maximum Input Current

14mA @ 120VAC, 20mA @ 220VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 85VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 40VAC

Maximum OFF Current

2.5 mA

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Input Type

Standard

Location

X0...X19

OFF - ON Response

10ms

ON - OFF Response

10ms

Input Details

5-108

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Connection Options

nC 0

AC Input
X

DI 110/220VAC Input

Discrete Input Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry
IN

Logical Input

COM

85-264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-109

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued
Discrete Output Specifications

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay Form A (SPST)

Total Outputs per Module

Commons

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC,
18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC
264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC
0.1 mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC)
300µA (AC) due to RC Snubber
Circuit

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 V Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Output Type

Standard

Location

Y0...Y15

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life
Mechanical Endurance
Electrical Endurance

5 million operations
120,000 operations

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Output Details

5-110

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Connection Options
Relay Output

LOAD

nC 0

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Discrete Standard Output Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-111

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Input Voltage Range

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Input Current Range

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

1.2 ms

Input Impedance Voltage Modes

220kΩ

Input Impedance Current Modes

249Ω

Input Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Analog Input Voltage Connection Options

Analog Voltage
Input Circuits
.032A

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter
AC or DC

Fuse

0-3
1C

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter
Fuse

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

3-Wire Transmitter

.032A

0-3

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-112

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Input Current Sinking Connection Options

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
–

Fuse
.032A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

1C
+

2-Wire Transmitter

0-3

.032A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

Power
Supply

Fuse

AC or DC

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

0-3

24VDC User
Supplied Power

+
–

Fuse
.032A

0-3
1C

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

5-113

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 5: BX 36/36E Wiring

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-DM1E-36AR3 Wiring, Continued
Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Output Voltage Range

Software Selectable ±10V, ±5V, 0–10 V, 0–5 V

Minimum Voltage Load Impedance

1kΩ

Output Current Range

Software Selectable ±20mA, 4–20 mA

Maximum Current Load Impedance

500Ω

Resolution

16 bit @ ±10V, ±20mA

Conversion Time

< 1ms

Output Stability

0.02% of Full Hardware Range

Full Scale Calibration Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Offset Calibration Error

0.01% of Full Hardware Range

Accuracy vs Temperature Error

0.05% of Full Hardware Range

Fusing

External fusing recommended

Analog Output Connection Options
Analog Output Wiring
Current Source Output
.032A

mA Load

Fuse

0, 1
WY

Voltage Output
VDC
Load

.032A
Fuse

0, 1
WY

Load
Power Supply

Commons
Internally
Connected

NOTE: An Edison S500-32-R 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all analog voltage inputs, analog
outputs, and current loops.

5-114

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BRX Pluggable Option
Module (POM)

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Overview..................................................................................................................... 6-2
General Specifications................................................................................................ 6-2
Module Installation.................................................................................................... 6-3
BX-P-SER2-TERM ........................................................................................................ 6-4
BX-P-SER4-TERM ........................................................................................................ 6-6
BX-P-SER2-RJ12 .......................................................................................................... 6-8
BX-P-ECOMLT ............................................................................................................ 6-9
BX-P-USB-B .............................................................................................................. 6-10

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

1 Overview
BRX Do-more MPUs have a slot available for the addition of a single BRX Pluggable Option
Module (POM). The POM slot can be used to add a serial port, Ethernet port, USB port or
2
any other POM modules that are available.
POM modules are hot swappable; this allows you to interchange different communication
3
options while the system is running. For example you can configure the system to use the RJ45
Ethernet port POM to talk with a C-more panel. Then you can hot swap to the USB POM for
4
programming. When you are done programming you can hot swap back to the Ethernet POM
without needing to power cycle or reconfigure the system.
5
General Specifications
General specifications common to the POM modules are listed in the table below.
6
General Specifications
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 85°C (-4° to 185°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Enclosure Type

Open equipment

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2 - UL File # E185989 Canada and USA
CE Compliant E185989*

Noise Immunity

NEMA ICS3-304

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” in Appendix A or topic DMD0331
in the Do-more! Designer software Help file.

Weight

7g (0.25 oz)

*Meets EMC and Safety requirements. See the D.O.C. for details.

BX-P-SER2-TERM

BX-P-SER4-TERM

BX-P-SER2-RJ12

BX-P-ECOMLT

BX-P-USB-B

RS-232 Port

RS-485 Port

RS-232 Port (RJ12)

Ethernet Port

USB Type B Port

6-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

Module Installation
The blank filler plate can be removed by compressing the top and bottom tabs and pulling
the module forward away from the unit. To install the POM, orient the module so that the
connector on the rear is on the left side, aligning the locking tabs on the top and bottom of
the module. Gently guide the module into the opening until you hear it click, locking the
module into place.

Compress tabs
and remove
Filler Module

Seat
eat POM
module into
Connector
onnector
and
nd press
firmly
rmly until
tabs
abs are fully
ngaged.
engaged.

Filler
Module

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

6-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

1 BX-P-SER2-TERMThe RS-232 POM can be connected to the Do-more! Designer programming
software, Modbus RTU master or slave devices, DirectLogic PLCs via
2
K-Sequence protocol, as well as devices that send or receive non-sequenced
ASCII strings or characters.
3
Pinout RS232 RS485
Pinout RS232
11
GND
GND
4
GND
RX
22
RXD
D5
TX
3
3
TXD
D+
6
BX-P-SER2-TERM Specifications
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
TX

GND
RX

Removable Connector
Included

RS232/RS485

Description

Non-isolated Serial port that can communicate via RS-232.
Includes ESD protection and built-in surge protection.

Supported Protocols

Do-more!™ Protocol (Default)
Modbus RTU (Master & Slave)
K-Sequence (Slave)
ASCII (In & Out)

Data Rates

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud

Default Settings

115200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Station #1

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

Port Type

Removable 3-pin terminal strip 3.5 mm pitch

RS-232 TX

RS-232 Transmit output

RS-232 RX

RS-232 Receive input

RS-232 GND

Logic ground

RS-232 Maximum Output Load (TXD/RTS)

3kΩ, 1000pf

RS-232 Minimum Output Voltage Swing

±5V

RS-232 Output Short Circuit Protection

±15mA

Cable Requirements

RS-232 use P/N L19772-XXX from automationdirect.com

Maximum Distance

6 meters (20 foot) recommended maximum

Replacement Connector

ADC Part # BX-RTB03S

Hot Swappable

Yes

6-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

BX-P-SER2-TERM, continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-RTB03S Connector Specifications

Part Number

BX-RTB03S

Connector Type

Screw type

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

3.5 mm

Screw Size

Recommended Screw Torque

<1.77 lb·in (0.2 N·m)

Screwdriver Blade Width

2.5 mm

Wire Gauge (Single Wire)

28–16 AWG

Wire Gauge (Two Wires)

28–16 AWG

Wire Strip Length

0.24 in (6mm)

Equiv. Dinkle part #

EC350V-03P-BK

Removable Connector Included

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

6-5

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

1 BX-P-SER4-TERM
The RS-485 POM can be connected to the Do-more! Designer programming
software, Modbus RTU master or slave devices, DirectLogic PLCs via
2
K-Sequence protocol, as well as devices that send or receive non-sequenced
ASCII strings or characters.
3
Pinout RS232 RS485
Pinout RS485
4
11
GND
GND
GND
D22
RXD
D5
D+
3
3
TXD
D+
6
BX-P-SER4-TERM Specifications
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
TX

GND
D-

Removable Connector
Included

D+

RS232/RS485

Description

Non-isolated Serial port that can communicate via RS-485. Includes ESD protection
and built-in surge protection.

Supported Protocols

Do-more!™ Protocol (Default)
Modbus RTU (Master & Slave)
K-Sequence (Slave)
ASCII (In & Out)

Data Rates

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 baud

Default Settings

115200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Station #1, Termination resistor OFF

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

Port Type

Removable 3-pin terminal strip, 3.5 mm pitch

RS-485 Station Addresses

1–247

RS-485 D+

RS-485 transceiver high

RS-485 D-

RS-485 transceiver low

RS-485 GND

Logic ground

RS-485 Input Impedance

19kΩ

RS-485 Maximum Load

50 transceivers, 19kΩ each,
DIP Switch

Selectable 120Ω termination resistor

RS-485 Output Short Circuit Protection

±250mA, thermal shut-down protection

RS-485 Electrostatic Discharge Protection

±8kV per IEC1000-4-2

RS-485 Electrical Fast Transient Protection

±2kV per IEC1000-4-4

RS-485 Minimum Differential Output Voltage

1.5 V with 60Ω load

RS-485 Fail Safe Inputs

Logic high input state if inputs are unconnected

RS-485 Maximum Common Mode Voltage

-7.5 V to 12.5 V

Cable Requirements

RS-485 use P/N L19827-XXX from automationdirect.com

Maximum Distance

1000 meters (3280 feet)

Replacement Connector

ADC Part # BX-RTB03S

Hot Swappable

Yes

6-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

BX-P-SER4-TERM, continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BX-RTB03S Connector Specifications

Part Number

BX-RTB03S

Connector Type

Screw Type

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

3.5 mm

Screw Size

Recommended Screw Torque

<1.77 lb·in (0.2 N·m)

Screwdriver Blade Width

2.5 mm

Wire Gauge (Single Wire)

28–16 AWG

Wire Gauge (Two Wires)

28–16 AWG

Wire Strip Length

0.24 in (6mm)

Equiv. Dinkle part #

EC350V-03P-BK

Removable Connector Included

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

6-7

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

1 BX-P-SER2-RJ12
The RS-232 RJ12 POM can be connected to the Do-more! Designer
programming software, Modbus RTU master or slave devices, DirectLogic PLCs
2
via K-Sequence protocol, as well as devices that send or receive non-sequenced
ASCII strings or characters.
3
Pin #
Signal
4
1
0V
Power (-) connection (GND)
5V
Power (+) connection
2
(220mA max)
5
RXD Receive Data (RS-232)
3
TXD Transmit Data (RS-232)
4
6
RTS Request to Send (RS-232)
5
CTS Clear to Send (RS-232)
6
7
8 BX-P-SER2-RJ12 Specifications
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
6

Pin #

RS-232

6-pin RJ12 Female
Modular Connector

Signal

Power (-) connection (GND)

Power (+) connection (220mA max)

RXD

Receive Data (RS-232)

TXD

Transmit Data (RS-232)

RTS

Request to Send (RS-232)

CTS

Clear to Send (RS-232)

Description

Non-isolated Serial port that can communicate via RS-232.
Includes ESD protection and built-in surge protection.

Supported Protocols

Do-more!™ Protocol (Default)
Modbus RTU (Master & Slave)
K-Sequence (Slave)
ASCII (In & Out)

Data Rates

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud

Default Settings

115200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Station #1

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

Port Type

RJ12 - 6P6C

RS-232 Maximum Output Load (TXD/RTS)

3kΩ, 1000pf

RS-232 Minimum Output Voltage Swing

±5V

RS-232 Output Short Circuit Protection

±15mA

Cable Requirements

Recommend AutomationDirect.com cable D2-DSCBL
(with USB-RS232) or EA-MG-PGM-CBL

Maximum Distance

6 meters (20 feet), maximum recommended distance

Replacement Connector

N/A

Hot Swappable

Yes

6-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

BX-P-ECOMLT
The Ethernet LT POM can be connected to the Do-more! Designer programming
software or HMI’s that support the Do-more!, Modbus, or K-sequence protocol.
This POM functions only as a server device.
Crossover Cable

TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8
RJ45

GRN

OR/WHT

GRN/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

GRN

BRN/WHT

BRN

Patch (Straight-through) Cable
OR/WHT

OR/WHT

GRN/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

GRN

BRN/WHT
BRN

Pin #

10/BASE-T/100BASE-TX
GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BRN/WHT
BRN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TD+
TD–
RD+
RD–

LINK

ACT

8
1

RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TD+
TD–
RD+

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TXD+
TXDRXD+
N/C
N/C
RXDN/C
N/C

Signal

Transmit Data
Transmit Data
Receive Data

Receive Data

RD–

12345678

BX-P-ECOMLTRJ45
Specifications

8-pin RJ45 Connector
(8P8C)

Description

Standard transformer isolated Ethernet port with built-in
surge protection.

Transfer Rate

1 Mbps throughput max

Port Status LED

LINK LED is solid when network link is established.
ACT LED flashes when port is active.

Supported Protocols

Do-more! Protocol (Server)
Modbus (Server)
K-sequence (Server)
Programming/Monitoring

Cable Recommendation

C5E-STxxx-xx from AutomationDirect.com

Maximum Distance

100 meters (328 feet)

Port Type

RJ45, Category 5, Auto Crossover

Ethernet Port Numbers:
Do-more! Protocol
Modbus
K-sequence
Programming/Monitoring

28784, UDP
502, TCP
28784, UDP
28784, UDP

Hot Swappable

Yes

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

6-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM)

1 BX-P-USB-B
The USB POM can only be connected to the Do-more! Designer programming
software.
2
Pin # Signal
3
1
+5
2
-Data
4
+Data
3
Mating face of USB
GND
4
5
type B female
6 BX-P-USB-B Specifications
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
4

USB

Description

USB Type B Port that can be utilized for programming.

USB Specification Version

USB 2.0

Port Status LED

LED flashes when port is active

Cable Recommendation

USB-CBL-ABxx from AutomationDirect.com

Hot Swappable

Yes

6-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BRX Digital I/O
Expansion Modules

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Overview..................................................................................................................... 7-2
Module Types............................................................................................................. 7-3
Discrete Input Modules.............................................................................................. 7-3
Discrete Output Modules........................................................................................... 7-3
Discrete Combo Input/Output Modules.................................................................... 7-4
Wiring Termination Options...................................................................................... 7-5
Terminal Block Connectors......................................................................................... 7-5
ZIPLink Wiring System............................................................................................... 7-6
General Specifications................................................................................................ 7-8
Module Installation ................................................................................................... 7-9
BX-08NF3 Sinking/Sourcing 3–5 VDC Input............................................................ 7-10
BX-xxND3 Sinking/Sourcing 12–24 VDC Input....................................................... 7-11
BX-xxNB 12–24 VAC Input....................................................................................... 7-13
BX-xxNA 120–240 VAC Input................................................................................... 7-15
BX-xxTD1 Sinking 12–24 VDC Output..................................................................... 7-17
BX-xxTD2 Sourcing 12–24 VDC Output................................................................... 7-19
BX-xxTR Relay Output.............................................................................................. 7-21
BX-05TRS Relay Output............................................................................................ 7-23
BX-xxTA 120–240 VAC Output................................................................................. 7-24
BX-08CD3R Combination DC Input/Relay Output.................................................. 7-26
BX-xxCD3D1 Combination DC Input/Sinking DC Output...................................... 7-29
BX-xxCD3D2 Combination DC Input/Sourcing DC Output.................................... 7-32

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 Overview
One of the unique features of the BRX platform is its ability to expand its capability to fit your
application solution. One of the ways the BRX platform can do this is by using expansion
2
modules that conveniently “Snap-on” to the side of any BRX MPU. Once the expansion
module has snapped in place and is added to the project it instantly adds additional I/O and
3
features to the MPU with little to no additional setup required.
4
NOTE: To learn more about adding expansion units to the project go to Chapter 1, “Installing the Expansion
I/O Modules”.
5
The digital expansion modules give you the ability to add additional discrete I/O as needed and
are identified as an input module, output module or combination input/output module. On
6
the front panel of the digital I/O expansion modules a color scheme and a symbol are used to
denote the module type.
Most modules are available in 5, 8, 12 or 16 point variations consisting of sink/source DC
7
inputs/outputs, AC inputs/outputs, relay outputs and combination modules.
The modules ship without wiring terminal blocks. This allows you to select the termination
8
style that best fits your application. There are several wiring options available, including screw
terminal connectors, spring clamp terminal connectors and pre-wired ZIPLink cable solutions.
9
More detailed information about the digital expansion modules along with specifications and
wiring diagrams follow in this chapter.
10
11
NOTE: When using relay expansion modules, adding more than 32 relay points requires you to perform a
power budget calculation. See Appendix B for more information.
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
7-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

Module Types
Discrete Input Modules
INPUT

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7

Ten (10) discrete input modules are available in various DC and AC voltage
ranges. Input module faceplates have a blue terminal bar and symbol ⎍ for
easy distinction from other module types. Listed in the table below are the four
different types of input modules available.
Blue Label
for Input

Discrete Input Modules

Identifier

3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

Type

8-Point

12-Point

16-Point

NF3

3–5 VDC
Sink/Source

BX-08NF3

N/A

ND3

12–24 VDC
Sink/Source

BX-08ND3

BX-12ND3

BX-16ND3

NB
NA

24VAC

BX-08NB

BX-12NB

BX-16NB

120VAC

BX-08NA

BX-12NA

BX-16NA

BX-16ND3

Discrete Output Modules

OUTPUT

BX-16TD1

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7
3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

Twelve (12) discrete output modules are available in DC sinking, DC sourcing,
AC voltage and Relay type outputs. Output module faceplates have a red
terminal bar and symbol ⎍ for easy distinction from other module types. Listed
in the table below are the five different types of output modules available.
Red Label
for Output

Discrete Output Modules
Identifier

Type

5-Point

8-Point

12-Point

16-Point

TD1

12–24 VDC
Sinking

N/A

BX-08TD1

BX-12TD1

BX-16TD1

TD2

12–24 VDC
Sourcing

N/A

BX-08TD2

BX-12TD2

BX-16TD2

Relay
Form A (SPST)

N/A

BX-08TR

BX-12TR

BX-16TR

TRS

Relay
Form C (SPDT)

BX-05TRS

N/A

120–240 VAC
Triac

N/A

BX-08TA

BX-12TA

N/A

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 Module Types, Continued
Discrete Combo Input/Output Modules
2
Five discrete input/output combo modules are available with DC sink/source inputs and
sink/source/relay outputs. The Input/Output faceplate terminal bar is in blue and red, making
it easy to distinguish between inputs and outputs and from other module types.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Discrete Combo Input/Output Modules I/O Type
13
Discrete Combo Input/Output Type
Identifier Identifier
Input Type Output Type
8-Point
12-Point
16-Point
14
15
CD3
A
B
C
D
IN/OUT

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7

Blue and Red
Label
for Input/Output

BX-16CD3D1

12–24 VDC
Sinking

D2
R

7-4

12–24 VDC
Sink/Source

12–24 VDC
Sourcing

Relay
Form A (SPST)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX-12CD3D1

BX-16CD3D1

BX-12CD3D2

BX-16CD3D2

N/A

BX-08CD3R

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

Wiring Termination Options
The BRX digital expansion modules ship without wiring terminals blocks. This allows you
to select the termination style that best fits your application. There are several wiring options
available, including removable screw terminal connectors, removable spring clamp terminal
connectors and pre-wired ZIPLink cable solutions.

Terminal Block Connectors
The terminal block connectors are provided in kits of multiple connectors that are easily
ordered as a single part number. There are 2 different types of kits to choose from; one kit
for the five, eight and 12-point modules and one kit for the 16-point modules. The five,
eight and 12-point module kit includes (3) 5-pin 5mm connectors. The 8-point modules
will use only 2 of the 5-pin connectors, one (1) will not be used. The 5 and 12-point
modules will use all three connectors. The 16-point module kits include (2) 10-pin
3.81 mm connectors.
Terminal block kit part numbers and connector specifications are listed in the following tables.

Terminal Block Connectors, 5-Point, 8-Point & 12-Point Modules

Terminal Block Specifications 5, 8 & 12-point Type
Kit Part Number

BX-RTB08 Kit

BX-RTB08-1 Kit

BX-RTB08

BX-RTB08-1

BX-RTB08-2

Connector Type

Screw Type 90 degree

Spring Clamp Type 180 degree

Screw Type 180 degree

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

5.0 mm

Screw Size

M2.5

N/A

M2.5

Screw Torque
Recommended

< 3.98 lb·in
(0.45 N·m)

N/A

< 3.98 lb·in
(0.45 N·m)

Screwdriver
Blade Width

3.5 mm

Wire Gauge
(Single Wire)

28–12 AWG

28–14 AWG

28–12 AWG

Wire Gauge
(Dual Wire)

28–16 AWG

28–16 AWG
(Dual Wire Ferrule
Required)

28–16 AWG

Wire Strip Length

0.3 in (7.5 mm)

0.37 in (9.5 mm)

0.3 in (7.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle P/N

5ESDV-05P-BK

5ESDSR-05P-BK

5ESDF-05P-BK

BX-RTB08-2 Kit

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Terminal Block Connectors, 16-Point Modules

Terminal Block Specifications 16-point
Part Number

BX-RTB10 Kit

BX-RTB10-1 Kit

BX-RTB10

BX-RTB10-1

BX-RTB10-2

Connector Type

Screw Type
90 degree

Spring Clamp Type
180 degree

Screw Type
180 degree

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

3.81 mm

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque
Recommended

<1.77 lb·in
(0.2 N·m)

N/A

<1.77 lb·in
(0.2 N·m)

Screwdriver
Blade Width

2.5 mm

Wire Gauge
(Single Wire)

28–16 AWG

26–18 AWG

30–16 AWG

Wire Gauge
(Dual Wire)

28–18 AWG

30–20 AWG
(Dual Wire Ferrule
Required)

30–18 AWG

Wire Strip Length

0.24 in (6mm)

0.35 in (9mm)

0.26 in (6.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle P/N

EC381V-10P-BK

ESC381V-10-BK

EC381F-10P-BK

BX-RTB10-2 Kit

ZIPLink Wiring System
BRX digital expansion modules can be quickly connected to convenient ZIPLink remote terminal
blocks for ease of wiring remote I/O devices. Your ZIPLink selection is dependent on the number
of expansion module terminal points. The following tables list the connector options.

8-Point BRX Digital Expansion Module ZIPLink Selector
Expansion Module
Part No.

ZIPLink
Module

ZIPLink Module
Part No.

Qty
Needed

ZIPLink Cable
Part No.*

Qty
Needed

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20,
(standard)
-ORZL-RTB20-1
(compact)

ZL-BXEM-CBL10
ZL-BXEM-CBL10-1
ZL-BXEM-CBL10-2

BX-08ND3
BX-08NF3
BX-08NA
BX-08NB
BX-08TD1
BX-08TD2
BX-08TR
BX-08TA
BX-08CD3R

*S
elect the cable length: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, -2 = 2.0 m.
Available pigtail cables: ZL-BXEM-CBL10-1P = 1.0 m, ZL-BXEM-CBL10-2P = 2.0 m.

7-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

12 & 5-Point BRX Digital Expansion Module ZIPLink Selector
Expansion Module
Part No.

ZIPLink
Module

ZIPLink Module
Part No.

Qty
Needed

ZIPLink Cable
Part No.*

Qty
Needed

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20,
(standard)
-ORZL-RTB20-1
(compact)

ZL-BXEM-CBL15
ZL-BXEM-CBL15-1
ZL-BXEM-CBL15-2

BX-12ND3
BX-12NA
BX-12NB
BX-12TD1
BX-12TD2
BX-12TR
BX-05TRS
BX-12TA
BX-12CD3D1
BX-12CD3D2

*S
elect the cable length: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, -2 = 2.0 m.
Available pigtail cables: ZL-BXEM-CBL15-1P = 1.0 m, ZL-BXEM-CBL15-2P = 2.0 m.

16-Point BRX Digital Expansion Module ZIPLink Selector
Expansion Module
Part No.

ZIPLink
Module

ZIPLink Module
Part No.

Qty
Needed

ZIPLink Cable
Part No.*

Qty
Needed

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20,
(standard)
-ORZL-RTB20-1
(compact)

ZL-BXEM-CBL20
ZL-BXEM-CBL20-1
ZL-BXEM-CBL20-2

BX-16ND3
BX-16NA
BX-16NB
BX-16TD1
BX-16TD2
BX-16TR
BX-16CD3D1
BX-16CD3D2

*S
elect the cable length: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, -2 = 2.0 m.
Available pigtail cables: ZL-BXEM-CBL20-1P = 1.0 m, ZL-BXEM-CBL20-2P = 2.0 m.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 General Specifications
All BRX digital expansion modules have the same general specifications listed in the table below.
2
General Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
7-8

Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 85°C (-4° to 185°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2–6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Noise Immunity

NEMA ICS3-304

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Help File

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2 - UL File # E185989 Canada and USA
CE Compliant EN61131-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

Module Installation
WARNING: Do not apply field power until the following steps are completed. The BRX expansion
modules are NOT hot swappable.

To install an expansion module, remove the connector cover on the right side of the MPU or
expansion module the new module is to be connected to. Align the expansion connectors,
insert the module until you hear a “click”, indicating the module expansion connectors have
engaged.

To remove, depress
disengagement plungers
at top and bottom
of module

To Install, remove
Connector Cover

PWR
RUN

ERR

RUN
TERM
STOP

TX
RX

LNK
ACT

2
Align
expansion
connectors, insert,
and listen for “Click”
as the lock engages

To remove an expansion module locate the two disengagement plungers. One is located at the
top of the of the expansion module and a second one at the bottom of the expansion module.
Depressing both plungers at the same time will release the locking mechanism and disengage
the unit from the system.
Note: Allow a minimum of 45mm (1.75 in) to the right of MPU chassis and any subsequent expansion
modules for mounting and dismounting of the modules.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08NF3 Sinking/Sourcing 3–5 VDC Input
Discrete Input Specifications
2
3
4
X
5
6
X
7
8
9
10
IMPORTANT!
11
12
13
14
15 Discrete Input Wiring Diagrams
A
B
C
D
C

UL
R

Input Type

Sink/Source

Inputs per Module

Commons

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

3–5 VDC

Input Voltage Range

2–6 VDC

Maximum Voltage

6VDC

Input Impedance

870Ω @ 5VDC

Input Current (typical)

6mA @ 5VDC

Maximum Input Current

8mA @ 6VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 2.0 VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 0.8 VDC

Minimum ON Current

1.2 mA (2V required-guarantee ON state)

Maximum OFF Current

0.5 mA

OFF-ON Response

2ms

ON-OFF Response

2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

INPUT

2C
4
5

BX-08NF3

Hot-Swapping Information

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink
cables and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module,
a removable terminal block is available.
See Wiring Termination Selection in this
chapter for all options.

All Expansion units with 3.3-5 VDC inputs – NF3

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

Internal Circuitry

1 X

Sinking

Sourcing

COM

2-6 VDC

7-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Logical Input

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxND3 Sinking/Sourcing 12–24 VDC Input
INPUT

INPUT

0
1

6
7

3C
8

9
10
11

BX-08ND3

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7
3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

BX-16ND3

BX-12ND3

BX-08ND3

BX-12ND3

Input Module
8-pt, 12–24 VDC
Sink/Source

BX-16ND3

Input Module
12-pt, 12–24 VDC
Sink/Source

Input Module
16-pt, 12–24 VDC
Sink/Source

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

IMPORTANT!

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxND3 Sinking/Sourcing 12–24 VDC Input, continued
Discrete Input Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Discrete Input Wiring Diagrams
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
Input Type

Sink/Source

Inputs per Module

Commons

Sinking Input

BX-08ND3

BX-12ND3

BX-16ND3

BX-08ND3

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

BX-12ND3

3 (4 points/common) Isolated

BX-16ND3

4 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VDC

Maximum Voltage

30VDC

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

8mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VDC

OFF-ON Response

2ms

ON-OFF Response

2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

All Expansion units with 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3

Sourcing Input

Internal Circuitry

1 X

Sinking

Sourcing

Logical Input

COM

9-30 VDC

7-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxNB 12–24 VAC Input
.

INPUT

1
2

6
7

3C
8

9
10
11

BX-08NB

Input Module
8-pt, 12–24 VAC

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables and
connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a removable
terminal block is available. See Wiring Termination
Selection in this chapter for all options.

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7
3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

BX-16NB

BX-12NB

BX-16NB

Input Module
12-pt, 12–24 VAC

Input Module
16-pt, 12–24 VAC

IMPORTANT!

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxNB 12–24 VAC Input, continued
Discrete Input Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Discrete Input Wiring Diagram
14
15
A
B
C
D
Input Type

Inputs per Module

Commons

BX-08NB

BX-12NB

BX-16NB

BX-08NB

2 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-12NB

3 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-16NB

4 (4pts / common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VAC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VAC

Maximum Voltage

30VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VAC

Input Current (typical)

8mA @ 24VAC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VAC

Minimum ON Current

5.0 mA (9V requiredguarantee ON state)

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

OFF-ON Response

10ms

ON-OFF Response

10ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

All PLC units with 12-24 VDC_VAC inputs – E

AC Input

nC
0

1 X
2
3

9–30 VAC

COM

Sourcing

9-30 VDC/VAC

7-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxNA 120–240 VAC Input
INPUT

INPUT

5
6

6
7

3C
8

9
10
11

BX-08NA

Input Module
8-pt, 120–240 VAC

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See
Wiring Termination Selection in this chapter
for all options.

BX-12NA

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7
3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

BX-16NA

BX-12NA

BX-16NA

Input Module
12-pt, 120–240 VAC

Input Module
16-pt, 120–240 VAC

IMPORTANT!

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxNA 120–240 VAC Input, continued
2
Discrete Input Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
DI 110/220VAC Input
Discrete
Input
Wiring
Diagram
14
15
A
B
C
D
Input Type

Inputs per Module

Commons

BX-08NA

BX-12NA

BX-16NA

BX-08NA

2 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-12NA

3 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-16NA

4 (4pts / common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

120–240 VAC

Input Voltage Range

85–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

264VAC RMS

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Impedance

15kΩ

Input Current (typical)

9mA @ 120VAC,
13mA @ 220VAC

Maximum Input Current

14mA @ 120VAC,
20mA @ 220VAC

ON Voltage Level

> 85VAC

OFF Voltage Level

< 40VAC

Maximum OFF Current

2.5 mA

OFF-ON Response

10ms

ON-OFF Response

10ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

AC Input

Internal Circuitry

1 X

COM

2
3

7-16

85-264 VAC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Logical Input

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxTD1 Sinking 12–24 VDC Output
OUTPUT

OUTPUT

1
2

5
6

5
6
7

3C
8

9
10
11

BX-08TD1

Output Module 8-pt,
12–24 VDC, Sinking

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See
Wiring Termination Selection in this chapter
for all options.

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7
3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

BX-16TD1

BX-12TD1

Output Module 12-pt,
12–24 VDC, Sinking

IMPORTANT!

BX-16TD1

Output Module 16-pt,
12–24 VDC, Sinking

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxTD1 Sinking 12–24 VDC Output, continued
2
Discrete Output Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs –
14
Discrete Output Wiring Diagram
15
A
B
C
D
Output Type

Outputs per Module

Commons

Sinking

BX-08TD1

BX-12TD1

BX-16TD1

BX-08TD1

2 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-12TD1

3 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-16TD1

4 (4pts / common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output, no
derating over temperature
range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

> 0.05 VDC

Fuses, Overcurrent Protection

N/A

OFF-ON Response

<5ms

ON-OFF Response

<2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Sinking Output

7-18

LOAD

1 Y

LOAD

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxTD2 Sourcing 12–24 VDC Output
OUTPUT

OUTPUT

1
2

5
6

5
6
7

3C
8

9
10
11

BX-08TD2

Output Module 8-pt,
12–24 VDC, Sourcing

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See
Wiring Termination Selection in this chapter
for all options.

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7
3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

BX-16TD2

BX-12TD2

Output Module 12-pt,
12–24 VDC, Sourcing

IMPORTANT!

BX-16TD2

Output Module 16-pt,
12–24 VDC, Sourcing

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxTD2 Sourcing 12–24 VDC Output, continued
2
Discrete Output Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Discrete Output Wiring Diagram
15
A
B
C
D
Output Type

Outputs per Module

Commons

Sourcing

BX-08TD2

BX-12TD2

BX-16TD2

BX-08TD2

2 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-12TD2

3 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-16TD2

4 (4pts / common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output, no
derating over temperature
range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

> 0.05 VDC

Fuses, Overcurrent Protection

N/A

OFF-ON Response

<5ms

ON-OFF Response

<2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Sourcing Output

7-20

LOAD

1 Y

LOAD

5-36 VDC

COM

Logic
Output

OUTPUT

LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2
BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxTR Relay Output
OUTPUT

OUTPUT

1
2

6
7

3C
8

9
10
11

BX-08TR

Output Module 8-pt,
Relay Form A (SPST)

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See Wiring
Termination Selection in this chapter for all
options.

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7
3C
8
9
10
11
4C
12
13
14
15

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

BX-16TR

BX-12TR

Output Module 12-pt,
Relay Form A (SPST)

IMPORTANT!

BX-16TR

Output Module 16-pt,
Relay Form A (SPST)

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

NOTE: When using relay expansion modules, adding more than 32 relay points requires you to perform a
power budget calculation. See Appendix B for more information.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxTR Relay Output, continued
Discrete Output Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Relay Output Wiring Diagram
15
A
B
C
D
Output Type

Outputs per Module

Commons

Relay, Form A (SPST)

BX-08TR

BX-12TR

BX-16TR

BX-08TR

2 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-12TR

3 (4pts / common) Isolated

BX-16TR

4 (4pts / common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC, 18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC, 264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC),
300µA (AC) due to RC snubber circuit

ON Voltage Drop

> 0.2 Vmax

Fuses, Overcurrent Protection

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life

Mechanical Endurance

5 Million Operations

Electrical Endurance

Status Indicators

120,000 Operations

Logic form
Side, A
Green
PLC with Relay,
– R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Relay Output

Internal Circuitry

7-22

LOAD

1 Y

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Logic
Output

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
LOAD

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-05TRS Relay Output

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Relay, Form C (SPDT)

Outputs per Module

Commons

5 Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage

5–48 VDC
24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC, 18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC, 264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA (DC),
300µA (AC) due to RC
snubber circuit

ON Voltage Drop

> 0.2 Vmax

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Fuses, Overcurrent Protection

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

OUTPUT

NC
2C
NO
NC

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

Y NO
NC
4C
NO
NC
5C
NO
NC
BX-05TRS

Relay Cycle Life

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See
Wiring Termination Selection in this chapter
for all options.

Mechanical Endurance

10 Million Operations

Electrical Endurance

50,000 Operations

Status Indicators

IMPORTANT!

Logic Side, Green

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

NOTE: When using relay expansion modules, adding more than 32 relay points requires you to perform a
PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR
power budget calculation. See Appendix B for more information.

Relay Output Wiring Diagram
Relay Output

Internal Circuitry

nC
LOAD

NO Y

LOAD

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT
Logic
Output

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxTA 120–240 VAC Output
2
3
4
Y
Y
5
6
Y
Y
7
8
Y
9
10
11
BX-08TA
BX-12TA
12
13
IMPORTANT!
14
15
A
B
C
D

OUTPUT

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

3C
8
9
10
11

BX-12TA

BX-08TA

Output Module
12-pt, 120–240 VAC

Output Module
8-pt, 120–240 VAC

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a removable
terminal block is available. See Wiring Termination
Selection in this chapter for all options.

Hot-Swapping Information

Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BX-xxTA Derating Chart

2.50
2.25
2.00
1.75
1.50
1.25
1.00
0.75
0.50
0.25
0.00

25°C

30°C

35°C

40°C

45°C

Amps

7-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

50°C

55°C

60°C

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxTA 120–240 VAC Output, continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Discrete Output Specifications
Output Type

Triac

Outputs per Module
Commons

BX-08TA

BX-12TA

BX-08TA

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

BX-12TA

3 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage

120–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–265 VAC

Maximum Voltage

265VAC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A across temp range

Current Derating

Linear by Common: 2A @ 25°C - 1A @ 60°C

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA

ON Voltage Drop

2.5 Vmax

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Fuses

N/A

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Triac Output Wiring Diagram

Expansion with 120_240 VAC Outputs – TA

Triac Output

nC
LOAD

Internal Circuitry

LOAD

1 Y

LOAD

5-265 VAC
COM

Logic
Output
OUTPUT

LOAD

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-25

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08CD3R Combination DC Input/Relay Output
The BX-08CD3R Combination DC Input/Relay Output Expansion Module provides a total
of eight (8) points; four (4) 12–24 VDC sink/source inputs and four (4) Form A (SPST) relay
2
outputs.
3
IMPORTANT!
4
5
6
X
7
8
Y
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
Hot-Swapping Information

Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

1C
0
1
2
3

1C
0

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

1
2
3

BX-08CD3R

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See Wiring
Termination Selection in this chapter for all
options.

7-26

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08CD3R Combination
DC Input/Relay Output, continued
Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Inputs per Module

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VDC

Maximum Voltage

30VDC

Commons

1 (4 points/common)

Input Current (typical)

8mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30VDC

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VDC

Minimum ON Current

5.0 mA
(9V required-guarantee ON state)

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

OFF-ON Response

2ms

ON-OFF Response

2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

All Expansion units with 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3

Discrete Input Wiring Diagrams
Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

Internal Circuitry

1 X

Sinking

Sourcing

Logical Input
IN

COM

9-30 VDC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08CD3R Combination
2 DC Input/Relay Output, continued
Discrete Output Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Relay Output Wiring Diagrams
14
15
A
B
C
D
Output Type

Relay, Form A (SPST)

Outputs per Module

Commons

1 (4 points/common)

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage

5–48 VDC, 24–240 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–60 VDC, 18–264 VAC

Maximum Voltage

60VDC, 264VAC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @24VDC

Maximum Output Current

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

1µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.2 Vmax

ON-OFF Response

<10ms

OFF-ON Response

<10ms

Fuses

N/A

Maximum Switching Frequency

10Hz

Relay Cycle Life

Mechanical Endurance

5 Million Operations

Electrical Endurance

120,000 Operations

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

PLC with Relay, form A – R and Expansion with Relay, form A, – TR

Relay Output

7-28

LOAD

1 Y

LOAD

Internal Circuitry

COM

18-264 VAC
5-60 VDC

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

LOAD

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxCD3D1 Combination DC Input/Sinking DC Output
The BX-xxCD3D1 Combination DC Input/Sourcing Output Expansion Modules provides a
total of twelve (12) or sixteen (16) points; eight (8) 12–24 VDC sink/source inputs and either
four (4) or eight (8) 12-24 VDC sinking outputs.

IN/OUT

1C
0
1

2
3
2C
4
5

6
7
1C

1
2
3

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7

BX-16CD3D1

BX-12CD3D1

BX-16CD3D1

Combination Discrete Module
Input: 8-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sink/Source,
Output: 4-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sinking

Combination Discrete Module
Input: 8-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sink/Source,
Output: 8-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sinking

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See
Wiring Termination Selection in this chapter
for all options.

IMPORTANT!

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxCD3D1 Combination
DC Input/Sinking DC Output, continued
2
Discrete Input Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Discrete Input Wiring Diagrams
14
15
A
B
C
D
Input Type

Sink/Source

Inputs per Module
Commons

BX-12CD3D1

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

BX-16CD3D1

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VDC

Maximum Voltage

30VDC

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

8mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VDC

Minimum ON Current

5.0 mA (9V required-guarantee ON state)

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

OFF-ON Response

2ms

ON-OFF Response

2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

All Expansion units with 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

1 X

Sinking

Sourcing

COM

9-30 VDC

7-30

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Internal Circuitry
Logical Input

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxCD3D1 Combination
DC Input/DC Sinking Output, continued

1
2
Discrete Output Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 –
PLC 24 VDC Sinking Outputs – D1 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sinking Outputs
Discrete Output Wiring Diagrams
14
15
A
B
C
D
Output Type
Outputs per
Module
Commons

Sinking

BX-12CD3D1

BX-16CD3D1

BX-12CD3D1

1 (4 points/common)

BX-16CD3D1

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output, no derating over
temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Fuses, Overcurrent Protection

N/A

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

OFF-ON Response

< 5ms

ON-OFF Response

< 2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Sinking Output

LOAD

1 Y

LOAD

OUTPUT

Logic
Output

LOAD

COM

5-36 VDC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-31

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxCD3D2 Combination DC Input/Sourcing DC Output
The BX-xxCD3D2 Combination Input/Output Expansion Modules provides a total of twelve
(12) or sixteen (16) points; eight (8) 12–24 VDC sink/source inputs and either four (4) or
2
eight (8) 12-24 VDC sourcing outputs.
3
4
5
6
X
X
7
8
X
9
Y
10
Y
11
12
BX-12CD3D2
13
BX-16CD3D2
14
15
IMPORTANT!
A
B
C
D
IN/OUT

IN/OUT

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

1C
0
1
2
3

BX-12CD3D2

Combination Discrete Module
Input: 8-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sink/Source
Output: 4-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sourcing

We recommend using prewired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, a
removable terminal block is available. See Wiring
Termination Selection in this chapter for all
options.

7-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

1C
0
1
2
3
2C
4
5
6
7

BX-16CD3D2

Combination Discrete Module
Input: 8-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sink/Source,
Output: 8-pt, 12–24 VDC, Sourcing

Hot-Swapping Information

Note: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

BX-xxCD3D2 Combination
DC Input/Sourcing DC Output, continued
Discrete Input Specifications
Input Type

Sink/Source

Inputs per Module
Commons

BX-12CD3D2

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

BX-16CD3D2

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Nominal Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range

9–30 VDC

Maximum Voltage

30VDC

Input Impedance

3kΩ @ 24VDC

Input Current (typical)

8mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Input Current

12mA @ 30VDC

ON Voltage Level

> 9.0 VDC

OFF Voltage Level

< 2.0 VDC

Minimum ON Current

5.0 mA (9V required-guarantee ON state)

Maximum OFF Current

2.0 mA

OFF-ON Response

2ms

ON-OFF Response

2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

All Expansion units with 12-24 VDC inputs – ND3

Discrete Input Wiring Diagrams
Sinking Input

Sourcing Input
Internal Circuitry

1 X

Sinking

Sourcing

Logical Input
IN

COM

9-30 VDC

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

7-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: BRX Digital I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-xxCD3D2 Combination
2 DC Input/DC Sourcing Output, continued
Discrete Output Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Discrete Output Wiring Diagrams
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
Output Type

Sourcing

Outputs per Module
Commons

BX-12CD3D2

BX-16CD3D2

BX-12CD3D2

1 (4 points/common)

BX-16CD3D2

2 (4 points/common) Isolated

Maximum Current per Common

Nominal Voltage

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5–36 VDC

Maximum Voltage

36VDC

Minimum Output Current

0.1 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Output Current

0.5 A per output, no derating over temperature range

Maximum Inrush Current

5A for 50ms

Maximum Leakage Current

10µA

ON Voltage Drop

0.05 VDC

Fuses, Overcurrent Protection

N/A

OFF-ON Response

< 5ms

ON-OFF Response

< 2ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side, Green

Sourcing Output

LOAD

1 Y

LOAD

5-36 VDC

COM

Logic
Output

OUTPUT
LOAD

PLC 24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – D2 and Expansion units 12-24 VDC Sourcing Outputs – TD2

7-34

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BRX Analog I/O
Expansion Modules

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Overview..................................................................................................................... 8-2
Module Types............................................................................................................. 8-2
Wiring Termination Options...................................................................................... 8-4
Terminal Block Connectors..................................................................................... 8-4
ZIPLink Wiring System............................................................................................ 8-5
General Specifications................................................................................................ 8-6
Dimensional Information........................................................................................... 8-6
Module Installation.................................................................................................... 8-7
Module Configuration................................................................................................ 8-8
Analog Tips and Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 8-9
General Tips for Analog Circuits............................................................................. 8-9
Reducing Electrical Noise...................................................................................... 8-10
Current Module Tips and Troubleshooting.......................................................... 8-12
Voltage Module Tips and Troubleshooting.......................................................... 8-14
Temperature (Thermocouple) Module Tips and Troubleshooting..................... 8-15
BX-08AD-1 Analog Current Sinking Input............................................................... 8-16
BX-08AD-2B Analog Voltage Input.......................................................................... 8-21
BX-04THM Thermocouple Input.............................................................................. 8-26
BX-08DA-1 Analog Current Source Output............................................................. 8-32
BX-08DA-2B Analog Voltage Output....................................................................... 8-37

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 Overview
One of the unique features of the BRX platform is its ability to easily expand its capability to fit
your application solution. One of the ways the BRX platform can do this is by using expansion
2
modules that conveniently “snap-on” to the side of any BRX MPU.
The analog expansion modules give you the ability to add additional analog I/O as needed and
3
are identified as an input module, output module or temperature input module. On the front
panel of the analog I/O expansion modules a color scheme and a symbol are used to denote the
4
module type. Analog modules are available in 8-point current inputs/outputs, 8-point unipolar
or bipolar voltage inputs/outputs, and 4-point thermocouple input modules.
5
6 Module Types
Analog Input Modules
7
Two (2) analog input modules are available, with current or voltage inputs.
Analog input module faceplates have a blue terminal bar to distinguish them as
8
inputs, with symbols
or to signify current or voltage, respectively. Listed
in the table below are the different types of input modules available.
9
10
Analog Input Modules
11
Identifier
Input Type
8-Point
12
AD-1
13
AD-2B
14
15
A
B
C
D
I0+
I1+
I2+
I3+

Blue Label
for Input

I4+
I5+
I6+
I7+

BX-08AD-1

8-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Current Sink
0–20mA, 4–20mA

BX-08AD-1

Voltage
±10VDC, ±5VDC,
0–5VDC, 0–10VDC

BX-08AD-2B

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

Temperature Input Module
INPUT
TC0+
TC0TC1+
TC1TC2+
TC2TC3+
TC3-

A temperature input module is available with thermocouple inputs. The
temperature input module can also be configured for millivolt-level voltage
inputs. Temperature module faceplates have a blue terminal bar and symbol
for easy distinction from other module types. The table below shows the
temperature input module and its input type.
Blue Label
for Input

Temperature Input Module

Identifier
THM

Type

4-Point

Thermocouple

BX-04THM

Analog Output Modules

W
Y

I0+
I1+
I2+
I3+
I4+
I5+
I6+
I7+

Two (2) analog output modules are available, in current and voltage outputs.
Analog output module faceplates have a red terminal bar to distinguish them as
outputs, with symbols
or to signify current or voltage, respectively. Listed
in the table below are the different types of output modules available.
Red Label
for Output

Analog Output Modules

Identifier

Type

8-Point

DA-1

Current Source
0–20mA, 4–20mA

BX-08DA-1

DA-2B

Voltage
±10VDC, ±5VDC,
0–5VDC, 0–10VDC

BX-08DA-2B

BX-08DA-1

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 Wiring Termination Options
The BRX analog expansion modules ship without wiring terminals blocks. This allows you
to select the termination style that best fits your application. There are several wiring options
2
available, including removable screw terminal connectors, removable spring clamp terminal
connectors and pre-wired ZIPLink cable solutions. The BRX Temperature Input Modules
3
include the BX-RTB10 kit. The BX-RTB10-1 or BX-RTB10-2 can also be used and can be
purchased separately.
4
Terminal Block Connectors
The terminal block connectors are provided in kits of multiple connectors that are easily ordered
5
as a single part number. The kits for the 8-point modules and for the 4-point thermocouple
module include (2) 10-pin 3.81-mm connectors.
6
Terminal block kit part numbers and connector specifications are listed in the following table.
7
Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number
BX-RTB10
BX-RTB10-1
BX-RTB10-2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
NOTE: BX-RTB10 terminal blocks are included with Temperature Input modules.
B
C
D
BX-RTB10 Kit

BX-RTB10-1 Kit

Connector Type

Screw Type
90 degree

Spring Clamp Type
180 degree

Screw Type
180 degree

Wire Exit

180 degree

Pitch

3.81 mm

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque
Recommended

<1.77 lb·in
(0.2 N·m)

N/A

<1.77 lb·in
(0.2 N·m)

Screwdriver
Blade Width

2.5 mm

Wire Gauge
(Single Wire)

28–16 AWG

26–18 AWG

30–16 AWG

Wire Gauge
(Dual Wire)

28–18 AWG

30–20 AWG
(Dual Wire Ferrule
Required)

30–18 AWG

Wire Strip Length

0.24 in (6mm)

0.35 in (9mm)

0.26 in (6.5 mm)

Equiv. Dinkle P/N

EC381V-10P-BK

ESC381V-10-BK

EC381F-10P-BK

BX-RTB10-2 Kit

8-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

ZIPLink Wiring System
BRX analog expansion modules can be quickly connected to convenient ZIPLink remote
terminal blocks for ease of wiring remote I/O devices. The following table lists the connector
options. The ZIPLink wiring system is not available for use with the BRX Temperature Input
Module.

8-Point BRX Analog Expansion Module ZIPLink Selector
Expansion Module
Part No.

ZIPLink
Module

ZIPLink Module
Part No.

Qty
Needed

ZIPLink Cable
Part No.*

Qty
Needed

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20
(standard)
OR
ZL-RTB20-1
(compact)

ZL-BXEM-CBL20
ZL-BXEM-CBL20-1
ZL-BXEM-CBL20-2

BX-08AD-1
BX-08AD-2B
BX-08DA-1
BX-08DA-2B

*S
elect the cable length: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, -2 = 2.0 m.
Available pigtail cables: ZL-BXEM-CBL20-1P = 1.0 m, ZL-BXEM-CBL20-2P = 2.0 m.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 General Specifications
All BRX analog expansion modules and temperature input modules have the same general
specifications listed in the table below.
2
General Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 Dimensional Information
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
Operating Temperature

0° to 45°C (32° to 113°F)

Storage Temperature

−20° to 70°C (−4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 File # E139594 Canada and USA
CE (Safety: EN61010-2-201 and Immunity: EN61131-2: 2007)

Noise Immunity

NEMA ICS3-304

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the BRX Help File.

3.25″
[82.6mm]

1.08″
[27.5mm]

4.57″
[116.2mm]

4.24″
[107.8mm]

1.00″
[25.4mm]

2X Ø #8 Thru all

8-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

Module Installation
WARNING: Do not apply field power until the following steps are completed. The BRX expansion
modules are NOT hot swappable.

To install an expansion module, remove the connector cover on the right side of the MPU or
expansion module to which the new module is to be connected. Align the expansion connectors
and insert the module until you hear a “click”, indicating the module expansion connectors
have engaged.

To remove, depress
disengagement plungers
at top and bottom
of module

To Install, remove
Connector Cover

PWR
RUN

RUN
TER

ERR

M
STOP

TX
RX

LNK
ACT

2
Align
expansion
connectors, insert,
and listen for “Click”
as the lock engages

To remove an expansion module locate the two disengagement plungers. One is located at the
top of the of the expansion module and a second one at the bottom of the expansion module.
Depressing both plungers at the same time will release the locking mechanism and disengage
the unit from the system.
NOTE: Allow a minimum of 45mm (1.75in) to the right of MPU chassis and any subsequent expansion
modules for mounting and dismounting of the modules.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 Module Configuration
Once the expansion module has snapped in place and is added to the project it instantly adds
additional I/O and features to the MPU with minimal additional setup required.
2
To configure a newly attached module, load the Do-more! Designer software and connect to
the BRX MPU, as discussed in Chapter 10. A graphical representation of the BRX unit with
3
its attached modules is displayed in the Dashboard of the software.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
To access the module configuration dialogs, left-click or right-click on the module in the
Dashboard and select (1) Configure Module. The configuration dialogs for each module are
13
discussed in the corresponding section of this chapter.
14
15
A
B
C
D
8-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

Analog Tips and Troubleshooting
This subsection presents common tips on selection and installation of analog hardware, as well
as basic troubleshooting techniques, to maximize the performance of your analog input/output
circuits.

General Tips for Analog Circuits
When selecting and installing analog devices there are a few things to consider:
• Current devices are much more tolerant to noise than voltage devices.
• Current devices can handle much longer runs of wire without signal loss.
• Shielded twisted pair wire should always be used. Analog signals are typically low
power and the better your isolation the less noise you will have degrading the signal.
• If the analog signal is from a thermocouple, the appropriate thermocouple extension
wire and terminal blocks must be used if needed to extend wire lengths.
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Do not run analog signal wiring in the same conduit or wire way as AC wiring.
• Do not run analog signal wiring next to large
motors, high current switches, or transformers.
120–240 VAC
24VDC
- +
• Route the wiring through an approved cable
housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
L
N G V- V+
• Shields should be connected only at one end, to
AC
ground at the source device. Connecting both
Power
ends of a shield will create a ground loop which
can increase the noise in a circuit.
• Bonding of the DC negative to ground should be
considered, with the exception of Class II power
supplies which should never be bonded to ground.
This can help with reducing noise induced into
analog circuits. Please note that consideration
should be given to all devices that will utilize
the power supply to insure that bonding of the
negative will not cause damage or interference.
• AC power should be checked from neutral
to ground. This voltage should be less than
0.1 VAC.
AC Power In

Auxillary out

300mA max.

NOTE: Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those
before you begin the installation.
NOTE: Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Reducing Electrical Noise
Electrical noise is one of the most difficult problems to diagnose. It can enter the system from
a wide range of conducted or radiated sources.
Conducted noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system by way of
an attached wire, panel connection, etc. It may enter through an I/O point, a power supply
connection, the communication ground connection, or the chassis ground connection.
Radiated noise is when electrical interference is introduced into the system without a direct
electrical connection, such as via radio waves.
It may be difficult to determine how electrical noise is entering the system, but the corrective
actions for either type of noise problem are similar.
While electrical noise cannot be eliminated completely, it can be reduced to a level that will not
affect system function. Proper grounding of components and signal wiring along with proper
isolation of voltages can minimize noise in the system.

Grounding
Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. A good earth ground can
be the single most effective way to correct noise problems. If a ground is not available, install
a ground rod as close to the system as possible.
Ensure all ground wires are single point grounds and are not daisy chained from one device to
another. Ground metal enclosures around the system. Loose ground wires on your devices are
more susceptible to noise than the other wires in your system. A loose wire is no more than
a large antenna waiting to introduce noise into the system; therefore, you should tighten all
connections in your system. Review Chapter 1, “General Installation and Wiring Guidelines”,
if you have questions regarding how to ground your system.

Proper Ground Connection
PLC
GND

8-10

Other
Equipment

Power
Supply

GND

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

GND

Improper Ground Connection
PLC
GND

Other
Equipment
GND

Power
Supply
GND

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules
Cables with shields should be grounded on only one end of the shield. This prevents ground
loops and allows for any radiated noise collected by the shield to properly drain to a single
ground point.

Shielded Twisted-pair cable

Poten�al
Diﬀerence

Isolation
Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the MPU and I/O. Installing
an isolation transformer for all AC sources can correct this problem.
DC power sources should be properly grounded, except for Class II power supplies which
should never be bonded to ground. Switching DC power supplies commonly generate more
noise than linear supplies. Typically switching type supplies work well for analog circuits, but
for some circuits where noise can be a factor, linear type supplies may be needed.
Analog wiring should be placed in separate wire ways or wiring bundles. Keep AC and DC
wiring separated. Never run analog signal or communications wiring in parallel or in close
proximity to high voltage wiring.
Transformers, inductors, VFDs, DC drives, welders, static generators, ultrasonic devices, radio
transmitters, receivers, wiring and antennas, along with similar types of devices, generate large
amounts of RF interference. DC wiring, analog wiring and communications wiring should
be kept as far away from these sorts of devices and their associated input and output wiring as
possible.
Devices that generate noise such as those listed above, along with coil driven devices such as
relays, contactors, solenoids, etc., should be placed on a separate power supply from analog
circuits. If this is not possible, then great care should be taken to properly suppress the transient
voltage spikes from these devices turning on and off. See Chapter 1, “BRX General Installation
and Wiring Guidelines” for more information on this subject.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Current Module Tips and Troubleshooting
•

Use shielded twisted pair wire. Suggested ADC cables are PLTC3-18-xS-xxxx or
PLTC3-18-xSS-xxxx

•

Analog circuits follow Ohm’s Law. As such it is important to follow the specifications
for impedance in the circuit. If you allow the impedance values to go outside of the
specification, damage to the module will occur.

•

If your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 125Ω, you may need to add a
resistor in series with the module. Consider the following example for a transmitter
being operated from a 24VDC supply with a recommended load resistance of 750
ohms. Since the module has a 125-ohm resistance, you need to add an additional
resistor.
R = Tr – Mr
R = 750 – 125
R ≥ 625

R = Resistor to add
Tr = Termination Requirement
Mr = Module resistance
(Internal 125 ohms)
Module Channel 1

R
CH1

+
Two-wire

Transmitter

DC Supply
+24V

COM
125 ohms

0V
0V

•

8-12

If you suspect an I/O error, there are several things that could be causing the problem:
• A blown fuse.
• A loose terminal block.
• The 24VDC supply has failed or 24VDC has not been supplied to the I/O
common.
• The I/O point has failed.
The DC power supply that powers the module should be checked for the negative side
to ground voltage being under 0.1 V for both AC and DC. If this voltage is floating,
it can cause errors and/or damage to the circuit.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules
•

To test a current input module, use a
1.5 V battery wired across the positive
and negative terminals of the channel to
check for current. When applied across
a current analog input point, a reading
of approximately 30% of the full scale
value should result.

0–20mA is 0–5VDC across the
input resistor
1.5V/5V=0.3
0.3*65535 = ~19660 counts or
0.3*32767=~9830 counts

Module
CH1

1.5V
+

•

COM

Most current input modules read
voltage across a shunt resistor. It may
be easier to test for proper current
by measuring the voltage across that
shunt resistor and applying Ohm’s Law
(Voltage/125Ω = Current).

Module Channel 1

CH1

+
Two-wire

Transmitter

DC Supply
+24V

COM
125 ohms

0V
0V

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Voltage Module Tips and Troubleshooting
•
•

Use shielded twisted pair wire. Suggested ADC cables are PLTC3-18-xS-xxxx or PLTC318-xSS-xxxx.
Jumper the positive and negative terminals together on unused voltage input channels.

•

If you suspect an I/O error, there are several things that could be causing the problem:
• A blown fuse
• A loose terminal block
• The 24VDC supply has failed or 24VDC has not been supplied to the I/O common.
• The I/O point has failed.

•

The DC power supply that powers the module should be checked for the negative side to
ground voltage being under 0.1 V for both AC and DC. If this voltage is floating, it can
cause errors and/or damage to the circuit.

•

To test the voltage input module, use a 1.5 V battery wired across the positive and negative
terminals of the input channel to check for voltage. When applied across a voltage analog
input point, a reading of approximately 1.5 V should result.

Module
1.5V
+

8-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

CH1
COM

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

Temperature (Thermocouple) Module Tips and Troubleshooting
•
•
•
•

•

•
•

•

Use shielded thermocouple extension wire of the same type as the thermocouple.
Do not use terminal blocks that are not designed for thermocouple extension wire.
Thermocouple wires that have just been twisted to form a junction will inherently
be less accurate than factory made thermocouples. The use of twist junction
thermocouples is not recommended.
Jumper each of the channel +/- connections together on the module with a short piece
of copper wire. This will cause the module to return the measured terminal block
temperature for that channel. Does it read the correct ambient temperature of the
thermocouple module? If so there probably isn’t anything wrong with the module.
This temperature will be several degrees higher than the ambient air temperature of
the enclosure.
With a thermocouple simulator, you have to disable the burnout detection for the
module using the module setup in the Do-more! Designer software and download
the program to the PLC. This will disable the burnout circuitry, which will cause
incorrect readings if left enabled. Even then, it is likely that the module will not read
exactly what the simulator is putting out due to the wire differences and the terminal
block on the module causing some cold junction error.
It is possible that the module may be damaged from exceeding the common mode
voltage spec which is 5 Volts. The voltage needs to be measured between each channel
on both plus and minus terminals of the module on both AC and DC scales and make
sure that it is under 5 Volts maximum. Preferably the voltage should be less than
0.1V.
AC power should be checked from neutral to ground. This voltage should be less than
0.1 VAC.
With grounded thermocouples, take precautions to prevent having a voltage potential
between thermocouple tips. A voltage of 1V or greater between tips will skew
measurements. For grounded thermocouples, the equipment and thermocouples must
be bonded with large-gauge braided wire to the same ground as the PLC.
The DC power supply that powers the module should be checked for the negative side
to ground voltage being under 0.1V for both AC and DC. If this voltage is floating, it
can cause errors and/or damage to the circuit.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08AD-1 Analog Current Sinking Input
2
Analog Current Sinking Input Specifications
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B IMPORTANT!
C
D
C

UL
R

I0+
I1+
I2+
I3+
I4+
I5+
I6+
I7+

BX-08AD-1

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

Inputs per Module

Commons

Module Signal Input Range

0–20mA, 4–20mA (Default)

Signal Resolution

16-bit, 15-bit (Default)

Input Impedance

125Ω±0.1%, 1/10th watt

All Channel Update Rate

45ms (8 channels)

Over Current Circuit Detection Time

< 1second

Maximum Continuous Overload
(Voltage)

0.5 Watts (e.g. ±100V @ 5mA)

Sample Duration Time

5μs per channel

Hardware Filter Characteristics

Low Pass 1st order, −3dB @ 144Hz

Conversion Method

Successive approximation

Linearity Error (end to end)

±0.01% of range

Input Stability and Repeatability

±0.035% of range (after 10 min. warmup)

Full Scale Calibration Error

±0.02% of range

Offset Calibration Error

±0.02% of range

Accuracy vs. Temperature

±25PPM / ºC maximum

Maximum Inaccuracy

0.1% of range (incl. Temperature Drift)

Maximum Crosstalk

−96dB, 1 LSB

Channel to Backplane Isolation

1800VAC applied for one second

Channel to Channel Isolation

None

Loop Fusing (External)

Fast-acting 0.032A recommended

Backplane Power Consumption

0.1 W

External DC Power Required

Class 2 or LPS power supply
24VDC (±20%)
25mA

Heat Dissipation

2.5 W

Weight

100g (3.5 oz)

Software Version

Do-more! Designer Programming
Software version 2.1 or later

Hot-Swapping Information

NOTE: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

8-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08AD-1 Analog Current Sinking Input, continued
Data Range Specifications
Selection

Enable 16 bit Unchecked
(15 bit Resolution, Default)
µA Per
Raw Counts
Casting*
Count

Description

Enable 16 bit Checked
(16 bit Resolution)
Raw Counts

Casting*

µA Per
Count

0–20mA

unipolar 0–20mA

0–32767

–

0.61

0–65535

WXn:U

0.31

4–20mA

unipolar 4–20mA

0–32767

–

0.49

0–65535

WXn:U

0.24

* For more information on Casting refer to Help topic DMD0309 in the Do-more! Designer Software.

The module reserves the first 24 bits of unused contiguous space in the X register, aligned to
an 8-bit word boundary, for status reporting. Error flags for this module are laid out within its
status register space as described in the following table.

Error Flag Specifications
MSB

LSB

1st Byte of unused X Registers
-

Data Not
Valid

Missing
24VDC

Self Test
Failed

Channel 8

Channel 7

Channel 6

Channel 5

Channel 4

Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 1

Module Status
2nd Byte of unused X Registers

Channel Open
(Broken Transmitter)*

3rd Byte of unused X Registers

Unused

* Broken Transmitter bits will turn on below ~3.75 mA.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08AD-1 Analog Current Sinking Input, continued
Analog Current Input Wiring
2
3
INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Analog Current Sinking Input Circuits
*An Edison S500-32-R 0.032 A fast-acting fuse is recommended
for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs, and current loops.

–

CH1 ADC

125Ω

CH2 ADC

125Ω

CH3 ADC

125Ω

CH4 ADC

125Ω

CH5 ADC

125Ω

CH6 ADC

125Ω

CH7 ADC

COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
0V
24V+

24VDC
Class 2 or LPS
User Supplied
Power

8-18

125Ω

*Fuse

0.032 A

2-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

2-Wire Transmitter

0.032 A

3-Wire Current +
Transmitter

–

3-Wire Transmitter

–
+
AC or DC

–

Power
Supply

*Fuse

4-Wire 4-20 mA
Transmitter

Ix+

1C/COM

1C
I4+
I5+
I6+
I7+

125Ω

CH0 ADC

1C
I0+
I1+
I2+
I3+

Ix+
1C/COM

24VDC User
Supplied Power

*Fuse

0.032 A

Ix+

1C/COM

User Supplied Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

NOTE: Shield should be connected only at one end, to ground at the
source device.

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08AD-1 Analog Current Sinking Input, continued
Software Setup
After the module is installed, open the Do-more! Designer programming software version 2.1
or later, connect to the BRX MPU and open the Configure Module dialog as described at the
beginning of this chapter.

(1) The module options are divided into subsets across multiple tabs. Click the appropriate tab to
edit the configuration.
(2) Module Configuration
Name – Each module comes with a default name. This may be changed by the user to better
identify the module if desired.
Info – This is the system description of the module. It is static and may not be changed.
(3) Global Settings
Channels Enabled – Select how many channels will be used. The default is all channels.
Selecting fewer channels may increase the update frequency. See the module specifications for
details.
(4) Global Status Bits
Self Test Failed – This bit will be On if the module has failed its internal self-test. In this case
the module is likely bad and should be replaced.
Missing 24V – This bit will be On if the external 24VDC power is missing. Check the 24VDC
power connection on the module terminal block.
Data Not Valid – This bit will be On if the module does not have the latest configuration
parameters or the module has not been configured at all. Reload the program into the CPU
and power cycle.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08AD-1 Analog Current Sinking Input, continued
2
3
4
5
6
(5) Analog Input x
These settings are for each channel of the analog module.
7
Drop Down menu - Select the range of the analog input here.
Enable 16 bit unipolar data – Check this box to change the raw count range from a signed
8
decimal bipolar data format to an unsigned decimal data format. This may require that Casting
be used in the program in order to properly access the data. Refer to the chart of Data Range
9
Specifications earlier in this chapter to see if the registers must be accessed with Casting.
(6) WXx
10
Range – The number of Raw counts for the selected channel on the module
Units/Ct – The amount of current that will equal 1 raw count.
11
Broken Transmitter – The input register that when On will indicate that the loop is broken.
(7) RXx
12
Range – The engineering units to which the raw counts are scaled.
Units/Ct – The number of raw counts that will equal 1 scaled engineering unit.
13
(8) Enable Scaling from WXx to RXx
WXx Min – The minimum value of the raw counts to scale.
14
WXx Max – The maximum value of the raw counts to scale.
15
RXx Min – The minimum value of the engineering units for scaling.
RXx Max – The maximum value of the engineering units for scaling.
A
Counts/mA – Use these buttons to change the raw scaling to counts or milliamps.
Clamp RXx – If this box is checked, RXx will clamp at the minimum and maximum scaled
B
values.
C
D
8-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08AD-2B Analog Voltage Input
C

UL
R

V0+
V1+
V2+
V3+
V4+
V5+
V6+
V7+

BX-08AD-2B

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

Analog Voltage Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

Commons

Module Signal Input Range

±10 VDC, ±5 VDC,
0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC (default)

Signal Resolution

16-bit, 15 bit (Default)

Input Impedance

>10MΩ

All Channel Update Rate

45ms (8 channels)

Sample Duration Time

5µs per channel

Hardware Filter Characteristics

Low Pass 2nd order, −3dB @ 15kHz

Conversion Method

Successive approximation

Accuracy vs. Temperature

±25PPM / °C maximum

Maximum Inaccuracy

0.15% of full range (over temp)

Linearity Error (end to end)

±0.03%

Input Stability and Repeatability

±0.06% of range (after 10 min. warmup)

Full Scale Calibration Error

±0.08% of range

Offset Calibration Error

±0.08% of range

Maximum Crosstalk

−96dB, 1 LSB

Channel to Backplane Isolation

1800VAC applied for one second

Channel to Channel Isolation

None

Loop Fusing (External)

Fast-acting 0.032A recommended

Backplane Power Consumption

0.1 W

External DC Power Required

Class 2 or LPS power supply
24VDC (±20%)
25mA

Heat Dissipation

2.5 W

Weight

100g (3.5 oz)

Software Version

Do-more! Designer Programming
Software version 2.1 or later

IMPORTANT!
Hot-Swapping Information
NOTE: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08AD-2B Analog Voltage Input, continued
Data Range Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
The module reserves the first 24 bits of unused contiguous space in the X register, aligned to
an 8-bit word boundary, for status reporting. Error flags for this module are laid out within its
8
status register space as described in the following table.
Error Flag Specifications
9
MSB
LSB
10
Module Status
11
12
Channel Out of
Range
13
Unused
14
15
A
B
C
D
Selection

Description

Enable 16 bit Unchecked
(15 bit Resolution, Default)1
µV Per
Raw Counts
Casting2
Count

Enable 16 bit Checked
(16 bit Resolution)

Raw Counts

Casting2

µV Per
Count

0–10V

unipolar 10VDC

0–32767

305

0–65535

WXn:U

152

0–5V

unipolar 5VDC

0–32767

152

0–65535

WXn:U

±10V

bipolar 10VDC

−32768 to 32767

305

±5V

bipolar 5VDC

−32768 to 32767

152

1. Bipolar ranges default to 16-bit resolution.

2. For more information on Casting refer to Help topic DMD0309 in the Do-more! Designer Software.

1st Byte of unused X Registers
-

Data Not
Valid

Missing
24VDC

Self Test
Failed

Channel 7

Channel 6

Channel 5

Channel 4

Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 1

2nd Byte of unused X Registers

Channel 8

3rd Byte of unused X Registers
-

8-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08AD-2B Analog Voltage Input, continued
Analog Voltage Input Wiring
Analog Voltage Input Circuits

INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY
1C
V0+
V1+
V2+
V3+
1C
V4+
V5+
V6+
V7+

*Fuse

CH0 ADC

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter

CH1 ADC
CH2 ADC

CH3 ADC

Vx+

0.032 A

1C/COM

–

AC or DC

Optional Transmitter Power Supply

4-Wire Transmitter

CH4 ADC
CH5 ADC

*Fuse

CH6 ADC
CH7 ADC

COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
0V
24V+

24VDC
Class 2 or LPS
User Supplied
Power

*An Edison S500-32-R 0.032 A fast-acting fuse is recommended
for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs, and current loops.

3-Wire Voltage
Transmitter

0.032 A Vx+
WX

3-Wire Transmitter

1C/
COM

24VDC User
Supplied Power
V7+

NOTE: For maximum accuracy: Jumper
unused inputs to common.

V8+
COM

NOTE: Shield should be connected only at one end, to ground at the
source device.

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08AD-2B Analog Voltage Input, continued
Software Setup
2
After the module is installed, open the Do-more! Designer programming software version 2.1
or later, connect to the BRX MPU and open the Configure Module dialog as described at the
beginning of this chapter..
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(1) The module options are divided into subsets across multiple tabs. Click the appropriate tab to
edit the configuration.
10
(2) Module Configuration
Name – Each module comes with a default name. This may be changed by the user to better
11
identify the module if desired.
Info – This is the system description of the module. This is static and may not be changed.
12
(3) Global Settings
Channels Enabled – Select how many channels will be used. The default is all channels.
13
Selecting fewer channels may increase the update frequency. See the module specifications for
details.
14
(4) Global Status Bits
Self Test Failed – This bit will be On if the module has failed its internal self-test. In this case
15
the module is likely bad and should be replaced.
Missing 24V – This bit will be On if the external 24VDC power is missing. Check the 24VDC
A
power connection on the module terminal block.
Data Not Valid – This bit will be On if the module does not have the latest configuration
B
parameters or the module has not been configured at all. Reload the program into the CPU
and power cycle.
C
D
8-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08AD-2B Analog Voltage Input, continued

(5) Analog Input x
These settings are for each channel of the analog module.
Drop Down menu - Select the range of the analog input here.
Enable 16 bit unipolar data – Check this box to change the raw count range from a signed
decimal bipolar data format to an unsigned decimal data format. This may require that Casting
be used in the program in order to properly access the data. Refer to the chart of Data Range
Specifications earlier in this chapter to see if the registers must be accessed with Casting.
(6) WXx
Range – The number of Raw counts for the selected channel on the module
Units/Ct – The amount of voltage that will equal 1 raw count.
Out of Range – The input register that when On will indicate that the voltage is outside of the
selected range.
(7) RXx
Range – The engineering units to which the raw counts are scaled.
Units/Ct – The number of raw counts that will equal 1 scaled engineering unit.
(8) Enable Scaling from WXx to RXx
WXx Min – The minimum value of the raw counts to scale.
WXx Max – The maximum value of the raw counts to scale.
RXx Min – The minimum value of the engineering units for scaling.
RXx Max – The maximum value of the engineering units for scaling.
Counts/VDC – Use these buttons to change the raw scaling to counts or volts.
Clamp RXx – If this box is checked, RXx will clamp at the minimum and maximum scaled
values.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-04THM Thermocouple Input
Thermocouple Input Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NOTE: This device does not
support ZIPLink Wiring Systems
A
B IMPORTANT!
C
D
C

UL
R

INPUT

TC0+
TC0TC1+
TC1TC2+
TC2TC3+
TC3-

BX-04THM

BX-RTB10 Terminal
Blocks Included

Hot-Swapping Information

NOTE: This device cannot be
Hot Swapped.

8-26

Input Channels

4 Differential

Commons

Input Impedance

>5MΩ

Resolution

16-bit, 0.1°(C or F)

Thermocouple Input Ranges

Type J: −190° to 760°C (−310° to 1400°F)
(default)
Type E: −210° to 1000°C (−346° to 1832°F)
Type K: −150° to 1372°C (−238° to 2502°F)
Type R: 65° to 1768°C (149° to 3214°F)
Type S: 65° to 1768°C (149° to 3214°F)
Type T: −230° to 400°C (−382° to 752°F)
Type B: 529° to 1820°C (984° to 3308°F)
Type N: −70° to 1300°C (−94° to 2372°F)
Type C: 65° to 2320°C (149° to 4208°F)

Cold Junction Compensation

Automatic

Thermocouple Linearization

Automatic

Accuracy vs. Temperature

±50PPM per °C (maximum)

Linearity Error

±1°C maximum (±0.5°C typical)
Monotonic with no missing codes

Maximum Inaccuracy–
Temperature

±3°C maximum (excluding thermocouple
error) (including temperature drift)

Linear Voltage Input Ranges

0–39mV
±39mV
±78mV
0–156mV
±156mV
0–1.25 V

Maximum Inaccuracy–Voltage

0.06% @ 25°C, 0.10% @ 0–60°C

All Channel Update Rate

2.16 s

Sample Duration Time

270ms

Open Circuit Detection Time

Within 2s

Maximum Ratings

Fault protected inputs to ±50V

Common Mode Range

0.6 V (@ 16-bit Resolution)

Common Mode Rejection

100dB @ DC and 130dB @ 60Hz

Conversion Method

Sigma-Delta

Backplane Power Consumption

0.1 W

External DC Power Required

Class 2 or LPS power supply
24VDC (±20%)
25mA

Heat Dissipation

2.5 W

Weight

100g (3.5 oz)

Software Version

Do-more! Designer Programming Software
version 2.1 or later

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-04THM Thermocouple Input, continued
Data Range Specifications
Selection

Description

Enable 16 bit Unchecked
(15 bit Resolution, Default)1
µV Per
Raw Counts Casting2
Count

Enable 16 bit Checked
(16 bit Resolution)

Type J

°C:
°F:

Type K

°C:
°F:

Type E

°C:
°F:

Type R

°C:
°F:

Type S

°C:
°F:

Type T

°C:
°F:

Type B

°C:
°F:

Type N

°C:
°F:
°C:
°F:

Type C

Casting2

µV Per
Count

WXn:U

0–65535

WXn:U

0.6
1.2

Raw Counts3
−1900
−3100
−2100
−3460
−1500
−2380
650
1490
650
1490
−2300
−380
5290
9840
−700
−940
650
1490

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

7600
14000
10000
18320
13720
25020
17680
32140
17680
32140
4000
7520
18200
33080
13000
23720
23200
42080

0–39 mVDC

Unipolar 39 mVDC

0–32767

−39–39 mVDC

Bipolar 39 mVDC

−32768 to 32767

−78–78 mVDC

Bipolar 78 mVDC

−32768 to 32767

2.4

0–156 mVDC

Unipolar 156 mVDC

0–32767

0–65535

WXn:U

2.4

−156–156 mVDC

Bipolar 156 mVDC

−32768 to 32767

4.8

0–1.25 VDC

Unipolar 1.25 VDC

0–32767

0–65535

WXn:U

19.1

1.2

4.8

38.1

1. Thermocouple and bipolar ranges default to 16-bit resolution.
2. For more information on Casting refer to Help topic DMD0309 in the Do-more! Designer Software.
3. Temperatures have one implied decimal place (e.g., raw count of -1900 is -190.0°).

Error Flag Specifications
MSB

LSB

1st Byte of unused X Registers

Module Status

Data Not
Valid

Missing
24VDC

Self Test
Failed

Channel 4

Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 1

Channel 4

Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 1

2nd Byte of unused X Registers

Channel Out of Range
3rd Byte of unused X Registers

Channel Open (Burn Out)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-04THM Thermocouple Input, continued
Analog Thermocouple/Voltage Input Wiring
2
3
INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY
4
TC0+
TC0TC1+
5
TC1TC2+
6
TC2TC3+
7
TC38
9
10
11
12
0V
24V+
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
CH0 T/C
INPUT
CH1 T/C
INPUT
CH2 T/C
INPUT
CH3 T/C
INPUT

- +

24VDC
Class 2 or LPS
User Supplied
Power

8-28

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

TC+
TC-

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules
NOTE: Thermocouple extension wire and proper thermocouple
terminal blocks must be used to extend thermocouples.
AutomationDirect thermocouple wire is recommended.

BX-04THM Thermocouple Input, continued
Thermocouple Input Circuits
Ungrounded/Shielded
Thermocouple

TC+
TC-

Analog Voltage Input Circuits
TC+

4-wire
Voltage
Transmitter
+

TC-

–

AC or DC

Grounded/Shielded
Thermocouple

TC+
TC-

TC+

Load Cell
or
Strain Gauge
+

TC-

–

AC or DC

Infrared
Thermocouple

Transmitter Power Supply

Excitation Power Supply
Voltage Divider

TC+

TC-

NOTE: Thermocouple extension wire and proper thermocouple
terminal blocks must be used to extend thermocouples.
AutomationDirect thermocouple wire is recommended.

Analog Voltage Input Circuits

TCx+
TCx-

NOTE: Shield should be connected only at one end, to ground at the
source device.

TC-

–

AC or DC

Transmitter Power Supply

TC+

Load Cell
or
Strain Gauge
+

For maximum accuracy:
Jumper unused inputs.

TC+

4-wire
Voltage
Transmitter
+

TC-

–

AC or DC

Excitation Power Supply
Voltage Divider
TC+
TC-

For maximum accuracy:
Jumper unused inputs.

TCx+
TCx-

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-04THM Thermocouple Input, continued
Software Setup
2
After the module is installed, open the Do-more! Designer programming software version 2.1
or later, connect to the BRX MPU and open the Configure Module dialog as described at the
beginning of this chapter..
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
(1) The module options are divided into subsets across multiple tabs. Click the appropriate tab to
13
edit the configuration.
(2) Module Configuration
14
Name – Each module comes with a default name. This may be changed by the user to better
identify the module if desired.
15
Info – This is the system description of the module. This is static and may not be changed.
(3) Global Settings
A
Channels Enabled – Select how many channels will be used. The default is all channels.
Selecting fewer channels may increase the update frequency. See the module specifications for
B
details.
Temperature Scale – Select either Celcius or Fahrenheit.
C
Burn Out Mode – Select if the Input register should read Low or High on burn out or if burn
out detection should be disabled. Note: Burn Out Mode must be set to Disabled in order to
D
use a Thermocouple Calibrator.
8-30

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-04THM Thermocouple Input, continued
(4) Global Status Bits
Self Test Failed – This bit will be On if the module has failed its internal self-test. In this case
the module is likely bad and should be replaced.
Missing 24V – This bit will be on if the external 24VDC power is missing. Check the 24VDC
power connection on the module terminal block.
Data Not Valid – This bit will be on if the module does not have the latest configuration
parameters or the module has not been configured at all. Reload the program into the CPU
and power cycle.

(5) Analog Input x
These settings are for each channel of the analog module.
Drop Down menu - Select the range of the analog input here.
(6) WXx
Range – The number of Raw counts for the selected channel on the module
Units/Ct – The amount of temperature or voltage that will equal 1 raw count.
Out of Range – The input register that when On will indicate that the input is outside of the
range selected.
Burn Out – If burn out is enabled, this register will be On when the loop is broken.
(7) RXx
Range – The engineering units to which the raw counts are scaled.
Units/Ct – The number of raw counts that will equal 1 scaled engineering unit.
(8) Enable Scaling from WXx to RXx
WXx Min – The minimum value of the raw counts to scale.
WXx Max – The maximum value of the raw counts to scale.
RXx Min – The minimum value of the engineering units for scaling.
RXx Max – The maximum value of the engineering units for scaling.
Counts/DegF – Use these buttons to change the raw scaling to counts or degrees (C or F).
Clamp RXx – If this box is checked, RXx will clamp at the minimum and maximum scaled
values.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08DA-1 Analog Current Source Output
Analog Current Source Ouput Specifications
2
3
4
W
Y
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B IMPORTANT!
C
D
C

UL
R

I0+
I1+
I2+
I3+
I4+
I5+
I6+
I7+

BX-08DA-1

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately

Hot-Swapping Information

NOTE: This device cannot
be Hot Swapped.

8-32

Outputs per Module

Commons

Module Signal Output Range

0–20mA, 4–20mA (Default)

Signal Resolution

16-bit, 15-bit (Default)

Output Type

Current Sourcing up to 22mA

Output Value in Fault Mode

~0mA

Maximum Load Impedance

700Ω

Maximum Capacitive Load

1000pF

Allowed Load Type

Grounded

Maximum Continuous Overload

30mA

All Channel Update Rate

1.5 ms per enabled channel

Maximum Inaccuracy

±0.15% of range

Maximum Full Scale Calibration Error

±0.08% of range

Maximum Offset Calibration Error

±0.06% of range

Conversion Method

Successive approximation

Accuracy vs. Temperature

±25PPM / ºC maximum

Maximum Crosstalk

+10μV

Linearity Error (end to end)

±0.06% of range

Output Stability and Repeatability

±0.02% of full range after 10 minute
warmup (typical)

Output Ripple

±0.01% of range/mA

Output Settling Time

200μs

Channel to Backplane Isolation

1800VAC applied for one second

Channel to Channel Isolation

None

Loop Fusing (External)

Fast-acting 0.032A recommended

Backplane Power Consumption

0.1 W

External DC Power Required

Class 2 or LPS power supply
24VDC (±20%)
250mA

Heat Dissipation

8.1 W

Weight

100g (3.5 oz)

Software Version

Do-more! Designer Programming
Software version 2.1 or later

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08DA-1 Analog Current Source Output, continued
Data Range Specifications
Selection

Description

Enable 16 bit Unchecked
(15 bit Resolution, Default)
µA Per
Raw Counts
Casting*
Count

Enable 16 bit Checked
(16 bit Resolution)
Raw Counts

Casting*

µA Per
Count

0–20mA

unipolar 0–20mA

0–32767

0.61

0–65535

WYn:U

0.31

4–20mA

unipolar 4–20mA

0–32767

0.49

0–65535

WYn:U

0.24

* For more information on Casting refer to Help topic DMD0309 in the Do-more! Designer Software.

Error Flag Specifications
MSB

LSB

1st Byte of unused X Registers

Module Status

Data Not
Valid

Missing
24VDC

Self Test
Failed

2nd Byte of unused X Registers

Unused

3rd Byte of unused X Registers

Unused

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08DA-1 Analog Current Source Output, continued
Analog Current Ouput Wiring
2
3
INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Analog Current Source Output

1C
I0+
I1+
I2+
I3+

1C
I4+
I5+
I6+
I7+

COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
0V
24V+

24VDC
Class 2 or LPS
User Supplied
Power

8-34

0.032 A

4-20 mA current sourcing
4-20 mA current sourcing
4-20 mA current sourcing
4-20 mA current sourcing
4-20 mA current sourcing
4-20 mA current sourcing
4-20 mA current sourcing
4-20 mA current sourcing

mA Load

CH0 DAC

Ix+

*Fuse

1C/COM

CH1 DAC
CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC
CH5 DAC
CH6 DAC
CH7 DAC

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

*An Edison S500-32-R 0.032 A fast-acting fuse is recommended
for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs, and current loops.

NOTE: Shield should be connected only at one end, to ground at the
source device.

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08DA-1 Analog Current Source Output, continued
Software Setup
After the module is installed, open the Do-more! Designer programming software version 2.1
or later, connect to the BRX MPU and open the Configure Module dialog as described at the
beginning of this chapter..

(1) The module options are divided into subsets across multiple tabs. Click the appropriate tab to
edit the configuration.
(2) Module Configuration
Name – Each module comes with a default name. This may be changed by the user to better
identify the module if desired.
Info – This is the system description of the module. This is static and may not be changed.
(3) Global Settings
Channels Enabled – Select how many channels will be used. The default is all channels.
Selecting fewer channels may increase the update frequency. See the module specifications for
details.
(4) Global Status Bits
Self Test Failed – This bit will be On if the module has failed its internal self-test. In this case
the module is likely bad and should be replaced.
Missing 24V – This bit will be On if the external 24VDC power is missing. Check the 24VDC
power connection on the module terminal block.
Data Not Valid – This bit will be On if the module does not have the latest configuration
parameters or the module has not been configured at all. Reload the program into the CPU
and power cycle.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-35

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08DA-1 Analog Current Source Output, continued
2
3
4
5
6
(5) Analog Output x
These settings are for each channel of the analog module.
7
Drop Down menu – Select the range of the analog output here.
Enable 16 bit unipolar data – Check this box to change the raw count range from a signed
8
decimal bipolar data format to an unsigned decimal data format. This may require that Casting
be used in the program in order to properly access the data. Refer to the chart of Data Range
9
Specifications earlier in this chapter to see if the registers must be accessed with Casting.
(6) WYx
10
Range – The number of Raw counts for the selected channel on the module
Units/Ct – The amount of current that will equal 1 raw count.
11
Broken Transmitter – The input register that when On will indicate that the loop is broken.
(7) RYx
12
Range – The engineering units to which the raw counts are scaled.
Units/Ct – The number of raw counts that will equal 1 scaled engineering unit.
13
(8) Enable Scaling from RYx to WYx
RYx Min – The minimum value of the engineering units for scaling.
14
RYx Max – The maximum value of the engineering units for scaling.
15
WYx Min – The minimum value of the raw counts to scale.
WYx Max – The maximum value of the raw counts to scale.
A
Counts/mA – Use these buttons to change the raw scaling to counts or milliamps.
Clamp WYx – If this box is checked, WYx will clamp at the minimum and maximum scaled
B
values.
C
D
8-36

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08DA-2B Analog Voltage Output
C

UL
R

V0+
V1+
V2+
V3+
V4+
V5+
V6+
V7+

BX-08DA-2B

Terminal Blocks
Sold Separately
Do-more! Designer version 2.1 or higher required.

IMPORTANT!

Analog Voltage Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

Commons

Module Signal Input Range

±10 VDC, ±5 VDC,
0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC (Default)

Signal Resolution

16-bit, 15-bit (Default)

Output Type

Voltage outputs sourcing/sinking at
10mA (example 10V @ 1kΩ load).

Output Value in Fault Mode

Voltage outputs 0V (Unipolar or Bipolar)

Minimum Load Impedance

1kΩ

Maximum Capacitive Load

1000pF

Allowed Load Type

Grounded

Maximum Continuous Overload

15mA

All Channel Update Rate

3ms

Maximum Inaccuracy

0.2% of range

Maximum Full Scale Calibration
Error

±0.08% of range

Maximum Offset Calibration Error

±0.04% of range

Accuracy vs. Temperature

±25PPM / °C maximum

Maximum Crosstalk

+3µV

Linearity Error (end to end)

±0.01% of range

Output Stability and Repeatability

±0.02% of full range
after 10 min. warmup (typical)

Output Ripple

150 µV/mA

Output Settling Time

200µs

Channel to Backplane Isolation

1800VAC applied for one second

Channel to Channel Isolation

None

Loop Fusing (External)

Fast-acting 0.032A recommended

Backplane Power Consumption

0.1 W

External DC Power Required

Class 2 or LPS power supply
24VDC (±20%)
100mA

Heat Dissipation

3.1 W

Weight

100g (3.5 oz)

Software Version

Do-more! Designer Programming
Software version 2.1 or later

Hot-Swapping Information
NOTE: This device cannot be Hot Swapped.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08DA-2B Analog Voltage Output, continued
Data Range Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
The module reserves the first 24 bits of unused contiguous space in the X register, aligned to
8
an 8-bit word boundary, for status reporting. Error flags for this module are laid out within its
status register space as described in the following table.
9
Error Flag Specifications
10
MSB
LSB
11
Module Status
12
Unused
13
Unused
14
15
A
B
C
D
Selection

Description

Enable 16 bit Unchecked
(15 bit Resolution, Default)1
µV Per
Raw Counts Casting2
Count

Enable 16 bit Checked
(16 bit Resolution)

Raw Counts

Casting2

µV Per
Count

0–10V

unipolar 10VDC

0–32767

305

0–65535

WYn:U

152

0–5V

unipolar 5VDC

0–32767

152

0–65535

WYn:U

±10V

bipolar 10VDC

−32768 to 32767

305

±5V

bipolar 5VDC

−32768 to 32767

152

1. Bipolar ranges default to 16-bit resolution.
2. For more information on Casting refer to Help topic DMD0309 in the Do-more! Designer Software.

1st Byte of unused X Registers
-

Data Not
Valid

Missing
24VDC

Self Test
Failed

2nd Byte of unused X Registers
-

3rd Byte of unused X Registers
-

8-38

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08DA-2B Analog Voltage Output, continued
Analog Voltage Output Wiring
Analog Voltage Output Circuit

INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY
1C
V0+
V1+
V2+
V3+
1C
V4+
V5+
V6+
V7+

COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
0V
24V+

24VDC
Class 2 or LPS
User Supplied
Power

voltage sink/source
voltage sink/source
voltage sink/source
voltage sink/source
voltage sink/source
voltage sink/source
voltage sink/source
voltage sink/source

*Fuse

VDC
Load

CH0 DAC

0.032 A Vx+
1C/COM

CH1 DAC
Load
Power Supply

CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC

*An Edison S500-32-R 0.032 A fast-acting fuse is recommended
for all analog voltage inputs, analog outputs, and current loops.

CH4 DAC
CH5 DAC

NOTE: Shield should be connected only at one end, to ground at the
source device.

CH6 DAC
CH7 DAC

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-39

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1 BX-08DA-2B Analog Voltage Output, continued
Software Setup
2
After the module is installed, open the Do-more! Designer programming software version 2.1
or later, connect to the BRX MPU and open the Configure Module dialog as described at the
beginning of this chapter..
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(1) The module options are divided into subsets across multiple tabs. Click the appropriate tab to
edit the configuration.
10
(2) Module Configuration
Name – Each module comes with a default name. This may be changed by the user to better
11
identify the module if desired.
Info – This is the system description of the module. This is static and may not be changed.
12
(3) Global Settings
Channels Enabled – Select how many channels will be used. The default is all channels.
13
Selecting fewer channels may increase the update frequency. See the module specifications for
details.
14
(4) Global Status Bits
Self Test Failed – This bit will be On if the module has failed its internal self-test. In this case
15
the module is likely bad and should be replaced.
Missing 24V – This bit will be On if the external 24VDC power is missing. Check the 24VDC
A
power connection on the module terminal block.
Data Not Valid – This bit will be On if the module does not have the latest configuration
B
parameters or the module has not been configured at all. Reload the program into the CPU
and power cycle.
C
D
8-40

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

BX-08DA-2B Analog Voltage Output, continued

(5) Analog Output x
These settings are for each channel of the analog module.
Drop Down menu - Select the range of the analog output here.
Enable 16 bit unipolar data – Check this box to change the raw count range from a signed
decimal bipolar data format to an unsigned decimal data format. This may require that Casting
be used in the program in order to properly access the data. Refer to the chart of Data Range
Specifications earlier in this chapter to see if the registers must be accessed with Casting.
(6) WYx
Range – The number of Raw counts for the selected channel on the module
Units/Ct – The amount of voltage that will equal 1 raw count.
(7) RYx
Range – The engineering units to which the raw counts are scaled.
Units/Ct – The number of raw counts that will equal 1 scaled engineering unit.
(8) Enable Scaling from RYx to WYx
RYx Min – The minimum value of the engineering units for scaling.
RYx Max – The maximum value of the engineering units for scaling.
WYx Min – The minimum value of the raw counts to scale.
WYx Max – The maximum value of the raw counts to scale.
Counts/VDC – Use these buttons to change the raw scaling to counts or volts.
Clamp WYx – If this box is checked, WYx will clamp at the minimum and maximum scaled
values.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

8-41

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 8: BRX Analog I/O Expansion Modules

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
8-42

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter

Future Release of
BRX Specialty Expansion Modules
For Future Use

BRX Do-more! Designer
Getting Started

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Overview................................................................................................................... 10-2
Before You Begin...................................................................................................... 10-3
BRX Do-more! Designer System Requirements....................................................... 10-4
Step 1: Install Do-more! Designer Software........................................................... 10-5
Step 2: Launch the Do-more! Designer Software ................................................. 10-8
Step 3: Prepare the Hardware.............................................................................. 10-11
Step 4: Apply Power to the PLC........................................................................... 10-14
Step 5: Establish PC to BRX MPU Communications............................................. 10-15
Step 6: Verify Hardware Configuration................................................................ 10-20
Step 7: Create a Ladder Logic Program............................................................... 10-23
Step 8: Save Project............................................................................................... 10-33
Step 9: Write Project to the BRX MPU................................................................. 10-34
Step 10: Testing Project Using Data View............................................................ 10-37
Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates............................................ 10-41
Updating the Firmware.......................................................................................... 10-42
Live Update............................................................................................................. 10-45
Update Operating System...................................................................................... 10-46
Update Gate Array and Loader.............................................................................. 10-48
Dashboard ............................................................................................................. 10-50
Help File.................................................................................................................. 10-53

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Overview
The BRX Platform is a Micro PLC system that uses the Do-more! Designer Software version
2.0 or newer (ADC part number DM-PGMSW). The Do-more! Designer programming
software package (downloadable for free) was developed as a powerful, flexible and easy to use
controls design tool.
The programming GUI features a user-friendly fillin-the-blank design for editing ladder logic, making
complex operations such as PID and motion control
easy to setup while minimizing programming time.
A built-in simulator allows testing of your program
design without requiring any additional external
hardware. This will help to reduce programming
errors prior to critical live application startups.
Easy to use troubleshooting tools allow you to
actually see what is going on in your logic, from
single stepping through the program one scan at
a time to monitoring multiple elements during
verification of correct program execution.
For the DirectLOGIC users that want to use the
BRX Do-more! MPU for projects originally written in DirectSOFT, Do-more! Designer
software has a built-in DirectLOGIC migration tool that will greatly reduce the time to migrate
a DirectSOFT program into Do-more! Designer.
This chapter focuses on installing the Do-more! Designer software, establishing a connection
to a BRX MPU, writing a simple ladder logic program and downloading it to the MPU. This
should help get you familiarized with the software and get started utilizing one of the most
powerful PLC’s on the market.

10-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Before You Begin...
Wiring Tools and Hardware
The tools and hardware shown below may be required to connect your power
supply to your BRX MPU

Screwdriver
TW-SD-MSL-3

Wire Strippers
DN-WS

Electrical and
Signal Wire

Programming Connection Options

AC Power Cord

(Not available from
Automationdirect.com)

The BRX MPU allows several built-in programming interface options. Choose from one of
the following suggested communication methods for this short step-by-step introduction to the
BRX platform. You should have at least one of these programming options ready and available.
Ethernet port (built-in), just connect a cable
Serial port: Using the 3-pin serial connection on the MPU

Ethernet Cable

Serial Cable
ZL-DB9F-CBL-2P

POM Slot Programming Options
USB POM and cable assembly(below)
Ethernet POM and cable (right)
RS-232 serial POM (RJ12 or 3-pin)
(lower right)

Ethernet POM Module with Cable

RS-232 Serial POM (RJ12) Module with Cable

BX-PGM-CBL Programming Cable Assembly

RS-232 Serial POM (3-pin) Module with Cable

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1 BRX Do-more! Designer System Requirements
Do-more! Designer Windows-based programming software (CD-ROM or web download)
works with a variety of Windows® operating systems listed below.
2
Do-more! Designer software can connect to the BRX system using one of the following
specifications. More detailed specifications and options are listed later in this chapter.
3
BRX Do-more is compatible with any of these PC operating systems:
Windows 10
4
Windows 8.1 - 64 bit
5
Windows 8.1 - 32 bit
Windows 8 - 64 bit
6
Windows 8 - 32 bit
Windows 7 - 64 bit
7
Windows 7 - 32 bit
Windows Vista - 64 bit
8
Windows Vista - 32 bit
Hardware
Requirements:
9
HD Space: 140Mb
Video: 1024x768 256 color
10
(1280x720 true color recommended)
1GHz , single core CPU (2GHz, multi-core recommended)
11
1GB RAM (3GB recommended)
Other: Windows 8 RT Edition is not supported.
12
NOTE: Ethernet POMs, USB and Serial Cables are sold separately. USB or Ethernet cable is also required for
13
communications between PC and CPU.
14
15
A
B
C
D
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®

10-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Step 1: Install Do-more! Designer Software
Download the Do-more! Designer programming software (DM-PGMSW) from our website
at http://support.automationdirect.com/products/domore.html, and launch the install procedure.
If you already have Do-more! Designer installed,
you can just update to version 2.0 or newer to get
BRX MPU support.
The first window that opens displays the Welcome
screen seen here. If there are previous versions
of the software already installed, this screen will
show the version number of the software
being replaced as well as the one being
installed. Click Next to continue.
An alert window will appear requesting
that all anti-virus software be disabled
and also reminding the user that
administrative restrictions may exist.

The License Agreement window will
be displayed next. Read over the
agreement, select I accept the terms
of the license agreement and click
the Next button to continue.
The license agreement may be
printed if desired. The Print
function will print a pdf of the
License Agreement document to
your default printer.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
At this point the software will ask
a little about you. Please fill in the
user information requested on the
Customer Information screen and
click Next to continue.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

At this stage, the software will ask
which type of install you would
like to perform. The Setup Type
window seen below gives two
options for installation type:
Complete and Custom.

Custom installation allows you
to choose which program features
to install, whereas Complete
installation installs all of the
program features available. The
Complete installation is selected
by default and is recommended for
first-time users and for purposes
of this primer. Click Next to
continue.

The next window to appear is
the Ready to Install the Program
window. This window is an alert
window, cautioning you that the
program is about to be installed. If
there are any changes that need to
be made to the install settings do
them now before continuing.
To review or change any of the
previous installation selections,
click Back to return to the
appropriate window and make
the change. If no changes are
necessary click Install to begin the
installation.

10-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

The pop-up shown here will allow you
to choose to install a Do-more! Designer
software desktop shortcut on your PC.
Click Yes or No and continue with the
installation.

The software will now install the
needed folders and files while the
Setup Status window displays the
installation progress status.
Once the installation has been
successfully completed, the
InstallShield Wizard Complete
window below will open.

Your software is now installed
and ready to use. The installation
wizard can now be closed by
clicking Finish.

NOTE: By default the Read Me File and Launch Do-more! Designer now boxes are checked. Un-check either
box should you choose not to view the Read Me file and not launch the software at this time.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1 Step 2: Launch the Do-more! Designer Software
2
NOTE: For this step, ensure the BRX MPU is not powered up. Connection to your PC is in Step 3.
3
NOTE: There are many keyboard shortcuts available in the Do-more! Designer software. For a list of available
short cuts (hot keys), view Help topic DMD0361.
4
After installing the Do-more! Designer software, launch
5
the software by double clicking the desktop Do-more!
Designer icon.
6
You can also launch the software from your PC Start
menu or All Programs menu. If the software link is
not embedded in the Start menu, use the path: Start >
7
All Programs > Do-more > Designer x.x > Do-more!
Designer x.x to launch the software.
8
When Do-more! Designer runs for the first time it goes
to the Start Page (area with 'brick' wallpaper) and the
9
Tip of the Day pop-up comes up by default. This feature
can be disabled by un-checking the Show tips at startup
box in the lower left corner. Select Close on the Tip of
10
the Day pop-up when you are finished viewing the tips.
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
10-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
When the Close button on the Tip of the Day pop-up is pressed, the Select Project window
comes up. Here you will select which project to work with - New Offline Project, New Online
Project, or Browse (for a project not listed). If you have worked on current projects, they will
appear below in the Recent Project list. As this is your initial install your window will be empty.

Press the Close button. The Launchpad area (on left side of window) is displayed with the
Startup Page selected.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
From the Start Page, you can select from any of 5 short videos that demonstrate how to use the
software and explain how the Do-more! technology works.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Video 1: "Welcome”, welcomes you to the Do-more! Designer Software. This video familiarizes you
with the BRX environment showing you how to connect to a BRX MPU, open a project, etc.
Video 2: “Quick Start”, walks you through writing and documenting a simple program and
downloading it to the BRX MPU.
Video 3: “Troubleshooting”, introduces you to and shows you how to use the troubleshooting and
debugging tools built in to the Do-more! Designer software.
Video 4: “Architecture”, explains how the Do-more ! Technology works. Understanding the Do-more
Technology allows you to take advantage of the built-in features allowing you to create projects easier
and decreasing the amount of programming time needed.
Video 5: “Helpful Hints”, covers some of the most common BRX MPU programming challenges and
explains how easily Do-more! Designer can help with these challenges.

The Video Search & Download Utility opens a search window and download screen.

10-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Step 3: Prepare the Hardware
The “Installation and Wiring” chapter for the BRX MPU contains detailed information for
your specific model.
The following summary explains the basic steps needed to get the BRX MPU ready to establish
a link so you can program and run a project.
1.

Installing the BRX MPU on DIN rail:
A.

Hook rear upper tabs over flange of DIN rail.

B.
Rotate the unit down toward the DIN rail, pressing firmly
until the BRX MPU snaps securely to the DIN rail.

Hook base
onto DIN
rail at top of
mounting slot.

base
into position.
2 Rotate

Gently push up
retaining clip to
lock component
onto DIN rail.

There are three ways to connect to the BRX MPU for programming:
A.

Using the USB POM with a USB programming cable.

Using Ethernet cable with built-in Ethernet port.

C.
Using RJ12 Serial POM module and RJ12 programming cable or via
the built-in 3-pin serial port connector with user supplied cabling.

Examples of each connection type are shown on the following pages.
NOTE: All communication connections between the BRX MPU and PC should be completed prior to launching
Do-more! Designer software.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

A. Connect BRX USB to Computer Using Programming Cable
For USB connectivity the BX-PGM-CBL assembly is required. This assembly includes one
USB POM module (BX-P-USB-B) and one 6ft USB-A to USB-B cable (USB-CBL-AB6).

GND

PWR

PWR IN-

RUN

PWR IN+

RUN
TERM
STOP

MEM
ERR

RS-232/485

1C
X0

GND
RX/DTX/D+

● Using the Programming Cable
Assembly (BX-PGM-CBL), install
the USB POM unit into the MPU
Plug-in POM slot as shown.
● Using the USB cable, connect the
MPU to your computer.

2C
X3
X4
X5
1C
Y0
Y1
2C
Y2
Y3

BX-DM1-10ED1-D

B. Connect BRX Ethernet to Computer Ethernet
There are two options for connecting the BRX via Ethernet to a PC. One option is to use
the built-in Ethernet port and connect to the PC via a Cat5 Ethernet cable. An alternate
connection is available by using the optional Ethernet POM (BX-P-ECOMLT) module that
plugs into the POM slot on the MPU. Both Ethernet options support 10/100Base-T via the
RJ45 port. The Ethernet port supports Auto-Crossover, which allows the use of a Cat5 patch
or crossover cable.

GND

PWR

PWR IN-

RUN

PWR IN+

RUN
TERM
STOP

MEM
ERR

RS-232/485

1C
X0

GND
RX/DTX/D+

2C
X3
X4
X5
1C
Y0
Y1
2C
Y2
Y3

BX-DM1-10ED1-D

Built-in Ethernet to PC

10-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

BRX POM Ethernet (BX-P-ECOMLT)
GND
PWR INPWR IN+

RUN

PWR

TERM
STOP

RUN
MEM
ERR

1C
X0
X1
X2

RS-232/485

GND

RX/D-

TX/D+

2C
X3
X4
X5
1C
Y0
Y1
2C
Y2
Y3

BX-DM1-10ED1-D

POM Ethernet to PC

C. Connect BRX Built-in Serial Port BRX POM serial port to Computer Serial
or USB Port
It is possible to connect to the BRX using the CPUs built-in serial port or by installing the BRX
POM serial port, BX-P-SER2-RJ12.

BRX Built-in Serial Port.
There are two options to consider for connecting the BRX built-in serial port to a PC. The first
option uses a ZL-DB9F-CBL-2P to a PC USB port using a USB to Serial adapter (USB-RS232,
as shown below). If the PC has a 9-pin serial port connection, you don’t need to use the USB to
Serial adapter. The second option (not shown) is to use a user built cable to connect the built-in
3-pin serial port to the PC serial port or USB to Serial adapter.
Serial RS-232 to PC
GND
PWR INPWR IN+

PWR
RUN

RUN
TERM
STOP

MEM
ERR
1C

RS-232/485

X0
X1
X2

TX
RX

GND
RX/DTX/D+

2C
X3
X4
X5
1C
Y0
Y1
2C
Y2
Y3

BX-DM1-10ED1-D

ZL-DB9F-CBL-2P

BRX 3-Pin Serial Port
ZL-DB9F-CBL-2P
Pin #

Term

Color

3-pin
Terminal

RXD

Brown

.......

TXD

Red

.......

RXD

GND

Yellow

.......

GND

RTS

Blue

CTS

Violet

USB-RS232
Use if PC does
not have a built-in
RS-232 DB-9 port.

EA-MG-PGM-CBL

Jumper

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

BRX POM Serial Port
1
The BRX Serial POM (BX-P-SER2-RJ12) can connect to a PC by using the D2-DSCBL
programming cable. The 9-pin connection of the D2-DSCBL cable can be connected to a serial
2
port on a PC or to a USB to Serial adapter (USB-RS232, as shown below).
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
POM Serial RJ12 Port to PC
10
11 Step 4: Apply Power to the PLC
12
WARNING: Minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal
12–24 VDC
13
injury, or equipment damage. Always disconnect the
system power before installing or removing any system
DC
component.
Power 14
+
Once all of the power wiring has been completed
and verified, connect the appropriate voltage source
15
to the power supply and power up the system. The
BRX MPU will perform a self-evaluation once
A
power is applied.
The following summary explains the basic steps needed to get the BRX MPU ready to establish
B
a link for programming and running a project.
C
NOTE: Please see Chapter 1 for the power wiring diagram corresponding to your specific BRX MPU.
D
GND

PWR IN-

PWR IN+

PWR
RUN

RUN

TERM
STOP

MEM
ERR

X0
X1
X2

RS-232/485

GND

RX/D-

TX/D+

X3
X4
X5

Y0
Y1

Y2
Y3

BX-DM1-10ED1-D

D2-DSCBL

Filler
Module

USB-RS232
Use if PC does
not have a built-in
RS-232 DB-9 port.

DC Power In

G
ININ+

10-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Step 5: Establish PC to BRX MPU Communications
The BRX MPU should now be powered up and the programming cable connected.
NOTE: The following example assumes that you are using the USB POM.

The first time the BRX USB POM is connected to your PC, you should see a message on your
PC indicating that the driver for the USB device was successfully loaded:
When the USB connection is made, Do-more! Designer
detects the USB POM and (a) creates a new link, shown in
the (b) Links window of Launchpad area.
From the Links window (b) you can open, edit, or create a
new link manually. You can also delete a link or get link
information. For this exercise, we will work with the link
that was generated automatically when the USB POM was
inserted.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
1. We are now ready to go online with the MPU. In the (a) Links section
of the (b) Launchpad, select the (c) USB link; in this example it is called
BX-DM1E-X 00:3A. Click on (d) Open button.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

2. Once connected to the MPU, you may encounter the initialization
screen shown below. This will appear on first initialization of a new MPU.
Select Set PLC Clock to set the clock in the new MPU to be synchronized
with your PC clock.
3.

The Set PLC Clock option allows you to set the internal, real-

time clock of the BRX MPU. The Set PLC Clock window has
options for (b) Timezone and (a) Daylight Saving Time adjustments.
Select (c) Set to PC’s current time settings… then select
(d) Set PLC Clock and Exit.
4.

10-16

The option for Setup System Configuration appears next (below).

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

This allows

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
you to configure parameters of the BRX MPU, such as onboard communication
port configuration, I/O configuration (i.e. high-speed), and mapping.
Select
Setup System Configuration.

5. The System Configuration window appears next with the (a) CPU Configuration selected by
default. This window and those indexed in the (b) Configuration Entries tree on left, expose many of
the system operating parameters for your MPU. For purposes of this introduction we will accept the

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
default settings. Click (c) OK.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

The Setup System Configuration box reappears. Select Finish button to move to next step.
6. The Project Browser (a, b), including the Dashboard (d), will open with the
online toolbar (c) active. Notice the status bar indications (e, bottom of window)
show the MPU type, memory usage, communication status, errors, and mode, etc.
Hovering your mouse over the status bar (e) will highlight the items that are selectable. If you
select one of the items, a new window will open with real-time data and available options.

10-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
For example, the System Information window seen below, opens after selecting the memory usage
values (f) in the status bar. This information and much more can be accessed by way of the Dashboard,
a new addition to the Do-more! Designer software.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1 Step 6: Verify Hardware Configuration
Next we will verify the hardware configuration. The BRX series has an auto discover feature
that will automatically detect installed I/O modules. You can access the System Configuration
2
in three ways:
1. By selecting (a) PLC > System Configuration
3
2. By double clicking on the (b) CPU link under the Configuration tab in the Project Browser
3. By clicking the (c) X/Y Configure icon on the project toolbar.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
10-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
On the left side of the System Configuration window is an index of topics titled (a) Configuration
Entries. The (b) BRX Onboard I/O allows you to view the modules the software has detected.
For this example, we are working with a BX-DM1E-10ER3 MPU and no expansion I/O. This
unit has a built-in (c) Ethernet port and a (d) USB POM plugged in which show up in the
overview graphic.

The (a) BRX Onboard I/O graphic area is interactive, like the system Dashboard, and as you
hover and move across the image (b) "orange" boxes will appear and display information about
the highlighted section.
Also if the highlighted
section
can
be
configured
you
can click in the
highlighted area and
a configuration screen
will pop up.
For
example
hovering
over (b) the built-in
analog I/O hot spot,
a pop up will display
information on how
the analog I/O is
configured.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
After the hardware configuration is verified, select (a) the I/O Mappings option in the
Configuration Entries index. This option will display (b) the assigned addresses for the
available I/O, as seen below.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

These (c) X (discrete input), Y (discrete output), WX (analog input) and WY (analog output)
addresses are automatically assigned by Do-more! Designer. You have the option to manually
configure these addresses by selecting (d) Manual in the Mapping Mode section at the bottom
of the window or by right clicking (g) BRX Onboard I/O. Change default starting address in
(e) Edit Base's Default Map Addresses dialog box. Click (f ) OK when completed to close Edit
Base's Default Map Addresses dialog box.
The (a) Manual Mode Instructions section, also found at the bottom of the window, details the
various color indications associated with this mode.

Once the hardware and mapping is configured and verified, click (b) OK to return to the main
screen, displaying the Dashboard and the Project Browser.

10-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Step 7: Create a Ladder Logic Program
In order to create a ladder logic program, you will need to be in Edit Mode. All programs start
with a default $Main code block. We will be adding our ladder logic to this code block.
We can get to the $Main code block four different ways:
1. By selecting the (a) $Main navigation tab.
2. By double clicking on the (b) $Main option under the Control Logic section of the
Project Browser.
3. By selecting (c) View/Edit the Program under the Program section of the Dashboard.
4. By using the drop-down menu (d) View > Ladder View, as seen below.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

When in (a, b) Edit Mode, the ladder palette toolbar (c) and all of the ladder (d) Instruction
Toolbox options will become active. The cursor will be positioned on (e) Rung #1 and
highlighted.

Rung #1
Place the cursor box in the (a) NOP position on Rung #1. If the (b) Instruction Toolbox is not
open, click on the (c) Instruction Toolbox button from the ladder palette toolbar.

10-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Rung #1, Continued
Now, you are ready to begin entering the example ladder logic.
Click on the section heading (a) Timers/Counters/Drums and (b) double click or drag/drop
the TMR instruction.

Or you can type “T” while the cursor is on the (c) NOP position and select TMR from the
drop down menu, then press Enter.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Rung #1, Continued
Once the TMR is selected, a Timer dialog box appears.
1. Set the (a) Timer Struct to T0
2. Enter 03 into the (b) Preset Constant Value for the seconds (s) preset.
3. Click on the (c) green checkmark in the upper left corner to accept.
After clicking the checkmark, Rung #1 should show the (d) T0 timer (TMR) instruction with a
Preset of 3.000 seconds. A user variable can be assigned to the Preset value if needed, to allow
the timer preset to be set from an external source.

Since a Timer is a structure, it has predefined elements associated with it, such as “Tx.Acc”
(accumulated time), “Tx.Done” (the completion bit) and "Tx.Timing" (the timer is enabled
and timing).
Therefore, if T0. (the "period" must be used to open drop-down list) is entered into any
contact name, the Auto-Complete feature of Do-more! Designer will display all applicable bit
(Boolean) selections available for that structure. Selecting (e) the T0.Done element, as seen
above, will assign this element to the contact and the contact name will be T0.Done.
This feature works for all structures including: timers, counters, PID loops and strings. Many
system data types such as, $Main and $FirstScan, as well as user-created devices like ECOM,
CTRIO, or SERIO modules also use the Auto-Complete feature. See the Do-more! Designer
Help file topic DMD0327 for more information on structure members.

10-26

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Rung #1, Continued
Place the cursor in the (a) leftmost column of rung #1. Type the nickname T0_Start at the (a)
cursor position. The (c) Normally Open contact instruction (b) will be used by default as the
nickname is entered. Press Enter.

Another option is to select the (d) Normally Open Contact
instruction from the Ladder Palette Bar (F2 Hot Key) or
(b) double-clicking or drag/drop from the Instruction
Toolbox, enter T0_Start for the name, and click the (c) green
checkmark in the upper left corner.

Either method will open the Create Nickname
dialog seen here (Right). Select (a) the option …
assign to specified element, (b) type the desired
memory bit for this contact (C1), and select (c) OK
to accept.

Rung #1 should appear as shown below.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Rung #1, Continued
With the cursor in the position to the (a) right of contact T0_Start, begin drawing a branch
circuit. Under the Edit drop-down menu, select Wire, then select (b) Down. Notice the
shortcuts that are available for wire drawing. The wire could also be drawn using the shortcut:
(c) Ctrl+Down Arrow. The (d) wire should now appear in your ladder.

NOTE: There are also Delete Wire options in the Edit drop down menu that are used to erase any wires not
needed.

10-28

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Rung #1, Continued
Place the (a) cursor in the space to the left of the new line and select another normally open
contact.
Type in the nickname (b) T0_Manual and (c) assign bit C2. Select (d) OK to accept.

Rung #1 should look like this:

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
Rung #2
Place a normally open contact in the first position of (a) Rung #2. This contact will be tied to
the Done bit of timer T0. Therefore, the name for this (b) contact should be entered as “T0.
Done”. There should be no Create Nickname dialog box as seen with the earlier normally open
contacts.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Lastly, you will need to add an Out coil to the end of Rung #2. Place the (a) cursor at the
end of the rung highlighting NOP and either select Out from the Ladder Palette Bar, or type
“OUT” and select the OUT instruction from the drop down menu. Another option is to (b)
select the OUT instruction from the Instruction Toolbox under the Coil/Bit Output section.
Next, choose which bit will be tied to this coil. Tie this (c) coil to the physical output Y1 by
typing “Y1” and clicking the (d) checkmark.

10-30

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
The ladder program should now look like this:

When either the (a) T0_Start or (b) T0_Manual contact is energized, the timer will begin
timing. When it times out, contact (c) T0_Done will energize and the (d) output coil Y1 will
turn on. Note that an END instruction is not required.
The (a) yellow bar in the left margin signifies logic that has not been accepted. So once you
have verified your logic, click the (b) Accept button in the Project Toolbar or the (c) Ladder
Palette Bar to accept the changes.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
After selecting “Accept”, the yellow bar should be replaced by green and blue bars (left margin).
The green bar means the project has been accepted but not saved. The blue bar (only appears
when online) means the project has not been downloaded to the MPU.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
10-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Step 8: Save Project
Save the project by selecting (a) Save Project from the File drop down menu (Ctrl+S), or save
the file under a different name or in a different location by selecting the (b) Save Project As…
option. You can also save the project by selecting the (d) SAVE icon on the Project Toolbar.
Once you save the project, the green bar on the left side of the ladder will disappear and the
blue bar (c) will remain, meaning you have successfully saved the project to disk, but not yet
downloaded to the MPU.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1 Step 9: Write Project to the BRX MPU
Now that you have created the example ladder logic program, you can write the program to the
MPU. As a quick review, (a) check the status bar at the bottom of $Main window to verify you
2
are Online with the MPU. Also notice the (b) blue bar to the left of the ladder logic program
signifying that your project has been Accepted and Saved and you are online with the MPU.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
There are several ways to write the project to the MPU. You can chose
11
(c) Write PLC button from the Project Toolbar or select (d) Write to
PLC from the File drop down menu (Shift+F9).
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
10-34

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
When the Write PLC button is selected and the MPU is in program mode, the Download
Project to PLC pop-up window seen here appears.

When the BRX MPU is in (a) Program mode and you click on the (b) OK button, the project
is written to the MPU. When the download is complete, the MPU remains in program mode.
In this window, you can select (c) to switch the MPU to RUN mode after the download is
complete.
You can also select (d) not to display the Download Project to PLC window if the MPU is in
program mode, keeping in mind that selecting this option will not download any Memory
Image. Please view the Do-more! Designer HELP topics for details on the features available in
the Download Project to PLC window.
NOTE: It is good practice to verify that the process you are controlling can be interrupted before downloading
a project to the MPU.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-35

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
If you do not select the option to Switch to
RUN mode after the download completes, you
can switch to RUN mode manually several
ways:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Click on the MODE icon on the Project
Toolbar

Select PLC Modes from
the PLC drop down
menu or use the shortcut,
Ctrl+Shift+R.

Click on (a) Program in the Status bar. This will bring up the Select PLC Mode pop-up where you
can change the PLC mode by selecting the (b) Run radio button.

10-36

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Step 10: Testing Project Using Data View
With the project successfully downloaded to the MPU and the unit in RUN mode, you can
now test the function of the ladder program using the Data View tool.

Start by opening a new Data window. To do
this, click on the (a) Data icon on the Project
Toolbar, or (b) select menu item Debug >
Data View > New (Ctrl+Shift+F3).

The Data View window shown below (c) will open. This window will open in the project
browser section of the programming window but it can be (d) relocated anywhere on the screen
by clicking the title bar and dragging it to a new location.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
Now enter the elements that you wish to
monitor. On line one type “C1” under
the Element column and press Enter. You
will see the C1 change to the (a) nickname
associated with it, T0_Start. On line two
(b) type the element “C2” (T0_Manual)
and on line three (c) type “Y1”. Notice the
three icons (d) at the top right in the data
window are grayed out. This will change in
the next step.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

With the ladder elements entered into the Data
View window, you now need to activate their status.
To do so, (a) click the All Status icon on the Project
Toolbar, or (b) select Debug > All Status On. The
All Status On option will not only activate (c) the
Status of the Data View window but also the status
of the (d) ladder program as seen below. The timer
structure now shows the status of its structure
elements, including the accumulated value.

10-38

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
The next step is to enable edits within
the Data View window. To do this,
click the (a) yellow box with the E
found in the top left corner of the Data
View window. The (b) Edits column is
now added to the Data View window.
The Edits column allows you to make
changes to the current values of the
elements listed. T0_Start’s current
value is OFF. Double-click the (c) ON
button under the Edits column. The
(d) Write Current Edit and the Writes
All Edits buttons will appear at the top
of the window. The buttons will write
individual or all edits, respectively, made
in the Data View window to the MPU.

Click the Write Current Edit to PLC button and confirm it. This will write the new value
to T0_Start. Once T0_Start changes to an ON state, the timer (T0) will begin to time and
quickly reach the preset. As soon as the preset has been met the done bit, T0.Done, will turn
ON causing output Y1 to also turn ON, as seen on the following page. Now write an OFF to
T0_Start and watch as the timer and Y1 reset.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-39

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
With All Status ON, you can view instruction
information in the ladder view (below). For example, on
the TMR instruction you can see the actual accumulated
time while the timer is on, and when the timer is done,
to mention a few.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Congratulations, you have now programmed, downloaded, and tested a ladder logic program
for the BRX Do-more MPU. Feel free to experiment with a program of your own and please
remember that the software Help file is an essential tool to use when programming your
controller.

10-40

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates
There will be times when an update is available for the BRX firmware or the Do-more Designer
programming software. The Do-more! Designer software makes it very easy to download the
updated files.
By default, checking for updates is done automatically each time Do-more! Designer is started.
Do-more! Designer will check for updates to the programming software, the Help file content,
Start Page content, new firmware for BRX Do-more and Do-more! controllers and new
firmware for CTRIO(2) modules. An Internet connection is required to perform the check
and to download the updates.
When updates are available, the user is notified through this dialog:

The automatic check can be disabled by opening the View -> Options menu, select the Global
tab and uncheck the “Automatically Check for Updates on Startup” selection.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-41

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates, continued
To manually check for software or firmware updates, go to
HELP -> Check for Updates.
Do-more Designer Help Topic DMD0310 provides detailed
information on downloading the programming software
updates, firmware updates, Do-more Designer Help System
updates, and HTML/Documentation updates.

Updating the Firmware
NOTE: Downloading the firmware files does not automatically update
the firmware of the connected BRX PLC. You must use the available
tools to update the Operating System and the Gate Array and Loader.
The available tools will indicate when the firmware is not up to date
in the controller.

There are three ways to access the dialogs needed to update
the Operating System and the Booter/Loader.
The first method is by using the (a) Info icon on the online toolbar. A second method is by
selecting the (b) OS or (c) Booter links under the CPU section of the Dashboard.

10-42

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates, continued
The third method is through the menu, PLC -> Update
Firmware.

When you select the Info icon on the online toolbar, the System
Information utility (below) comes up. To update the controller
firmware, use the section under CPU Version Information.
The CPU section displays the following information:

Do-more: The current version of the instruction set in the
controller.
OS: The current version of the operation system in the controller.
Booter: The current version of boot loader in the controller.
FPGA: The current version of the Gate Array code in the
controller.
Hardware: The current revision of the controller hardware.
NOTE: An Asterisk (*) next to any of the numbers means that there is an update available for that particular
portion of the firmware.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-43

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates, continued
Click the Update button (a) adjacent to the Do-more & OS
display to open the Update Operating System dialog.
Click the Update button (b) adjacent to the Booter & FPGA

display to open the Update Gate Array and Loader dialog.

NOTE: If both the Booter and OS need updating, it is recommended to do both updates.
NOTE: DIP switch #3 (on MPU) is used to Enable/Disable the ability to update the firmware in the controller.
This DIP switch must be OFF to allow Do-more Designer to update the operating system or the gate array.
Please review Do-more Designer Help topic DMD0266 for information on the on-board dipswitches.

The dialog shown below is displayed when you use the OS or Booter link under the CPU
section of the Dashboard or you use the menu PLC -> Update Firmware.
The Update Firmware dialog has the necessary tools to download new firmware files from the
Web and update the connected Do-more CPU.
The Operating System and
Booter sections show the
version currently running
in the attached Do-more
CPU and the latest versions
of the firmware and boot
loader files that have been
downloaded to this PC.

10-44

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates, continued
Click (a) Check for New Firmware (previous graphic). The Live Update tool comes up, which
allows you to see if there is a newer firmware available, and if so to download the updated files.
The Live Update tool is discussed later in this chapter.
Clicking (b) Update PLC Operating System (previous graphic) opens the Update Operating
System dialog that shows detailed information about the attached CPU's operating system and
Do-more Technology versions and selects the latest Operating System firmware file based on
the connected Do-more CPU. The Update Operating System dialog is discussed later in this
chapter.
Clicking (c) Update PLC Booter (previous graphic) opens the Update Gate Array and Loader
dialog that shows detailed information about the attached CPU's Gate Array and Boot Loader
versions and selects the latest Boot Loader firmware file based on the connected Do-more CPU.
The Update Gate Array and Loader dialog is discussed later in this chapter.
NOTE: If both the Booter and OS need updating, it is recommended to do both updates.

Live Update
NOTE: DIP switch #3 (on MPU) is used to Enable/Disable the ability
to update the firmware in the controller. This DIP switch must be
OFF to allow Do-more Designer to update the operating system or the
gate array. Please review Do-more Designer Help topic DMD0266 for
information on the on-board dipswitches.

Click the Use Live Update to get Firmware button to open
the Live Update dialog. Live Update will utilize the Internet
connection to check for new firmware files for the Do-more
controllers and the CTRIO modules, then download any new
files to the appropriate Bin\Images\< Device > folders.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-45

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates, continued
Click the Go! button to check for
updated firmware files.
Click the OK button to close the Live
Update dialog.
NOTE: Live Update requires a functional
Internet connection to work. Make sure the
Internet connection is active before running
Live Update.

Update Operating System
When the dialog opens it will read the OS Version and Do-more versions from the currently
connected controller, and from the latest operating system firmware file.

10-46

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Do-more Designer Software and Firmware Updates, continued
Current Operating System Information
OS Version - the current version of the operation system in the controller
Do-more Version - the current version of the instruction set in the controller
New Operating System Information
OS File - the most up-to-date operating system firmware file in the default firmware folder
Select... - opens a File Open dialog to select an operating system firmware file. Operating System
firmware files typically have the following form: "H2DM1x___.os"
Description - the current version information from the selected file
OS Version - the current version of the operation system in the selected file
Do-more Version - the current version of the instruction set in the selected file
Click the Update! button to begin the update progress. The last phase of updating the operating
system is a reboot of the Do-more controller. While the controller is rebooting, the normal
communication updates will fail, and the Link indicator on the Status bar will turn red. Once
the controller has successfully rebooted, normal communication updates will automatically
resume, and the Link indicator will return to normal.
Click the Cancel button to exit without updating the operating system.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-47

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Update Gate Array and Loader
WARNING! There is no fail-safe for the Gate Array and Loader update, which means, if the update
process begins and then fails, ** DO NOT TURN OFF THE POWER**, keep trying the update process until
it is successful. If you turn off the power without a successful update the controller must be sent back to
the factory for repair (use the 'H/W Repair (RMA)' link at www.hosteng.com to request an RMA number
for a Do-more CPU that fails to update the Gate Array and Loader).

When the dialog opens it will read the Gate Array Version and Boot Loader version from the
currently connected controller and from the latest Gate Array firmware file.

10-48

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Current Gate Array and Loader Information
Booter Version - the current version of Boot Loader in the controller
Gate Array Version - the current version of the Gate Array code in the controller
New Gate Array and Loader Information
GA File - the most up-to-date Gate Array firmware file in the default firmware folder
Select... - opens a File Open dialog to select a Gate Array firmware file. Gate Array files
firmware file typically have the following form: "H2DM1x___.ga"
Description - the current version information from the selected file
Booter Version - the current version of Boot Loader in the selected file
Gate Array Version - the current version of the Gate Array code in the selected file
Click the Update! button to begin the update progress. When the Gate Array and Loader
update is complete, you will see the following window with instructions to power cycle the
PLC.

Click the Cancel (previous graphic) button to exit without updating the Gate Array and
Loader.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-49

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Dashboard
The Do-more Designer Dashboard is a graphical representation of the PLC system. It is used
to assist in the configuration of the various components of the system as well as for monitoring
and troubleshooting after it is up and running. The following pages will be a quick overview
on how to use the Dashboard. Please reference Do-more Designer Help topic DMD0415 for
more detailed information.

The dashboard is divided horizontally into three sections, top, center and bottom sections.
The top and bottom sections consist of distinct panes each of which contain related items with
current status of each. These entries (a) are also mouse-over links; as you move your mouse
over an entry it will highlight in red and a pop-up text box will appear with more detailed
information. Left click a link to open a dialog that addresses the configuration of that entry, or
opens a monitor tool for that entry.
Entries (b) that have an orange ( ! ) next to them indicate items that need your attention.
For example, an orange (!) adjacent to the "OS: x.y.z" item in the CPU section indicates the
firmware in the CPU is older than the firmware you have downloaded to this PC. Click the
link to open the firmware update tool.
Some entries will have their text displayed with a yellow background to indicate the item is
generating a warning message that may need your attention. For example, if you have Forces
enabled and one or more items are currently being Forced to a value, the Memory section
will display the "x forces active" text with a yellow background. Click this link to open the
Configure Forces dialog to see what elements are being forced.
Some entries will have their text displayed with a red background to indicate the item is
generating a warning message that may need your attention. For example, if an I/O module
is reporting an error, the I/O section will display the "I/O System Status" text with a red
background. Click this link to open the I/O System View to see an overview of the entire I/O
system and locate the module that is reporting an error.

10-50

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
The center section contains a series of tabbed (a) graphical representations of the PLC system
components. The leftmost (top) selection is the local CPU. There is an additional tab created
for each Ethernet Remote I/O Slave. Any time the mouse cursor is in the center section (b)
orange outlines (known as hotspots) will appear on the sections of the PLC system to indicate
there is status information available for that area or configuration that can be performed.
Hovering the mouse cursor over any of the hot spots will display a popup that shows the current
status of the item in that hotspot. For example, hovering over the DI hotspot (c) will display
information on the response times configured for the discrete inputs and, if the unit supports
high speed inputs, it will display how the high speed Counter/Timer functions are configured.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-51

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started
Left-clicking on the hot spot will display a popup menu that contains links specific to the
configuration tools and information displays for that item. For example, left clicking on the
AIO (analog I/O) hotspot, displays links to view onboard analog I/O values in Data View and
a link to configure the analog I/O, as shown below.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Right-clicking on the MPU or an expansion module will display a list of operations that can be
performed on that module. For example, right-clicking on the MPU (below) gives the option
to Change CPU Type, Connect to PLC, or Disconnect from PLC. The options will vary
depending on the MPU family and module type.

10-52

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

Help File
Accessing the Help File
The software Help file is available as a quick reference or detailed guide to the many features
and capabilities of the Do-more! Designer software. This provides comprehensive support for
you as a user of not only the BRX Platform but also the whole Do-more product family.
There are three ways to access the Help File:
1.

Select the Help File icon from the Project Toolbar.

Choose Help from the Help menu drop down.

3. Use the shortcut F1 or press the(?) button or the Help button on the dialog that you need help
with.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

10-53

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 10: BRX Do-more! Designer Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Notes:

10-54

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BRX Do-more! CPU
Specifications

Chapter

In This Chapter...
The BRX Platform .................................................................................................... 11-2
BRX Do-more! CPU Common Specifications........................................................... 11-3
Memory Features...................................................................................................... 11-5
CPU Status Indicators............................................................................................... 11-7
Mode Switch Functions............................................................................................ 11-8
DIP Switch Specifications......................................................................................... 11-9
Battery Replacement.............................................................................................. 11-12
microSD Slot........................................................................................................... 11-13
Customizing the Logo Window............................................................................. 11-14
RS-232/485 Port Specifications.............................................................................. 11-15
Ethernet Port Specifications................................................................................... 11-17
POM Slot................................................................................................................. 11-17

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

The BRX Platform
The BRX Platform is a very versatile modular Micro PLC system that combines powerful
features in a compact standalone footprint. One of the many features that the BRX platform
has is the ability to utilize the Do-more! DM1 Technology. This allows the BRX platform to
leverage the power of the Do-more! DM1 technology resulting in shorter development time
and cost. For example you are able to take an existing Do-more project that was created using
the proven H2-DM1(E) or T1H-DM1(E) CPUs and port the program right into the BRXDM1(E) CPUs.
The foundation of the platform consists of 4 unique Micro PLC unit (MPU) form factors that
incorporates the Do-more DM1 technology. Shown below are the four unique Micro PLC
form factors.
BX ME
No Built-In I/O
Ethernet Port

BX 10
10 Discrete I/O
No Analog I/O
No Ethernet Port

BX 10E
10 Discrete I/O
2 Analog I/O
Ethernet Port

BX 18
18 Discrete I/O
No Analog I/O
No Ethernet Port

PWR
W

BX 18E
18 Discrete I/O
2 Analog I/O
Ethernet Port

RUN
R
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
SD
RS-232/485
2/485

TX
T
X
RX
RX

GND
GN
RX/DRX/D
TX/D+
TX/D

BX 36
36 Discrete I/O
No Analog I/O
No Ethernet Port

11-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BX 36E
36 Discrete I/O
6 Analog I/O
Ethernet Port

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

BRX Do-more! CPU Common Specifications
The BRX Do-more! CPUs have standard built-in features such as CPU status indication, a
CPU mode selection switch, microSD card slot and a CPU Pluggable Option Module (POM)
slot.
CPU Mode
Switch
Swit
PWR
W

CPU Status
Indication LEDs

RUN
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM

Micro SD Card Slot

ERR
R
SD
RS-232/485
RS-232
2/485

TX
TX

GND
RX/D-

RX
RX

TX/D+

Serial Port
3

USB

Pluggable Option
Module (POM) Slot

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 85°C (-4° to 185°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Noise Immunity

NEMA ICS3-304

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” in Appendix A or topic
DMD0331 in the Help File.

Agency Approvals*

UL 61010-2 - UL File # E185989 Canada and
USA CE Compliant EN61131-2

*Meets EMC and Safety requirements. See the Declaration of Conformity for details.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX Do-more! CPU Common Specifications, Continued

CPU Specifications
Program Memory Type

FLASH memory

User Data Memory Type

Battery Backed RAM, user configurable

Program Memory

1MB (Includes program, data and documentation)

User Data Memory

256kB

Retentive Memory

256kB max. By default all User Data Memory is set to Retentive

Scan Time

50µs 1K Boolean

Serial Port

RS-232/485, 3-Pin, Software configurable

Pluggable Option Module

RS-232, RS-485, Ethernet 10/100, USB 2.0 Type B

Data Logging

microSD card slot (32G max)

(Allowed per BX MPU model)

BX
BX
BX
BX
BX
BX

Expansion Module Density

5 ,8, 12 or 16 points/module

Expansion I/O Limits

128 I/O points

Remote Ethernet Slaves

16 slave units

Remote Ethernet Slave Discrete

4096 maximum

Remote Ethernet Slave Analog

4096 maximum

Real Time Clock Accuracy

±2.6 sec per day typical at 25°C
±8s per day max at 60°C

Programming Software

Do-more Designer – Ver. 2.0 or higher

Programming Cable Options 2

BX-PGM-CBL

Custom Label Window Size

0.75 in x 2.25 in (19mm x 57.2 mm) (18 & 36 point units only)

Expansion Modules 1

ME - 8 expansion modules
10/10E - 2 expansion modules
18 - 4 expansion modules
18E - 8 expansion modules
36 - 4 expansion modules
36E - 8 expansion modules

1 When using more than 32 points of expansion relay output points, a power budget must be done to insure that the system

can handle all of the expansion IO. Please review Appendix B for power budget information.

2 Can be programmed from any available Serial, Ethernet or USB communications port. Optional programming cable

assembly BX-PGM-CBL, includes the BX-USB-P USB POM module and a USB cable which allows programming from the
CPU POM option slot.

11-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

Memory Features

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX Do-more! CPU
Feature

BX-DM1-XXX

BX-DM1E-XXX

Total Memory (bytes)

262,144

Ladder Memory (instruction words)

65,536

V-Memory (words)

Configurable up to 65536 (4096 default)

Non-volatile V Memory (words)

Configurable up to 65536 (4096 default)

D-memory (DWORDs)

Configurable up to 65536 (4096 default)

Non-volatile D-Memory (DWORDs)

Configurable up to 65536 (4096 default)

R-memory (REAL DWORDs)

Configurable up to 65536 (4096 default)

Non-volatile R-Memory (REAL DWORDs)

Configurable up to 65536 (4096 default)

Stage Programming
Number of Stages

Yes
128 per program code-block;
number of code-blocks configurable to memory limit

Handheld Programmer

No
RS-232/485

Built-In Communications Ports

RS-232/485

Pluggable Option Module Slot (POM)

Program Memory

Total I/O points available

Number of Instructions Available

Ethernet
(10/100 Base-T)

Flash ROM
X, Y, each configurable up to 65536 (2048 default);
WX, WY (analog in/out) each configurable up to
65536 (256 default)
>170

>190

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-5

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Memory Features, (cont’d)

BRX Do-more! CPU
Feature

BX-DM1-XXX

Control Relays

Configurable up to 65536 (2048 default)

Special Relays (system defined)

1024

Special Registers (system defined)

512

Timers

Configurable up to 65536 (256 default)

Counters

Configurable up to 65536 (256 default)

System Date/Time Structures

User Date/Time Structures

Configurable up to 65536 (32 default)

Ascii String/Byte Buffer Structures

Configurable up to memory limit (192 default)

MODBUS Client Memory

Configurable up to memory limit, default 1024 input bits, 1024 coil
bits, 2048 input registers, 2048 holding registers

DL Classic Client Memory

Up to memory limit, default 512 X, 512 Y, 512 C, 2048 V

Immediate I/O

Yes

Interrupt Input (hardware / timed)

Yes

Subroutines

Program, Task, Subroutine Code-blocks,
up to memory limit

Drum Timers

Yes, up to memory limit

Table Instructions

Yes

Loops

FOR/NEXT, WHILE/WEND, REPEAT/UNTIL loops

Math

>60 operators and functions: Integer, Floating Point, Trigonometric,
Statistical, Logical, Bitwise, Timing

ASCII

Yes, IN/OUT, Serial, Ethernet TCP and UDP;
11 output script commands

PID Loop Control, Built-in

Yes, configurable to memory limit (over 2,000)

microSD Slot

11-6

BX-DM1E-XXX

Several instructions are available to perform data logging and file
management interaction on the microSD card.

Time of Day Clock/Calendar

Yes

Run Time Edits

Yes

Supports True Force

Yes

Internal Diagnostics

Yes

Password Security

Multi-user, credentialed, session-based security

System Error Log

Yes

User Error Log

Yes

Battery Backup

Yes (Battery included)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

CPU Status Indicators

CPU Status Indicators
Indicator
PWR

RUN

SD/ROM

ERR

Status

Description

OFF

Base power OFF

Green

Base power ON

Yellow

Low battery

OFF

CPU is in STOP mode

Green

CPU is in RUN mode

Yellow

Forces are Active

OFF

No ROM activity, No SD card

Yellow

ROM activity (Flash or SD card)

Green

SD Card installed and mounted*

Red

SD Card installed and not mounted*

OFF

CPU is functioning normally

Red

CPU Fatal Hardware Error or Software Watchdog Error

*A microSD card will become “mounted” to the MPU once the MPU recognizes the

microSD card and renders it accessible for use.

In addition to the individual definition of each LED, there are times when the controller will
use combinations of the LED ON/OFF states and colors to convey status information. The
following list describes the possible LED combinations:
ERR LED is blinking RED for (15 seconds) - Do-more! Designer can blink the ERR LED for 15
seconds to verify that a communication link is targeting the correct controller.
All eight (8) of the LEDs are ON and the color of each LED is GREEN - indicates the operating
system has started running.
All eight (8) of the LEDs are cycling through RED, GREEN and YELLOW, in a serial ‘chase’ pattern
- indicates the operating system is initializing.
The top-most four (4) LEDs are cycling through RED and GREEN, in a ‘bouncing ball’ pattern,
this indicates the controller is running only the boot loader and is NOT going to load and run the
operating system. The most likely cause is having DIP switch #1 in the ON position.
All eight (8) of the LEDs are ON and the color of each LED is RED - indicates the hardware
watchdog timer has expired because the controller’s operating system has stopped running.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Mode Switch Functions
The mode switch on the BRX Do-more! CPU allows the user to externally select the different
modes of operation. There are three modes available: RUN, TERM and STOP

CPU Mode Switch Functions
Position

Function

RUN

CPU is forced into RUN mode if no errors are
encountered.

TERM

Allows changing modes (RUN and PROGRAM)
using the Do-more! Designer software.

STOP

CPU is forced into STOP mode

The CPU mode can also be changed through the programming software if the mode switch
is placed in the TERM position. In this position, the CPU can be changed remotely between
the Run and Program modes. For more information on changing CPU modes through the
software, see the Step 9: Write Project to the BRX MPU section of Chapter 10 “BRX Do-more!
Designer Getting Started”. When power is applied to the system, the controller will go through
its power-up sequence. Then it will either, stay in Program mode if the mode switch is in the
STOP position, or attempt to go to Run mode if the mode switch is in the RUN position. If
the mode switch is in the TERM position, the CPU will return to the last operational mode
before power was lost. For example, if the CPU was in Run mode when power was lost, when
power is restored and the mode switch is in the TERM position, the CPU will attempt to
return to Run mode.

11-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

DIP Switch Specifications
The BRX Do-more! CPU has a block of DIP switches, located on the top of the chassis, that are used to
perform various debug and reset operations. The DIP switch settings are only read when the system is first
powered up. The default position for all of the DIP switches is OFF.
WARNING: CPU must be powered down prior to changing DIP switch settings!

The following table describes the position and function associated with each DIP switch. BRX Do-more!

NOTE: DIP switches
located in this compartment
are used for debug and
recovery functions only.

CPUs make use of combinations of DIP switch settings and the Mode switch on the front of the controller
to perform two reset functions. These reset functions can only be performed when the CPU is in the Boot
Loader portion of the power-up sequence.

DIP Switch Settings
Switch
DIP# Position

Function

Reset the TCP/IP Network Settings to factory default
values - Must be used with DIP #1

Reserved

Force the Serial port into RS-232 mode with default
settings (Programming mode for recovery purposes).

Disable ability to update the firmware and/or gate array.

Disable the hardware watchdog timer - the hardware
watchdog is always enabled, but this switch allows the
user to override the ability of the Force Watchdog Error
(WATCHDOG) and Debug mode to generate a Watchdog
condition.

Do not load an Operating System, stay in the Boot Loader.

Load the oldest copy of the operating system.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

DIP Switch Functions

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

The following sequence describes the steps necessary to perform one of the reset operations.
This combination of DIP switch settings and mode switch manipulation is purposely
complex to prevent these reset operations from being accidentally executed.
Clear Only the Network Settings
This reset function will clear ONLY the Network settings, which consists of the Module ID,
Module Name, Module Description, IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address.
Begin by powering down the MPU.
Record the current DIP switch positions (so they can be set back to their original position after the
manual reset is finished).
Set ONLY DIP #1 and #7 to ON position to perform the Clear Only the Network Settings
operation. Ensure all other DIP switches are in OFF position.
Set the CPU mode switch to TERM (the center location) and power up the CPU.
At this point the top 4 LEDs should be blinking the ‘stay in the boot loader sequence’, that is, they
should be blinking in sequence, from top to bottom then back to the top, alternating between red
and green.
Move the CPU mode switch to RUN (to the top).
Move the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center).
Move the CPU mode switch to RUN (to the top).
Move the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center).
Move the CPU mode switch to STOP (to the bottom).
ove the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center) - the top 4 LEDs should now
M
be ON.
NOTE: If you want to terminate the reset at this point you can do so by moving switch to RUN instead of
STOP or power down the MPU.

Move the CPU mode switch to STOP (to the bottom) - the bottom 4 LEDs should now be ON.
Move the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center) - the top 4 LEDs begin flashing the power
up sequence, and the ROM led should briefly be ON indicating that the data in the ROM is being
rewritten. The LEDs will then begin flashing the ‘staying in boot loader’ sequence indicating the
reset is complete.
Power down the MPU.
Return the DIP switches to their original positions.
Set the CPU mode switch to TERM (in the center location).

11-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

Reset to Factory Defaults
This reset function will clear everything from the CPU, including the Network Settings as
described previously, and the System Configuration, Memory Configuration, all control logic,
all Documentation, and all of the User Accounts and Passwords.
Begin by powering down the MPU.
Record the location of the DIP switches (so they can be set back to their original position after the
manual reset is finished).
Next, set all eight of the DIP switches ON to perform a Reset to Factory Defaults.
Set the CPU mode switch to TERM (the center location) and power up the MPU.
At this point the top 4 LEDs should be blinking the ‘stay in the boot loader sequence’, that is, they
should be blinking in sequence, from top to bottom then back to the top, alternating between red and
green.
Move the CPU mode switch to RUN (to the top).
Move the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center).
Move the CPU mode switch to RUN (to the top).
Move the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center).
Move the CPU mode switch to STOP (to the bottom).
Move the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center) - the top 4 LEDs should now be ON.
NOTE: If you want to terminate the reset at this point you can do so by moving the CPU mode switch to RUN
instead of STOP or power down the MPU.

Move the CPU mode switch to STOP (to the bottom) - the bottom 4 LEDs should now be ON.
Move the CPU mode switch to TERM (to the center) - the top 4 LEDs begin flashing the power
up sequence, and the ROM led should briefly be ON indicating that the data in the ROM is being
rewritten. The LEDs will then begin flashing the ‘staying in boot loader’ sequence indicating the reset
is complete.
Power down the MPU.
Return the DIP switches to their original positions.
Set the CPU mode switch to TERM (in the center location).

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1 Battery Replacement
All BRX MPUs have an onboard battery that maintains the contents of the retentive
memory any time the power to the controller is lost. The battery has an expected lifespan
2
of three years; after which the battery will need to be replaced. The battery is a standard
CR2032, coin cell battery (AutomationDirect P/N: D0-MC-BAT).
3
When the controller detects that the battery voltage is too low, and needs to be replaced, the
PWR LED will be YELLOW instead of its normal GREEN color. When Do-more! Designer
is online with the controller, the system-defined location $BatteryLow will be ON as well.
4
NOTE: Retentive memory is not saved automatically when a Do-more! Designer project is saved to disk. Use
5
the Memory Image Manager to create and manage retentive memory data images. Detailed information can
be found in Do-more! Designer software help topic DMD0282. It is good practice to make backups of your
projects and memory images to recover from unexpected circumstances.
6
Power down the MPU.
7
Remove the battery from it’s holder located on
top of the MPU. Take note of how the battery
is aligned in the holder. The battery is removed
8
by pulling on the tape attached to the battery to
+
begin sliding it out of the holder, then grasp the
top edge to complete the removal of the battery.
9
NOTE: The MPU has an onboard capacitor that will
10
maintain the retentive memory contents while the
battery is being replaced. The capacitor has a twohour runtime, which should be more than enough to
11
replace the battery.
Insert the new battery into the holder, making
12
sure the alignment is correct.
Power up the MPU.
13
Verify that the PWR LED is now GREEN instead
of YELLOW and the system-defined location
$BatteryLow will be OFF.
14
15
A
B
C
D
Battery Replacement
Coin Battery CR2032
ADC Part # D0-MC-BAT

CR2
032

NOTE: Do not
remove tape
from battery.

11-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

microSD Slot
The BRX Do-more CPU has data logging and file management instructions that allow a
microSD card to be used for data logging and other file storage capabilities. The microSD card
must be formatted to FAT32 and a maximum size of 32GB can be used. All card speeds are
currently supported.
Insert microSD card with notched
side down. Gently press into
microSD receptacle until Click.
To remove press in microSD
card until Click and release. Gently
pull microSD card from slot.

NOTE:
Card
not
included
Optional 16G microSD card available (AutomationDirect P/N MICSD-16G)

with

unit.

microSD Specifications
Port Name

microSD

Description

Standard microSD socket for data logging or file storage.

Maximum Card Capacity

32GB

Transfer Rate
(ADATA microSDHC Class 4
memory card)

Mbps

Minimum

Typical

Maximum

Read

14.3

14.4

14.6

Write

4.8

4.9

5.1

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when card is inserted/detected.

Optional microSD Card

ADC Part# MICSD-16G

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1 DAT2 DAT2
2CD/DAT3
CD/DAT3
CMD
3 VDD CMD
4 CLK VDD
VSS
5 DAT0 CLK
6 DAT1 VSS
7
DAT0
8
DAT1

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1 Customizing the Logo Window
2
NOTE: The Logo Window feature is only available on the BX 18/18E and BX 36/36E units.
A custom label may be placed in the logo window. The logo window can accommodate label
3
sizes up to 2 1/4” x 3/4”.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Follow the steps below to add a custom logo/label:
12
1. Remove the small gray clip at the left edge of the clear plastic window by pulling upward, away
from the unit.
2. Insert custom label.
13
3. Reinstall the small gray plastic clip.
The custom logo window can be used to display a company’s logo, or a system identification tag,
14
identifying the BRX MPU location and function within your system.
15
A
B
C
D
Lift to remove custom
label compartment cover

Insert custom label

11-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

RS-232/485 Port Specifications
The RS-232/485 port utilizes a removable three-pin screw
terminal block and is located on the front of the CPU. This
port is software selectable to communicate as RS-232 or as
RS-485. In the RS-485 mode you can also enable a 120
ohm termination resistor if needed.
The RS-232/485 port can be connected to the Do-more!
Designer programming software, Modbus RTU master or
slave devices, DirectLogic PLCs via K-Sequence protocol,
as well as devices that output non-sequenced ASCII strings
or characters.

Built-in RS-232 Specifications
Port Name

RS-232/RS-485

Description *

Non-isolated Serial port that can communicate via RS-232 or
RS-485 (software selectable). Includes ESD protection and builtin surge protection.

Supported Protocols

Do-more!™ Protocol (Default)
Modbus RTU (Master & Slave)
K-Sequence (Slave)
ASCII (In & Out)

Data Rates

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud

Default Settings

RS-232, 115200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Station
#1, Termination resistor OFF

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

Port Type

Removable 3-pin terminal strip 3.5 mm pitch

RS-232 TXD

RS-232 Transmit output

RS-232 RXD

RS-232 Receive input

RS-232 GND

Logic ground

RS-232 Maximum Output Load (TXD/RTS)

3kΩ, 1000pf

RS-232 Minimum Output Voltage Swing

±5V

RS-232 Output Short Circuit Protection

±15mA

Cable Requirements

RS-232 use P/N L19772-XXX from automationdirect.com

Maximum Distance
Replacement Connector

30 meters (100 feet); 6 meters (20 foot) recommended maximum
ADC Part # BX-RTB03S

* When using RS-485 a termination resistor is available and is software selectable.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1 RS-232/485 Port Specifications, continued
Built-in RS-485 Specifications
2
3
*
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
*
15
A
B
C
D
Port Name

RS-232/RS-485

Description

Non-isolated Serial port that can communicate via RS-232 or
RS-485 (software selectable). Includes ESD protection and builtin surge protection.

Supported Protocols

Do-more!™ Protocol (Default)
Modbus RTU (Master & Slave)
K-Sequence (Slave)
ASCII (In & Out)

Data Rates

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud

Default Settings

RS-232, 115200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Station
#1, Termination resistor OFF

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

Port Type

Removable 3-pin terminal strip 3.5 mm pitch

RS-485 Station Addresses

1–247

TXD-/RXD-

RS-485 transceiver low

TXD+/RXD+

RS-485 transceiver high

RS-485 GND

Logic ground

RS-485 Input Impedance

19kΩ

RS-485 Maximum Load

50 transceivers, 19kΩ each, 120Ω termination

RS-485 Output Short Circuit Protection

±250mA, thermal shut-down protection

RS-485 Electrostatic Discharge Protection

±8kV per IEC1000-4-2

RS-485 Electrical Fast Transient Protection

±2kV per IEC1000-4-4

RS-485 Minimum Differential Output Voltage

1.5 V with 60Ω load

RS-485 Fail Safe Inputs

Logic high input state if inputs are unconnected

RS-485 Maximum Common Mode Voltage

-7.5 V to 12.5 V

Cable Requirements
Maximum Distance

RS-485 use P/N L19827-XXX from automationdirect.com
1000 meters (3280 feet)

Replacement Connector

ADC Part # BX-RTB03S

When using RS-485 a termination resistor is available and is software selectable.

11-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

Ethernet Port Specifications
NOTE: This section applies only to the units with the Built-in Ethernet port. These models include all BRX
CPUs with the DM1E technology which includes BX ME, BX 10E, BX 18E and BX 36E.

The Ethernet port utilizes a standard RJ-45 connector and is located on the front of the CPU
just below the serial port. This port uses the 10/100BASE-T standard and has built-in autocrossover capability allowing the use of any standard patch cable or crossover cable.

Ethernet Port Specifications
Port Name

ETHERNET

Ethernet Port Type

RJ45, Category 5, 10/100 BASE-T, Auto Crossover

Description

Standard transformer isolated Ethernet port with
built-in surge protection

Transfer Rate

10 Mbps (Orange LED) and 100 Mbps (Green LED)

Port Status LED

LED is solid when network LINK is established. LED
flashes when port is active (ACT).

Supported Protocols

Do-more! Protocol
Ethernet Remote I/O
Modbus TCP/IP (Client & Server)
EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging)
HOST ECOM (DirectLogic)
SMTP (Email), SNTP (Time Server)
TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Raw packet)

Cable Recommendation

C5E-STxxx-xx from AutomationDirect.com

Ethernet Port Numbers
MODBUS TCP/IP

502, TCP (Configurable)

EtherNet I/P
(Explicit Messaging)

44818, UDP (Configurable)

HOST ECOM

28784, UDP (Configurable)

Do-more! Protocol

28784, UDP (Configurable)

POM Slot
The POM slot allows for an additional communication port, as an Ethernet, USB or serial
protocol. See Chapter 6: BRX Pluggable Option Module (POM) for port options.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

11-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 11: BRX Do-more! CPU Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Notes:

11-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BRX Do-more!
Onboard Motion Control
and Highspeed I/O

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Overview................................................................................................................... 12-2
Unsuitable Applications............................................................................................ 12-3
BRX Wiring Examples: High-Speed Inputs ............................................................. 12-4
BRX Wiring Examples: High-Speed Outputs, continued......................................... 12-8
Available High-Speed Input and Output Features................................................. 12-11
1. Input Filters....................................................................................................... 12-12
2. Interrupt Setup.................................................................................................. 12-14
3. High-Speed I/O ................................................................................................ 12-23
BRX High-Speed Examples..................................................................................... 12-34
BRX High-speed Instructions ................................................................................ 12-56
AXCAM................................................................................................................. 12-57
AXCONFIG............................................................................................................ 12-63
AXFOLLOW........................................................................................................... 12-67
AXGEAR................................................................................................................ 12-71
AXHOME............................................................................................................... 12-75
AXJOG................................................................................................................... 12-82
AXPOSSCRV.......................................................................................................... 12-84
AXPOSTRAP........................................................................................................... 12-89
AXRSTFAULT......................................................................................................... 12-94
AXSETPROP........................................................................................................... 12-96
AXVEL................................................................................................................... 12-99
TDODECFG......................................................................................................... 12-102
TDOPLS............................................................................................................... 12-104
TDOPRESET......................................................................................................... 12-114

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1 Overview
The purpose of this chapter is to help the user understand the capabilities and the flexibility
of the BRX built-in motion control and high-speed input and output (HSIO). This section
2
will show the user the steps needed to setup the I/O for use with the High-Speed functions,
provide various wiring examples, detailed programming examples and explain the available
3
high-speed instructions.
All inputs and outputs can be selected for use in an HSIO application. However, the standard
4
I/O will work at a lower response time. This flexibility frees up the high-speed inputs and
outputs. For example, in a BRX 18/18E MPU, when setting up a pulse train output (PTO)
as Step/Direction control to a stepper motor, it is possible to select a high-speed output for
5
the STEP signal and a standard output for the Direction signal. By doing this, a high speed
output is made available that can be used for another high speed output function, such as
6
PWM.
The High-Speed inputs (as fast as 250kHz) can be used as High-Speed counters, as triggers for
7
Interrupt Service Routines (ISR), and as edge timers. The High-Speed counter values can be
used as accurate position feedback and engineered values for rate and position. The Interrupt
Service Routine (ISRs) can be used to run through logic based on events that are too fast for
8
standard input triggers and normal PLC logic scan.
With the high-speed outputs (as fast as 250kHz), it is possible to perform homing moves,
9
trapezoid and s-curve moves, jog and velocity moves, and pulse width modulation (PWM).
Also available are electronic camming and gearing instructions, providing additional ways to
10
handle follower type moves.
The following table shows the BRX platform HSI specifications.
11
HSI Specifications
12
Item
10/10E
18/18E
36/36E
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
Input Type

Sink/Source

Total Inputs *

20**

High-Speed Inputs

X0–X9

Location

X0–X5

Frequency

0 to 250kHz

Minimum Pulse width for HSI

0.5 μs

Off to On Response

< 2µs

On to Off Response

< 2µs
* Refer to the specific wiring chapter for the discrete input specs of the specific model you are using.
** Standard inputs may be used with high-speed functions, but at lower response frequencies of
approximately 120Hz.

12-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Overview, continued
The following table shows the BRX platform HSO specifications.

HSO Specifications
Parameter

10/10E

Output Type

18/18E

36/36E

High-Speed

Total Outputs *

16**

High-Speed Outputs

Location
Off to On Response
On to Off Response
Max Switching Frequency

Y0–Y1

Y0–Y3

Y0–Y7

< 2µs
< 2µs
1m cable; 250kHz
10m cable; 100kHz

* Refer to the specific wiring chapter for the discrete output specs of the specific model you are using.
** Standard outputs may be used with high-speed functions, but at lower response frequencies of
approximately 110Hz.

Unsuitable Applications
There are situations where HSIO is not an appropriate control choice:
•
Mechanical contacts used as counter or encoder inputs: Reliable readings are not possible using
mechanical contacts. The bounce of mechanical contacts will cause the BRX MPU input to see more
edges than intended.
•
Direct connection to TTL, line driver or differential encoders: A BRX MPU input cannot
accept these low voltage inputs directly. (Consider using the FC-ISO-C signal conditioner to be able
to input these signal types.)
•

Absolute encoders are not suitable for use with the high speed inputs of the BRX MPU.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1 BRX Wiring Examples: High-Speed Inputs
Quadrature Encoder Input
2
Do-more! BRX Open-Collector Output
BRX MPU
Input
(Sinking) Encoder Wiring
Example
3
4
5
Sinking
6
Encoder
7
8
9
10
Do-more! BRX Push-Pull Totem Pole
11
BRX MPUExample
Input
(Sourcing) Encoder Wiring
12
13
14
Sourcing
A
Encoder
15
B
A
Z
B
C
9-30 VDC
D
1C X0 X1 X2 X3 X4

A
B
Z

9-30 VDC

1C X0 X1 X2 X3 X4

12-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

BRX Wiring Examples: High-speed Inputs, continued
NPN/PNP Input
Example
Do-more!
BRX PNP/NPN Wiring Example

1C X0 X1 X2 X3 2C X4 X5 X6 X7

Sourcing

Signal

Sinking

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX Wiring Examples: High-speed Inputs, continued

Do-more!
BRX
Quadrature
Encoder Wiring Example
Differential
Line Driver
Encoder
Input
BRX MPU Input
Differential Line
Driver Encoder
A
A
B
B
Z
Z

FC-ISO-C
+Ai

nC X0 X1 X2 X3 X4

-Ai
+Bi
-Bi
+Zi
-Zi
COM
COM
V+
0V
Ao

ISOLATION
BOUNDARY

Ao
Bo
Bo
Zo
Zo
0V
0V

FC-ISO-C

FC-ISO-C Dipswitch Settings

DIP Switch 1
Input DIP 1 2
Setup
1 1

3 4 5 6 7
1 0 0 0 0

8
0

12345678
DIP
ON↓

DIP Switches

DIP Switch 2
Output DIP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setup
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

12345678
DIP
ON↓

DIP Switches

12-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

BRX Wiring Examples: High-speed Outputs
SureServo Driver
WiringBRX
Example
Do-more!
Servo Drive Wiring Example
VDD
PULL HI
PULSE
/PULSE
SIGN
/SIGN
COM-

VDD
PULL HI
PULSE
/PULSE
SIGN
/SIGN
COM-

Sure Servo Drive wired
to Sinking Outputs

1kΩ
1kΩ

Sure Servo Drive wired
to Sourcing Outputs
1C Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

Note:
VDD = 24VDC
1kΩ resistor is needed for
servo to handle this voltage.

1C Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

1kΩ resistors are not needed
if a 5VDC source is used.

NOTE:
must consult
SureServo
documentation
specific
Note: Customer
mustCustomer
consult SureServo
documentation
for specific
details on thefor
servo
drive.

details on the servo drive.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1 BRX Wiring Examples: High-Speed Outputs, continued
Stepper Drive Output
Do-more!
Do-more!
BRX Stepper
BRX Stepper
Drive Output
Drive Output
Wiring Example
Wiring Example
2
3
4
StepperStepper
Drive Drive
StepperStepper
Drive Drive
5–36 VDC
5
SinkingSinking
Sourcing
Sourcing
5–36 VDC
6
7
8
BRX MPU Output
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
DIR DIR +
STEP STEP +

DIR DIR +
STEP STEP +

1C Y0 Y1 Y2
1C Y3
Y0 1C
Y1 Y0
Y2 Y1
Y3 Y2
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
1C Y3

12-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

DIR DIR +
STEP STEP +

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

BRX Wiring Examples: High-speed Outputs, continued
BRX MPU to Stepper/Servo Drive Output
Detailed output wiring example between a BRX MPU and the SureStep Stepping System
Detailed Output Wiring Example between a BRX MPU
components.
and the SureStep Stepping System components
Step Motor
Power Supply
STP-PWR-xxxx

AC Power

120/240
VAC

GND
L2
L1

5 VDC xx VDC

–
+
0 VDC

–
+

Step Motor Drive
STP-DRV-xxxx

EN–
EN+

VDC+
VDC–

Cable Color Code
Term Wire Pin #
A+
Red
1
A– White
2
B+ Green 3
B– Black
4

DIR+
STEP–

A–

STEP+

Y0
+5 VDC

B–

12" Motor Pigtail
with Connector
Connector

Step Motor
STP-MTR(H)-xxxxx

DIR–

A+
B+

N/C
N/C

Front View

Extension Cable
with Connector
STP-EXT(H)-020

1C Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

BRX MPU
Sinking
Sinking Output

Wiring Diagram for a BRX MPU Using the SureStep Stepping System Components.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AC Power

120/240
VAC

GND
L2
L1

–

5 VDC xx VDC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

+
0 VDC

–
+

Step Motor Drive
STP-DRV-xxxx

EN–
EN+

Cable Color Code
Term Wire Pin #
A+
Red
1
A– White
2
B+ Green 3
B– Black
4

DIR–

VDC–

DIR+

A+

STEP–

A–

STEP+

B+

Y1
Y0
+5 VDC

B–

12" Motor Pigtail
with Connector
Connector

Step Motor
STP-MTR(H)-xxxxx

VDC+

N/C
N/C

Extension Cable
with Connector
STP-EXT(H)-020

Front View

1C Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

BRX MPU
Sourcing
Sourcing Output

Wiring Diagram for a BRX MPU Using SureStep Stepping System Components.

12-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Available High-Speed Input and Output Features
The following High-Speed input and output features are available on the BRX Do-more!
MPUs. Reference the specific numbered topic listed below for directions on configuring that
particular feature.
1.

Input Filters

Interrupt Setup
a. Setup Input Interrupts
b. Setup Timer Interrupts
c. Setup Match Register Interrupts
d. Interrupt Instructions

High-Speed I/O (Counters, Timers, Pulse outputs, PWM and Table driven outputs)
a. Counters
b. Timers
– Interval Scaling
c. Axis/Pulse Outputs
d. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
e. Table Driven Outputs
– Preset Tables
– Programmable Limit Switch (PLS)

To access all of the High-Speed input and output setup, go to Do-more! Designer menu PLC>System Configuration:

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

1. Input Filters
In the System Configuration window, select (a) the BRX Onboard I/O option under the
Configuration Entries panel.

The on-board discrete inputs on all of the BRX hardware platforms can be configured to use
(b) input filtering. Filters are typically used on inputs that are operating in electrically noisy
environments to remove “false positives”. This is accomplished by requiring the input signal
remain above the input hardware threshold level longer than the filter time so the CPU will see
that input as ON. Once ON, it must be OFF for more than the filter time before the CPU
will see that input as OFF.
ON
Input Signal
OFF

Filter
Time

ON
Input sent
to the CPU
OFF

12-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Filter
Time

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
Clicking on (b) Filters... opens the Setup Discrete Input Response Times dialog box (below).

Choose Preferred Filter Scale – Sets format for all of the Inputs values entered in the form.
NOTE: Be sure to select the Filter Scale before entering values in fields. If you change the Preferred Filter
Scale after entering values then any values that are not valid in that scale will be set to 0.

The Filter Scale can be specified in the following formats:
•

A frequency in the range of 0–250000 Hz.

•
A time value in milliseconds in the range of 0–112, microseconds in the range of 0 - 111848, or
nanoseconds in the range of 0–111848093.
•

The number of 13.33 nanosecond clocks in the range of 0–8388607.

An input filter value of 0 will use the default filter value of 1 microsecond. Selecting one format
to specify the filter value will automatically show the filter value in the other two formats.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

2. Interrupt Setup
In the System Configuration window, select (a) the BRX Onboard I/O option under the
Configuration Entries panel.

Clicking on (b) Interrupts... opens the Setup Interrupt Triggers dialog box (below).
A PLC normally reads inputs at the top of the
scan and writes outputs at the bottom of the scan.
The ladder logic is solved after the inputs are read
and after the ladder is solved the outputs are
written. Because the PLC can change the amount
of work it does from scan to scan, the PLC scan
time will also change accordingly, which will
directly affect how frequently inputs will be read
and outputs will be written. Interrupts are a
method of triggering an action or code segment
immediately after the qualifying condition(s)
becomes true, regardless of variations in the
PLC scan time. In the BRX PLC, this can be
accomplished by using hardware (a) Input Events,
(b) Timers or (c) Match Registers, (matching a
register count). There are 12 Interrupt triggers
available: 4 Input Interrupts, 4 Timer Interrupts
and 4 Match Register Interrupts.
Click on (d) Event 1... to bring up the Setup Input Event dialog box.

12-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

2a. Setup Input Interrupts:
Input Interrupts can be used to respond to transitions of discrete inputs that occur during a
PLC scan. Input Interrupts can be triggered in several different ways:
•

Any (a) of the on-board discrete inputs

•

Single Input (b, dropdown menu at right) (OR Rising Edge, OR Falling Edge or OR Either )

•

Combinations of Inputs (c, dropdown menu at right) (AND High Level or AND Low Level)

Next, choose to assign the input event to (d) an existing Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) or
(e) create a new ISR.
For this exercise we will click on (e, above) to create a new ISR (a, below) and enter a name for
the ISR, (b) click the Create button.

Dropdown Menu
Interrupt Selections

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Input Interrupt Example 1
In the configuration below (a) of ISR_1, if (b) EITHER Input 0 or Input 1 goes from false to
true, the Interrupt Service Routine ISR_1 will run.

Input Interrupt Example 2
In the configuration below of (a) ISR_1, Input 0 must be true and when (b) Input 1 goes from
false to true, the Interrupt Service Routine ISR_1 will run.

12-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

2b. Setup Timer Interrupts
Timer Interrupts use a hardware
timer to run an Interrupt Service
Routine in situations where you
need an action to occur at regular
intervals that are not affected by
variations in the PLC scan time.
This can be situations that require
actions to occur at exact repeating
intervals (Recurrent), or actions
that occur after a precise amount of
delay time (One Shot).

Timer Interrupts are fairly simple
to setup. There are two modes:
One Shot or Recurrent. The
Timer Duration is in microseconds
resolution. As with the Input
Interrupt setup, an existing (a)
ISR can be specified or a new one
can be created from this dialog by
clicking on (b) Create ISR button.
One Shot – The ISR will run only
once at the time period specified
after putting the PLC into Run.
In order for this Interrupt to
run again, the PLC will need to
transition from Stop/Program
to Run or you can use the (c)
INTCONFIG instruction in ladder logic to trigger it again. The INTCONFIG instruction is
very useful and will be discussed in more detail later.
Recurrent – the ISR will run continuously at the time period specified after putting the PLC
in Run mode or it can be controlled (turned on or off ) by using the INTCONFIG instruction.
NOTE: The Timer Interrupt will be triggered when the PLC goes from Stop/Program mode to Run mode. To
stop this from taking place, you can use the ISRname.Inhibit bit to disable the ISR from triggering when the
PLC first goes into Run mode.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

2c. Setup Match Register

The Match Register function allows you to compare one of the hardware based registers to a
value. When that condition is met, the specified Interrupt Service Routine will run. As with
the other Interrupt functions, you can pick from a previously created ISR or you can create
one from this dialog (a).
(b) ...when – specifies which of the High-Speed input or output locations to use in the
comparison.
Choose from the following:
High-Speed Ctr / Tmr 1 Accumulator
High-Speed Ctr / Tmr 2 Accumulator
High-Speed Ctr / Tmr 3 Accumulator
Pulse Output 1 Position
Pulse Output 2 Position
Pulse Output 3 Position
(c) ...is – specifies the math operator to use when performing the comparison.
Choose from the following:
Equal To
Not Equal To
Greater Than
Greater Than or Equal To
Less Than
Less Than or Equal To

12-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
(d) ...this value - specifies the 32-bit signed decimal constant value to compare to the register
contents. This can be any constant value between -2147483648 and 2147483647.
The specified ISR will run once when the operand condition is met. For example: In the case
of Greater than, the ISR will run when the High-Speed Ctr/Tmr or Pulse Output position is
above the set point. It will not run again until the value has gone below the set point and then
back above it again. The same is true for Not Equal to - the ISR will run the very first time
after going into Run Mode if the High-Speed Ctr/Tmr or Pulse Output position is not equal
to the set point. It will not run again until the High-Speed Ctr/Tmr or Pulse Output position
becomes equal to the set point and then moves off of that value.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

2d. Interrupt instructions
There are four Interrupt instructions:
•

INTCONFIG (Configure Interrupt)

•

INTDECONFIG (Deconfigure Interrupt)

•

INTSUSPEND (Suspend Interrupts)

•

INTRESUME (Resume Interrupts)

NOTE: If you are doing ISRs, you should use one or more of the Immediate Output instructions:
OUTI (Out Immediate)
SETI (Set Immediate)
RSTI (Reset Immediate).
These will help get a faster response from a Y in the ISRs.

A brief explanation of the use of these instructions will be given here. For full details on these
instructions, refer to the help file.
For each instruction, there is an Input Leg action selection: Power flow enabled or Edge
triggered. A Power flow enabled will lock the instruction on. So if an INTCONFIG instruction
was configured as Power flow enabled, the rung became true and an INTDECONFIG
instruction was enabled, the Interrupts would still occur. Choosing Edge triggered will invoke
the action once and other instructions may change the current behavior.
NOTE: If an Interrupt Trigger was created using the Interrupt Triggers setup in System Configuration, be
aware that these instructions DO NOT change that configuration. The Interrupt Trigger configuration will
return each time the BRX CPU transitions from PROGRAM to RUN mode.

INTCONFIG

12-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
The INTCONFIG instruction performs the
same Interrupt setup located within the System
Configuration. The instruction allows you to
dynamically change the setup in applications where
this may be required. One example is to calculate
a Match Register value in Ladder Logic using the
MATH instruction to D100, then use D100 in an
INTCONFIG. If the INTDECONFIG instruction
is used to disable Interrupts, this instruction is
required to re-enable them.

INTDECONFIG
This instruction disables the Interrupt(s) selected. Individual Interrupts may be selected as
well as choosing to disable all of them. To re-enable Interrupts, the PLC must transition
from Program to Run or the INTCONFIG instruction must be used. To temporarily disable
Interrupts, use the INTSUSPEND instruction.

INTSUSPEND
The INTSUSPEND instruction temporarily
suspends the interrupts and does not allow the ISRs
to run. To enable the interrupts to function again, use
the INTRESUME instruction. When interrupts are
suspended using the INTSUSPEND instruction and
one or more triggers take place, only one iteration of
the interrupt will be available to be triggered after it is
no longer suspended.

INTRESUME
The INTRESUME instruction resumes the normal
processing of suspended interrupts. When the
INTRESUME instruction is enabled, if one or more
than one trigger took place while suspended, only one
will be triggered when it resumes.
Clear any Pending interrupts: When enabled, it
resets the trigger that took place while suspended.
For example, if one or more triggers take place while
suspended and the Clear any Pending Interrupts was not enabled, when interrupts are resumed,
it will immediately execute the interrupt routine one time. If, however, the Clear any Pending
Interrupts was enabled, any trigger that took place while suspended would be reset and when
interrupts resume, it would start the normal processing of the interrupts.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Interrupt Service Routines
Only a brief explanation will be given of the Interrupt Service Routine. This topic is defined
in the help file as well.
When an Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) is created, a structure is created. The members of
the structure are as follows:
•

.ExecutionTime – Time, in microseconds, it took to run the ISR the last time it ran.

•
.HasRun – Should be on if the ISR has run at least once since the last Program to Run
transition.
•
.Inhibit – Enabling this bit will prevent the ISR from running. The actions do NOT get
queued when this bit is enabled and the hardware interrupt becomes true for this ISR.
•
.Latency – Time in microseconds elapsed between when the hardware Interrupt occurred and
when the ISR execution began.
•
.RunCounter – Indicates how many times the ISR has run since the past Program to Run
transition.

These structure members may be helpful in troubleshooting the process when using Interrupts.

12-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

3. High-Speed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

(a) Counters
(b) Timers
(c) Axis/Pulse Outputs
(d) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Outputs
(e) Table Driven Outputs

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-23

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

3a. Counters

A structure is created when this function is used. The name of the structure is configurable
in the Device Name field. For the description of this function we will use the default name
HsCtrTmr1.
(a) The BRX PLC allows for either 3 High-Speed Counters or 3 High-Speed Timers. Counters may be
used in 5 different configurations with different options for the “Edge” to count:
Up Counter (Rising Edge, Trailing Edge or Both): Uses a single input and increments the
count in the $HsCtrTmr1.Acc register.
Down Counter (Rising Edge, Trailing Edge or Both): Uses a single input and decrements the
count in the $HsCtrTmr1.Acc register.
Quad Counter (1X, 2X or 4X): Uses 2 inputs and counts in both positive and negative
directions based upon which of the inputs is ‘leading’.
Bidirectional Counter: Uses 2 inputs. The first input is the count input. The second input
determines whether the count is incrementing (when input is low) or decrementing (when
input is high).
Up/Down Counter: Uses 2 inputs. The first input increments the count. The second input
decrements the count.
(b) Initial Reset Value: The $HsCtrTmr1.Acc register will be loaded with the value configured in this
field when the Reset Input goes true.
(c) Reset Input: When this condition is met, the $HsCtrTmr1.Acc register will be loaded with the value
specified in the (b) Initial Reset Value field. The Input can be configured to indicate a true condition
when the Rising Edge occurs, the Falling Edge, High Level or Low Level.
(d) Enable Capture Input: When this condition is met AND when $HsCtrTmr1.EnableCapture is

12-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
true, the current value that is in the $HsCtrTmr1.Acc register will be loaded into the $HsCtrTmr1.
CapturedValue register. When this occurs, the structure member, $HsCtrTmr1.CountCaptured will be
true. To capture again, the $HsCtrTmr1.EnableCapture bit must be turned off and back on. This Input
can be configured to indicate a true condition on Rising Edge or Falling Edge.
(e) Inhibit Input: When this condition is met, the $HsCtrTmr1.Acc register will cease to increment
or decrement. The Input can be configured to indicate a true condition on High Level or Low Level.

Counter Scaling
Position
Configure the Min Raw, Max Raw, Min Scaled and Max Scaled values for a linear interpolated
result. That result will be placed in the
$HsCtrTmr1 structure member $HsCtrTmr1.
ScaledValue .

Rate
The scaling feature allows you to convert the raw
input pulse count to engineering units
more appropriate to the process that
the PLC is running. The scaled value
will be placed in the structure member:
$HsCtrTmr1.ScaledValue.
NOTE: The raw value is used for Match
Register functionality. However, the Preset
Command table and PLS table can use the
scaled value.

Rate scaling is a measurement of distance
over time. The following parameters are
used in calculating the .ScaledValue:
(a) Raw Counts / Unit: The raw
count value that would comprise
1 scaled unit value. So for
calculated RPMs of an encoder,
this might be the Pulses Per Revolution of the encoder.
(b) Unit Time Base: A time base for the scaled unit value. In the example of calculating
RPMs, this value would be units per minute.
(c) Scale Offset: Simply a value added to the resulting .ScaledValue.
(d) Calc Interval: Specifies how often (in milliseconds) the rate calculation is performed. The
higher the value, the lower the impact on performance to the system. The calculation should
be performed no faster than the process requires. If the application generates very slow pulse
signals, consider using the Interval Scaling, discussed later in this chapter.
(e) Data Filter: Entering a value into this field will apply a time constant filter to a rolling
average resulting in a ‘smoother’ value.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

3b. Timers
There are 2 types (a) of High-Speed Timers for
the BRX PLC: Edge Timer (1 Input) and Dual
Edge Timer (2 Inputs).
Edge Timer:
With the Edge Timer,
measurements can be taken in 4 possible ways:
•
From rising edge of one pulse to the rising
edge of the next pulse
•
From rising edge to falling edge of the same
pulse
•
From falling edge of one pulse to the rising
edge of the next pulse
•
From falling edge of one pulse to the falling
edge of the next pulse

Dual Edge Timer: With the Dual Edge Timer, measurements can be taken in 4 possible ways:
•

From the rising edge of input 1 to the rising edge of the subsequent pulse of Input 2

•

From the rising edge of input 1 to the falling edge of the subsequent pulse of Input 2

•

From the falling edge of input 1 to the rising edge of the subsequent pulse of Input 2

•

From the falling edge of input 1 to the falling edge of the subsequent pulse of Input 2

When a High-Speed Timer is configured, a structure is created. To use the timer, the
$HsCtrTmr1.EnableTimer bit must be enabled. The BRX PLC will then look for the first
pulse. When the first pulse is read, the timer begins. The current time value (in microseconds)
can be seen in the $HsCtrTmr1.Acc register. When the second pulse has been read, the time
value is moved into the $HsCtrTmr1.LastTime register and the timer stops. To run again,
disable the $HsCtrTmr1.EnableTimer bit and re-enable. There are 2 other bits to indicate the
state that the timer is in. The $HsCtrTmr1.TimerStarted indicates that the timer is active. The
$HsCtrTmr1.TimerComplete bit indicates that the timer has completed.
Enable Free Run: When the (b) Enable Free Run checkbox is selected, the timer will continue
on subsequent pulses and the $HsCtrTmr1.EnableTimer bit only needs to be enabled once and
not re-enabled for subsequent timer measurements.
NOTE: The timer will ‘free run’ and will not stop in between pulses. The BRX PLC is just grabbing snapshots
of the configured pulse timing.

Enable Timeout: The Enable Timeout (c) feature gives an indication that the first pulse
has been received but the second has not been received within the time period specified (in
microseconds). When the timeout occurs, it will not successfully complete the timer even
though the second pulse may eventually arrive. The $HsCtrTmr1.EnableTimer bit must be
disabled and re-enabled.

12-26

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Interval Scaling
The Scaling Interval feature (right) allows
you to convert the raw input pulse count
to engineering units more appropriate to
the process that the PLC is running. The
scaled value will be placed in the structure
member: $HsCtrTmr1.ScaledValue.
NOTE: The raw value is used for Match Register
functionality. However, the Preset Command
table and PLS table can use the scaled value.

Interval scaling measures the time between
pulses to calculate the frequency. The
result is a measurement of unit movement
over time. The following parameters are
used in calculating the .ScaledValue:
Raw Counts / Unit: This is the raw count value that would comprise 1 scaled unit value. So for
calculated RPMs of an encoder, this might be the Pulses Per Revolution of the encoder.
Unit Time Base: This is the time base for the scaled unit value. In the example of calculating
RPMs, this value would be units per minute.
Scale Offset: This is simply a value added to the resulting .ScaledValue.
Data Filter: Entering a value into this field will apply a time constant filter to a rolling average
resulting in a ‘smoother’ value.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

3c. Axis/Pulse Outputs
The Axis/Pulse Output Configuration window
allows you to specify the type of pulse train
(mode) to output as well as the physical output
points to use for this Axis. The software will
indicate and warn if there are conflicts specified
for the output points selected in this or other axis
configurations.
There are four Pulse Output Modes:
1. Virtual (a): Axis can execute profiles for
master/slave operations with other axes, or can
trigger Table Driven Outputs or Match Register
interrupts, but does not drive physical I/O.
NOTE: A Virtual axis will not generate pulses to
physical outputs of the PLC. Convenient for testing.

2. Step/Direction (b): The output specified for
Function Output 1 will pulse at the speed and/or amount (Position) specified. The output specified
for Function Output 2 will be low for a positive position value move or high for a negative position
value move.
3. CW/CCW (c): The output specified for “Function Output 1” will pulse at the speed and/or
amount (Position) specified when the Position value is positive. The output specified for Function
Output 2 will pulse at the speed and/or amount (Position) specified when the Position value is negative.
4. Quadrature (d): In Quadrature mode, both outputs specified will pulse at the speed and/or
amount (Position) specified in 4X fashion (both leading and trailing edges are considered a pulse). If
the position value specified is a positive value, the output specified for Function Output 1 will lead. If
the position value specified is a negative value, the output specified for Function Output 2 will lead.

12-28

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

3c. Axis/Pulse Outputs, continued
When an Axis is created, a structure is available for use in control and monitoring. Each
member takes the form of $Axisn.member, where “n” is the Axis number (0 to 3) and “member”
is the element word or bit referenced. Each member and an explanation of that structure are
listed below.
.TargetVelocity (Signed DWord): When using an AXVEL instruction, this is the target Velocity (When
using an AXPOSTRAP or AXPOSSCRV instruction, the velocity configured in the AXCONFIG
instruction is the velocity that is used).
.TargetPosition (Signed DWord, Read Only): This is the target position that has been configured
successfully by an AXPOSTRAP or AXPOSSCRV instruction.
.CurrentVelocity (Signed DWord, Read Only): This is velocity that the axis is currently running at.
.CurrentPosition (Signed DWord, Read Only): This is the pulse count where the Axis is currently
located.
.FollowingError (Signed DWord, Read Only): When an Axis is configured to use encoder feedback as
the Axis position, the FollowingError is the difference between the output pulse count (TargetPosition)
and the encoder input value (Current Position). This value is always reported in pulse counts, not in
encoder count values.
.MstSlvCoordError (Signed DWord, Read Only): This error is the difference between the position of
the Master Axis and the projected location of the Slave Axis when using the AXGEAR, AXFOLLOW
and AXCAM instruction.
.Suspend (Bit): Enabling the Suspend bit will halt the axis motion where it is at (honoring the accel
and decel parameters). Disabling the bit will resume the axis motion.
.MasterEnable (Bit): This must be enabled for an axis instruction to function. It gets enabled
automatically after the AXCONFIG has completed successfully.
.Configured (Bit, Read Only): This bit is true when the axis has been successfully configured by the
AXCONFIG instruction.
.Active (Bit, Read Only): This bit is true when the axis is in motion (pulses are being generated).
.AtVelocity (Bit, Read Only): This bit is true when the axis is generating the pulses at the frequency
specified by an AXPOSTRAP or AXPOSSCRV , an AXVEL or other axis instructions (TargetVelocity
= CurrentVelocity).
.AtPosition (Bit, Read Only): This bit is true when the position specified by an AXPOSTRAP or
AXPOSSCRV has been achieved (TargetPosition = CurrentPosition).
.ScriptBusy (Bit, Read Only): Reserved
.Fault (Bit, Read Only):
Will be SET when either Fault Limit for an Axis
is ON, or when the Axis’ MasterEnable has been manually turned OFF.
A Reset Axis Limit Fault (AXRSTFAULT) or an Axis Configuration (AXCONFIG) instruction must
be executed to clear the Fault in the Axis before the Axis will operate again.

3d. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
The PWM function has no associated instructions. In the “PWM Output Configuration”,

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
specify the output to control. Once this function has been configured, a structure is created.
The function is used by manipulating the members of that structure. The structure members
are defined below:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

.EnableOutput (Bit): Set this bit ON to generate output pulses, set the bit OFF to stop generating
output pulses.
.PeriodScale (Bit): This specifies the time base for the output
pulses. OFF = Microseconds (μs), ON = Milliseconds (mS).
.Period (Unsigned Word): Specifies the amount of time (in
microseconds or milliseconds) for one complete pulse. This
can be any positive constant value from 0–65535.
NOTE: Remember, this value is NOT a frequency specified in
Hz, this is the duration (milliseconds or microseconds) of one
pulse. Because Frequency and Period are reciprocals of each
other, the following formulas can be used to convert a value
specified in Hz to a Period value in milliseconds or microseconds:
Converting Hz to millisecond period = (1/ Hz) * 1000.
For example: 60Hz = (1 / 60) * 1000 = 17 milliseconds.
Converting Hz to microsecond period = (1/ Hz) * 1000000. For
example: 60Hz = (1 / 60) * 1000000 = 16667 microseconds.

.DutyCycle (Real): The DutyCycle determines the percentage
of time that the output is high versus low. 10% Duty Cycle
would mean that the output is high for 10% of the Period (or
cycle) and low for 90% of the Period. This can be any Real
value between 0.0 and 100.0.

12-30

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

3e. Table Driven Outputs
Table Driven Outputs are a method to control outputs
at High-Speed based upon set points from a High-Speed
counter, timer or axis position. Typically, controlling outputs
from a set point in ladder would incur ‘jitter’ delays from
one scan to the next. When controlling outputs at HighSpeed, the ladder scan variation may produce undesired
changes in response from one scan to the next. Using table
driven outputs will eliminate this ladder scan variation.
There are 2 methods of controlling table driven outputs:
Preset Tables or Programmable Limit Switch (PLS). The
TDOPRESET instruction is used for Preset Tables and the
TDOPLS instruction is used for PLS.

Preset Tables
Preset Tables will always run in order from first to last. This
means that it must always be known whether the count will
increment or decrement and at what point it will do this.
If unexpected direction changes in count may occur, the
Programmable Limit Switch function may be a better choice
for that application.
As mentioned above, the table will always run from first (top
of table) to last (bottom of table). In order to restart the table from the top, the Reset Table &
Acc function should be used as one of the steps in the table.
There are 6 Preset functions to choose from in the table:
Set: This function will turn the Table Driven Output ON. A Reset must be used to turn the output
OFF.
Reset: This function will turn the Table Driven Output OFF.
Pulse ON: This function will turn the Table Driven Output ON for the specified “Pulse Time” (in
microseconds). At the end of the specified Pulse Time, the output will turn OFF.
Pulse OFF: If the output is ON, this function will turn the Table Driven Output OFF for the specified
“Pulse Time” (in microseconds). At the end of the specified Pulse Time, the output will return to ON.
Toggle: This function will set the Table Driven Output to the opposite state from what it is currently
at. If the output was ON, this function will turn it OFF. If the output was OFF, this function will
turn it ON.
Reset Table & Acc: Performs a reset of the Master Register which sets its current count value to the
Initial Reset Value specified in the Timer/Counter Function setup, and sets the current step in the
Preset Table to Step 0.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

3e. Table Driven Outputs, continued
When a Preset Table is configured, a structure becomes available for use in control and
monitoring. The members of the structure are as follows:
.EnableOutput (Bit): This Bit is automatically set ON when the Preset Table is first loaded, and
automatically turned OFF when the Table Driven Output is deconfigured. The ladder logic program
can manually turn this Bit OFF to stop the table from writing it’s state data to the Table Driven Output
without having to use the TDODECFG instruction. While this bit is ON, the Preset Table updates
the Table Driven Output.
.OutputState (Bit, Read Only): This bit is ON when the Table Driven Output is ON.
.StepNumber (Signed Byte): The zero-based step number from the table that is currently active. A step
number of -1 indicates the Preset Table is either in Level Reset or is unconfigured.
.InputValOffset (Signed DWord): The current count value from the Master Register can be adjusted
by a fixed amount before the comparison in the step is performed by entering that offset value here.
.ResetEdge (Bit): Turn this Bit ON to reset the Preset Table to Step 0, the PLC will automatically turn
this bit back off.
.ResetLevel (Bit): Turn this Bit ON to reset the Preset Table to Step 0. Leaving the Bit ON will hold
the Table in Reset until this Bit is turned OFF.

For more information on using the TDOPRESET instruction and the Preset Table function,
reference the help file.

Programmable Limit Switch (PLS)
Unlike the Preset Table, the PLS (Programmable Limit Switch) will act upon the output
whenever the High-Speed I/O Source Register is within the configured entry points no matter
the direction it may have entered the range specified.
The entry requires specifying the low range (ON when Greater Than or Equal to) and high
range (and Less Than) fields.
The On when Greater than or equal to field must always be a lower value than the and Less
Than field.
Multiple entries can be configured to control the output at different ranges but they cannot
overlap each other.
The PLS can control the output so that its default state is ON and the entries configured will
turn the output OFF within those ranges.

12-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

3e. Table Driven Outputs, continued
The same structure that is used for the Preset Table is used for the PLS Table with a few minor
changes in behavior. The explanations are given below:
.EnableOutput (Bit): This Bit is automatically set ON when the PLS Table is first loaded, and
automatically turned OFF when the Table Driven Output is deconfigured. The ladder logic program
can manually turn this Bit OFF to stop the table from writing it’s state data to the Table Driven Output
without having to use a TDODECFG instruction. If this Bit is ON the PLS Table will update the
Table Driven Output.
.OutputState (Bit, Read Only): This bit is true when the Table Driven Output being controlled by
the PLS is currently true.
.StepNumber (Signed Byte): The zero-based step number from the table that is currently active. A
step number of -1 indicates the PLS Table is between ON positions or is unconfigured.
.InputValOffset (Signed DWord): The current count value from the Master Register can be adjusted
by a fixed amount before the comparison in the step is performed by entering that offset value here.
.ResetEdge and .ResetLevel: Not used with the PLS function.

For more information on using the TDOPLS and PLS function, reference the Help file.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX High-Speed Examples
This section includes brief descriptions of how to implement some common motion control
solutions. The information provided should give the user a good understanding of what basic
steps are required to implement the desired function.
Later in the chapter, we will present detailed examples that will guide you step by step, on how
to read a quadrature encoder value and how to generate a trapezoid profile using High-Speed
outputs.

Get Position Using an Encoder
To read the position of an encoder, follow these basic steps in the Do-more! Designer software:
1.

From the Dashboard page – Select High-Speed I/O.

Counter/Timer Functions – Select Function 1.

Select Counter – Configure the counter for Quad Counter and select X0 and X1 as your inputs.

Optional – Setup scaling or enable rotary mode.

Download the configuration to the BRX CPU and set it to RUN.

6. While connected with the CPU, verify that the encoder counts are appearing in a DataView
window. Use the address $HsCtrTmr1.acc to monitor the accumulated encoder pulses.

Get Rate Using an Encoder
To read the rate of an encoder, follow these basic steps in the Do-more! Designer software:
1.

From the Dashboard page – Select High-Speed I/O.

Counter/Timer Functions – Select Function 1.

Select Counter – Configure the counter for Quad Counter and select X0 and X1 as your inputs.

Enable Scaling – Select Rate.

Enter the conversion parameters.

Download the configuration and verify the CPU is in RUN mode.

7. While connected with the CPU, verify the encoder rate values are appearing in a DataView
window. Use the address $HsCtrTmr1.scaledvalue to monitor the rate value.

Measure Timing Between Pulse Edges
To measure the time between edges of a pulse, follow these basic steps in the Do-more! Designer
software:
1.

From the Dashboard page – Select High-Speed I/O.

Counter/Timer Functions – Select Function 2.

3. Select Timer – Keep the default device name, @HsCtrTmr2. Select Edge Timer function. For
this test, use one of the encoder inputs, i.e. X0. Select appropriate options (Free-run is suggested for
testing since it does not require any ladder programming to function).

12-34

Optionally, setup scaling if needed.

Download the configuration and verify the CPU is in RUN mode.

While connected with the CPU, verify that the pulse measurements are showing up in a DataView

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
window. Use the address $HsCtrTmr2.LastTime to monitor the previous amount of time between
pulses.

Pulse Train Output – Move to a Specific Position
The following steps will explain what is needed for the BRX CPU to prompt a stepper motor,
for example, to move an absolute number of steps:
1.

From the Dashboard page – Select High-Speed I/O.

Axis/Pulse Outputs – Select Axis 1.

3. Axis 1 Configuration – Keep the default Device name, @Axis1. Select Pulse Output. Select
the Output Type required by your controller. For this example, we are using Step/Direction with a
SureStep stepper drive. Select Y0 for Step and Y1 for Direction.
4.

Download the configuration to the CPU.

5. AXCONFIG ladder rung – Configure the AXCONFIG instruction for Device
@AXIS1. Use the defaults for all the fields. The move instructions use the Accel/Decel and Min/Max
frequencies configured in this instruction.
6. AXPOSTRAP ladder rung – Configure the AXPOSTRAP for Device @Axis1. For Move Type,
select Single Move and Power Flow Enabled. For Target Type, select Relative and for Position Value
use the default of 1000. For Linear vs Rotary, select Linear.
7.

Download program and verify the CPU is in RUN mode.

8. Trigger the AXCONFIG ladder rung – When the AXCONFIG instruction is triggered, the
MasterEnable and the EnableOutput heap items will be ON. The success bit will be ON.
9. Turn on the AXPOSTRAP ladder rung – Every time the rung is powered on and left on, the
instruction will send out a pulse train that matches the target position value. The CurrentPosition will
increase from 0 to 1000 the first time the rung is turned on. The target position will display 1000.
AtPosition turns on when the target position is reached. If you turn the rung off and back on, the
CurrentPosition will increase from 1000 to 2000.
10. A detailed example using the AXPOSTRAP will be provided later in this chapter. For detailed
information of the instructions, review the Do-more! Designer Help topics.

Pulse Train Output – To Home an Output
The following steps will explain what is needed for the BRX CPU to prompt a stepper motor,
for example, to find a Home position:
1.

From the Dashboard page – Select High-Speed I/O.

Axis/Pulse Outputs – Select Axis 1.

Download the configuration to the CPU.

AXHOME ladder rung – Configure the AXHOME for Device @Axis1. For this example, we

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-35

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

use X2 as our Discrete Input Limit 1. Enter a value for Homing Velocity. Select the Discrete input
and event type. Select the Homing Termination. For this example, we will use Decelerate to 0 after
reaching input limit 1 and zero out the position value when Home is reached. Edge-triggered is
selected for the input leg.
7.

Download program and verify the CPU is in RUN mode.

8. Trigger the AXCONFIG ladder rung – When the AXCONFIG instruction is triggered, the
MasterEnable and the EnableOutput heap items will be ON. The AXCONFIG success bit will be
ON.
9. Trigger the AXHOME ladder rung – Turning on the input to the AXHOME rung, will trigger
the HOME move. The input does not have to remain on for the HOME move to continue when the
edge-triggered input is selected. Pulse outputs will be generated while the discrete input limit 1 is not
reached. Once the discrete input limit 1 is reached, the pulse output will decelerate to 0, as configured
for this example. During the HOME move, the CurrentPosition will increase. Once the HOME
position is reached, the CurrentPosition is reset to 0.

Output Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Pulses
To generate PWM outputs, follow these basic steps:
1.

From the Dashboard page – Select High-Speed I/O.

PWM Outputs – Select PWM 1.

3. PWM 1 Configuration – Enable PWM. Keep the default Device name, @PWMOut1. Select
output Y2, for example.
4. Download the program (no ladder instructions need to be added for this test) and verify the CPU
is in Run.
5. Use Data View to control the PWM 1 output. Use heap items .EnableOutput, .PeriodScale,
.Period and .DutyCycle.
6. $PWMOut1.DutyCycle – Specifies the percentage of one period where the output is ON, during
the remaining portion the output will be OFF. This can be any Real value between 0.0 and 100.0.
7. $PWMOut1.PeriodScale – Selects the time base for the output pulses, OFF = microseconds (μs),
ON = milliseconds (ms).
8. $PWMOut1.Period – Specifies the amount of time (in microseconds or milliseconds) for one
complete pulse. This can be any positive constant value from 0–65535.
NOTE: Remember, this value is NOT a frequency specified in Hz, this is the duration (in microseconds or
milliseconds) of one pulse. Because Frequency and Period are reciprocals of each other, the following
formulas can be used to convert a value specified in Hz to a Period value in milliseconds or microseconds:
a. Converting Hz to millisecond period = (1/ Hz) * 1000. For example: 60Hz = (1 / 60) * 1000 = 17 milliseconds.
b. Converting Hz to microsecond period = (1/ Hz) * 1000000. For example: 60Hz = (1 / 60) * 1000000 =
16667 microseconds.

9. $PWMOut1.EnableOutput - Set this ON to generate output pulses, set OFF to stop generating
output pulses.

Table Driven Output using a Preset Table
1. Configure a High-Speed input to read encoder values. See section on “Get Position using an
Encoder”.
2.

12-36

From the Dashboard page – Select High-Speed I/O.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
3.

Table Driven Output – Select Table 1.

Table Driven Output Configuration – Enable Table Driven Output.
a.
This is used to trigger High-Speed outputs in response to High-Speed counters, timers
and pulse outputs.
b.
Use ladder instructions TDOPRESET, TDOPLS and TDODECFG to setup and
manage tables.

Select output Y3.

Download changes to the CPU.

Add a rung with the instruction TDOPRESET and a rung with the instruction TDODECFG.

Once the TDOPRESET is running, it takes over the discrete output assigned to Table1.

To release the discrete output from being controlled by Table 1, use TDODECFG.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a Quadrature Input
This example walks through the steps required to get the counts from a quadrature encoder.
Phase A of the encoder is wired to input X0 and Phase B of the encoder is wired to input X1.
The Basic Steps
1.

Wire the encoder and connect Do-more! Designer to the BRX CPU.

Configure a High-Speed Input as a quadrature counter.

Download the program changes to the CPU and place the CPU in Run.

4. Use DataView and Trend View to verify the encoder values are being read correctly by the BRX
CPU.

Equipment Used
BRX MPU with DC inputs. A quadrature encoder (Open collector or Totem Pole) properly
powered and connected to inputs X0 and X1 of the BRX.
Launch Do-more! Designer. By default, the Tip of the Day will pop up. Close it.

12-38

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a Quadrature Input, continued
The Select Project window will be displayed next. Select New Offline Project. Launch the

Do-more! Designer Software.
In the New Offline Project window select the BRX MPU model you are working with. Rename
the project as Quad Encoder in the New Project Name field (bottom left). Press the OK
button to accept the selections.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-39

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a Quadrature Input, continued
The Dashboard page is displayed and the screen will look as follows:

Mouse over the BRX MPU in the Dashboard BRX Onboard I/O view, orange blocks will
appear around the various built-in MPU features. Select the inputs orange block (a). Select
Configure counter/timer functions (b) to access the Setup BRX High-speed I/O page.

12-40

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a Quadrature Input, continued
From the Setup BRX High-speed I/O page, select Function 1 under the Counter/Timer
Functions section.

Selecting (a) Counter from the Setup
BRX Counter/Timer dialog box. The
dialog box will fill in with counter
parameters. For this example, we will
keep the default (b) Device Name of
HsCtrTmr1. Select (c) Quad Counter
from the dropdown menu, leaving it at
(d) 1X counting resolution and select
input (e) X0 (Phase A) and input (f) X1
(Phase B).
Click OK to return to the Dashboard
screen. Write the changes to the PLC
and verify you are in Run mode.
At this point, we have configured inputs
X0 and X1 for quadrature counter highspeed inputs. No ladder is needed to
monitor the counts from the encoder.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-41

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a Quadrature Input, continued
Displaying Encoder Values via Data View
Create a New Data View window. From the menu select Debug -> Data View and New.

Alternately, you can use the Data icon (right) on the toolbar to open a new
Data View window.
The Data1 window is displayed. Start by typing
$HsCtrTmr1 on row 1 under the Element
column. Make this Data1 window wider by
placing the mouse on the right edge of the
window, left clicking and dragging to the right.
As you can see at right under Status, the Heap
items .AtResetValue, .EnableCapture, and
“.Acc”. The value in parenthesis is the current
value. As you turn your encoder, the value for
“.Acc” will change. If you move the encoder in
the clockwise direction the values will increase.
When the encoder moves in the counterclockwise direction, the value decreases. (The
reverse maybe true depending on the wiring of
the encoder phase A and phase B).

12-42

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a Quadrature Input, continued
It is possible to view one Heap item per Data
View row. The available Heap items for the
$HsCtrTmr1 can be found under the Project
Browser -> Configuration -> Memory -> I/O
-> Specialty -> $HsCtrTmr1 as shown at right.

Displaying Encoder values using Trend View
Trend View is a very powerful utility, one that can be used to troubleshoot the control system.
We highly recommend you use this tool to the fullest.
Create a new Trend View from the Debug Menu or the Trend icon (below, right) on the
toolbar, as shown below.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-43

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a Quadrature Input, continued
In Trend View, using a single pane, add the accumulated value of the high-speed counter,
$HsCtrTmr1.Acc. As the encoder is turned, you can see the accumulated value changing on
the Trend View pane.
52,984

52,984

44,153

35,323

26,492

17,661

SHsCtrTmr1.Acc

8,830

-0
08:17:49

12-44

8,830

08:17:56

08:18:03

08:18:09

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

08:18:16

08:18:23

08:18:29

08:18:36

08:18:43

-0
08:18:49

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile
This example walks through the steps required to use a BRX MPU to generate a pulsed output
with a trapezoid profile using the built-in high-speed outputs.
The Basic Steps
1.

Gather and wire up the hardware (not covered here).

2. Launch the Do-more! Designer software and connect to a BRX MPU with DC sinking or
sourcing outputs.
3.

Configure Axis 1 to use Y0 for Step and Y1 for Direction.

Write the necessary ladder program to generate the trapezoid profile.

Download and run the program.

Show how Data View and Trend View can be used to monitor and control the profile.

Equipment Needed
A BRX MPU with DC sinking or sourcing outputs, i.e. BX-DM1E-10ED23-D. A stepper
drive and motor properly powered and wired to the BRX MPU outputs. Alternately, the
output activity can be monitored in Data View or in Trend View, encase a stepper or similar
hardware is not available.
Launch the Do-more! Designer Software. By default, the Tip of the Day will pop up. Close it.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-45

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
The Select Project window will be displayed next. Select New Offline Project.

In the New Offline Project windows select the BRX MPU model you are working with. Rename
the project as Trapezoid, in the New Project Name field. Press the OK button to accept the
selections.

12-46

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
The Dashboard page is displayed and the screen will look as follows:

Mouse over the BRX MPU in the Local BRX Onboard I/O view. Select (a) the outputs orange
block. Select Configure high-speed outputs (b) to access the Setup BRX High-speed I/O page.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-47

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued

From the Setup BRX High-speed
I/O page, select Axis 1 under the
Axis/Pulse Outputs section.

The
Axis/Pulse
Output
Configuration window comes
up. Select (a) Pulse Output.
Use the default device name,
$Axis 1. For this exercise, select
Pulse Output, Step/Direction,
Y0 for Step and Y1 for Direction,
as shown below.
Press (b) OK to return to the
Setup BRX High-Speed I/O
window. Press OK again to
return to the Dashboard screen.
Save the project at this time.
At this point, we have configured
outputs Y0 and Y1 for Step and
Direction high-speed outputs.
Next, we will write the necessary
ladder to generate a trapezoid
profile with the configured highspeed outputs.

12-48

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
Ladder Program for Trapezoid Profile
Start by opening the $Main code block (a), as shown below.

We will add two rungs to the ladder diagram by selecting two instructions from the Instruction
Toolbox in the (b) High-Speed/Axis section. The ladder will look like the one shown below.
On rung 1 we will place the AXCONFIG instruction and on rung 2 we will place the
AXPOSTRAP instruction. The following page discusses setting the instruction parameters
when placing these instructions.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-49

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
With the cursor on rung 1, Select
AXCONFIG from the tool palette.
AXCONFIG is needed to setup the
runtime parameters for an Axis. An
Axis has no default values and must be
configured before it can be used. For
this example, we will configure the
AXCONFIG with the values as shown
in the dialog box on the right. Since
we have configured Axis 1 for Step/
Direction, change the AXCONFIG Axis
Device field to @Axis 1. For the purpose
of our example, leave all other fields at
their default values.

Move cursor to rung 2 and select
AXPOSTRAP from the tool palette.
AXPOSTRAP is used to move an Axis
from its current position to a specified
target position using the configured
parameters to generate a trapezoid move
profile.
For the purpose of this example, change
the (a) Axis Device to @Axis 1 and change
the (b) Target Type to Relative, leaving
the other parameters at their default
values. You can change the (c) Position
Value if your setup requires additional
steps to approximate the trapezoid move.
When you use the Relative target type,
the profile will move the number of steps
indicated by the (c) Position Value each
time the AXPOSTRAP instruction is
triggered.
Write the program to the BRX CPU and verify it is in RUN mode.

12-50

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
Displaying and controlling the trapezoid profile move using Data View
From the menu select a new Data View under the Debug -> Data View menu. Alternately,
you can use the Data icon (shown on right) on the toolbar ribbon to open a new Data View
window.

The Data1 window is displayed (right). Start by typing C0 on row 1 and C3 on row 2,
under the (a) Element column. Make the Data1 window wider by placing the mouse on
the right edge of the window (b), left clicking
and dragging to the right. Select (c) the yellow
E icon in order to display (d) the Edits
column. Be sure All Status On (toolbar
ribbon) is selected.

Under the Edits column (d), you will see ON
and OFF buttons adjacent to C0 and C3.
We will use these to trigger our two rungs of
instructions. In Data View, to configure AXIS1 parameters, double-left click the ON button
for C0 element.
NOTE: The first time you use this feature, the program will ask you to confirm the writes. If you prefer check
the box so that it will not ask you again.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-51

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
After triggering C0, the ladder will display the following status as shown below.

In the AXCONFIG instruction, we see (a) .MasterEnable and (b) .EnableOutput are
highlighted in blue and C1 is set to ON. These indicate that Axis1 is configured and ready
to be used.
The AXPOSTRAP instruction in Rung 2 shows Axis 1 parameters have been configured (d)
(.MasterEnable is highlighted) and it is ready to start sending pulses (e) (.EnableOutput is
highlighted).
C0 can be turned off once the On Success bit (c), of the AXCONFIG turns on.
We are now ready to initiate our trapezoid move.

12-52

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
Double-left click on the C3 ON button in Data View. The trapezoid move will begin. Status
indicators on (a) the AXPOSTRAP instruction will provide feedback about the move. The
following graphic shows its status after the move is complete. Notice (b) the Current Position is
now 1000 and the (c) Target Position is 1000. The field device should have moved 1000 steps.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-53

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
Displaying $Axis1 Current and Target values using Trend View
As mentioned before, Trend View is a very powerful utility, one that can be used to troubleshoot
the control system.
Open Trend View from the Debug Menu or the Trend icon (right) on the toolbar, as shown
below.

12-54

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

Detailed Example: Configure and Test a High-Speed Pulse Output with a
Trapezoid Profile, continued
In Trend View, using a single pane, add $Axis1.CurrentPosition to a pane.
Every time the AXPOSTRAP instruction is triggered, 1000 pulses are generated. In the Trend
View snapshot that follows, we can see the instruction was triggered twice. It started at 0
counts and reached 1000 counts the first trigger. On the second trigger, it started at 1000 and
reached 2000 counts.

There are many settings available that allow the user to meet application needs. Please review
the Do-more! Designer High-speed Instruction Help topics for detailed information.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-55

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX High-speed Instructions
In this section we will give an overview of the high-speed instructions available to the BRX
Do-more! CPU. They will be presented in this section as in the Instruction Toolbox, in
alphabetical order.
1. AXCAM – Axis Electronic Camming
2. AXCONFIG – Axis Configuration
3. AXFOLLOW – Axis Position Following with Offset
4. AXGEAR – Axis Electronic Gearing
5. AXHOME – Axis Perform Home Search
6. AXJOG – Axis Jog Mode
7. AXPOSSCRV – Axis Move to Position Using S-Curve
8. AXPOSTRAP – Axis Move to Position Using Trapezoid
9. AXRSTFAULT – Reset Axis Limit Fault
10. AXSETPROP – Set Axis Properties
11. AXVEL – Axis Set Velocity Mode
12. TDODECFG – Deconfigure Table Driven Output
13. TDOPLS – Load Programmable Limit Switch Table for Table Driven Output
14. TDOPRESET – Load Preset Table for Table Driven Output

An expanded discussion of each of these instructions can be found in the Do-more! Designer
online Help files under the High-Speed/Axis topic.

12-56

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXCAM
The Axis Electronic Camming (AXCAM) instruction is used to establish a Master/Slave
connection for an Axis so that its movement is synchronized to another Axis or to a HighSpeed Counter/Timer. The Slave Axis (Axis 1, below) position is derived from the Master
position. Any time the Master Axis moves to a new position the Slave Axis will also move to a
corresponding position as directed by the Cam Table. Pulse Outputs for a given Axis cannot
be commanded until the AXCONFIG instruction has been configured and run successfully.
An (a) Axis Device (the slave axis) and
either a (b) Master Axis, High-speed
Counter or Timer must be configured
before the AXCAM instruction can be
used. This is setup in the “Setup BRX
High-speed I/O” dialog in the BRX
Onboard I/O section of the System
Configuration. This dialog box can
be opened directly from the AXCAM
instruction by clicking on the (c)
Configure Axis... button and (d) Configure Master Register Device... button (see AXCAM
graphic below).
NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the master for other axes in following-type applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

After the Axis has been configured, the AXCAM instruction may now be used (For more details
see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section).

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-57

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXCAM, continued
Points and segments:
A Cam Table describes a motion profile that clearly assigns a slave position for each master
position of a specific master position range.
Cam tables are entered as a series of up to 64 segments. All of the segments are the same size in
that they are equal divisions of the total span of the Master Axis travel.
A segment describes the distance traveled and the position of the axis. It is equal to the difference
between the previous and current positions. Each segment is executed over a defined distance
traveled for the Master Axis. When executing these segments, the profiling software in the
controller will fit a smooth curve to the data with an updated velocity profile every millisecond.

Curve Fitting
The Cubic Interpolation method fits a cubic trajectory between each pair (segment) of cam
table entries.
All segment transitions are curved, even for a linear progression between the segments. The
only exception is on the last 2 table segments. The last 2 segments will be a linear progression
unless Rotary mode has been selected. In Rotary mode, there will be curves on the last position
of the table to the first position of the table.
Master Register: This is the Axis, High-Speed Counter or Timer that provides the position source
value. This can be any of the Axes or High-Speed Counter/Timers.
Non-Axis Master Filter Time: This parameter is only enabled if the Master Register is a High-Speed
Counter/Timer. This value is the Filter Time Constant which specifies how often (in Seconds) the
Slave’s position is calculated. This can be any constant value or any numeric location.
Configure Master Register Device: This button will open the BRX High-Speed Input or Axis/Pulse
Output dialog in the System Configuration.
Linear vs. Rotary: This setting selects the behavior that will occur when the end of the table has been
reached.
•
Linear: The first two and the last two table positions are used to calculate a linear
trajectory (from 0 at the start
Linear Mode
of the table) and the CPU will
continue to output pulses until
the instruction is terminated.

12-58

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

....... Calculated from first and last two points and the extrapolated trajectory.
---- Actual Output pulse. All segements are curved except for first and last.

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXCAM, continued
•
Rotary: This selection will ‘loop’ the
table to start at the beginning. The modulus
of the Master Register is used as the table
Master Value.

Rotary Mode

Master Position Offset: A pulse count value
that is added to the Master Axis position 0
Table will loop back to start position but the transition
before the associated Slave position value is
from last position to first position will be curve fitted.
calculated. This can be any constant value or
any numeric location. If this value is a numeric location the value is read from that location only when
the instruction is first enabled.
Load Slave Curve Fitting Points from Data Block: The data for the curve is located in PLC memory.

• Length from Starting Master Position: The total number of pulse counts the
Master will move.
• Number of Curve Fitting Points: The number of segments to divide the Length
from Master Position into. There must be at least 3 curve fitting points in the table with
a maximum of 64.
• Slave Curve Fitting Table Starting Address: The beginning address in PLC
memory where the curve data is stored.
Fixed Curve Fitting Points: The data for the curve is in the instruction table.

• Length from Starting Master Position: The total number of pulse counts the
Master will move.
• Number of Curve Fitting Points: The number of segments to divide the Length
from Master Position into. There must be at least 3 curve fitting points in the table
with a maximum of 64.
Enable Relative Mode: If selected, the function is enabled. The Slave Axis’ current position is stored
internally and that position becomes the new 0 for the Slave Axis. As the Master Axis moves, the Slave
position values are now relative to this stored position.

On Success:
• Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will
remain FALSE until the enable leg goes back OFF. Once the enable leg turns OFF,
if the instruction’s device/parameters were valid, this bit will turn ON once the
.CurrentVelocity reaches 0.
• JMP to Stage: Similarly, the JMP will not occur until after the instruction is
enabled, then disabled, and all the instruction device/parameters were valid and the
.CurrentVelocity reaches 0.
On Error:
• Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will
become TRUE if there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction,
with the devices specified or if the AXCAM move was interrupted before completion.
• JMP to Stage: If there was a problem with the parameters configured in the
instruction, with the devices specified or the AXCAM move was interrupted before
completion, the PLC will jump to that stage.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-59

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXCAM, continued
Example AXCAM
In this example we will demonstrate the use of the AXCAM instruction in conjunction with the
AXCONFIG instruction to create a circular path output using multiple axes.
The radius of the circle (50000) is loaded into D10. The center position is: X=100000,
Y=100000. The path followed is defined in the program SineCalculation.
Axes 0,1 & 2 are defined with the AXCONFIG instruction. The AXCAM instruction creates
the movement of the Axes to define the path traveled. The program SineCalculation is called to
perform the necessary math calculations to create a circular path output. The SineCalculation
is called for each segment in the camming table (61 segments).
The following pages show the ladder program that defines this operation.

(Ladder continued on next page.)

12-60

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXCAM, continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

(Ladder continued from previous page.)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-61

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXCAM, continued
Program: SineCalculation
A program is written to perform a separate calculation to create a circular path output.

12-62

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXCONFIG
The
Axis
Configuration
(AXCONFIG)
instruction
configures the parameters for a
specific Axis so that it may be
used for all of the other AXIS
commands.
Pulse Outputs
for a given AXIS cannot
be commanded until the
AXCONFIG instruction has
been run successfully. When
the AXCONFIG instruction
has been successfully created
and initiated, the .MasterEnable
structure member for that AXIS
will become true and the AXIS
may be commanded by other
Axis instructions.
An (a, above and Axis 1 below) Axis Device must be configured before the AXCONFIG
instruction can be used. This is setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog found in the
BRX Onboard I/O section of the System Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly
in the instruction from the (b) Configure Axis… button (see AXCONFIG graphic above).
After the Axis has been configured
(see the High-speed I/O Hardware
Configuration section for more
details), the AXCONFIG instruction
may now be used.
NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will
not generate pulses to physical outputs
of the PLC. Axis0 can be used for
generating pulse output profile register
values to be used for Table Driven
Outputs (TDOPRESET or TDOPLS) or as
the master for other axes in followingtype applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW
or AXGEAR).

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-63

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXCONFIG, continued
Linear vs Rotary: This setting selects the behavior that will occur when the end of the table
has been reached.
•
Linear: Linear actuators move forward or backward on a fixed linear path. The movement of
linear actuators are defined in linear units such as inches or millimeters. Since linear actuators only
move in two directions on a fixed path, linear actuators are defined as finite, meaning they have a set
distance that they can travel in either direction before they must stop.
•
Rotary: Rotary actuators produce rotary motion, meaning that the actuator revolves on a
circular path. Movement from this type of actuator is defined in rotary units, typically degrees. A
rotary table doesn’t have a fixed distance it can travel; it can keep spinning in the same direction
indefinitely. The count for a rotary input is kept within a defined range (Rotary Range Length).
Once the count has exceeded the high limit of the specified Rotary Range Length, it will reset to 0.
If the Axis position is decreasing (negative velocity value), when it falls below 0, it will go to the high
value specified in the Rotary Range Length.

Initial Output Position: The current count will be set to this value when the Axis is first
enabled and any time the Axis is reset. This can be any constant value or any numeric location.
Minimum Velocity (pulses/sec): The slowest frequency of output pulses that will be generated
when the output is enabled. This can be any positive constant from 10 to 250000 or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
Maximum Velocity (pulses/sec): The fastest frequency of output pulses that will be generated
when the output is enabled. This can be any positive constant from 10 to 250000 or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
Acceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis
is ramping up from a slower pulse rate to a higher pulse rate. This can be any positive constant
or any numeric location with a value in that range.
Deceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis is
ramping down from a faster pulse rate to a slower pulse rate. This can be any positive constant
or any numeric location with a value in that range.
Fault Deceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): Any time a Fault Limit is reached or the Axis
.MasterEnable is turned OFF, the Axis will decelerate to 0 at this specified rate. A value of
0 will cause the Axis to immediately stop moving. This can be any positive constant or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
Encoder Feedback: Enable this option if an incremental encoder is being used to provide the
speed reference feedback. The Axis structure contains a .FollowingError that indicates the
difference in the commanded position and the encoder feedback. This can indicate a stalled
motor, mechanical slippage or other problem in the application.

12-64

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXCONFIG, continued
•
High-speed Input Function 1/High-speed Input Function 2/High-speed Input Function 3:
Choose one of these options for the encoder feedback. The High-speed Counters must be setup in the
Setup BRX Counter/Timer section of the BRX Onboard I/O>High-speed I/O… section in the System
Configuration. Click on the Configure High-speed Input… button to access this directly.
•

Position Based on:

Encoder: This option will place the specified High-speed Input Function into the
.CurrentPosition member of the Axis configured in this instruction. The
difference in the specified High-speed Input Function and the actual pulse
output count of the Axis configured in this instruction will be indicated in the
.FollowingError.
Pulse Output: This option will indicate the actual pulse output count of the Axis
configured in this instruction into the .CurrentPosition member and the
.FollowingError will indicate the difference between .CurrentPosition and the
High-speed Input Function that has been specified.
•
Pulse Output/Encoder Scale: If the motor and the encoder have different pulse-per-revolution
values, enter the scale value required to bring them into alignment.
•
Encoder Deadband (counts): Having some deadband value around the encoder current position
can prevent the pulse output from generating alternating small pulses trying to get the input value
to an exact number. This value is applied both above and below the encoder value. For example: A
value of 2 will be a deadband of 2 above and 2 below for a span of 4 counts.
Enable Positive/Clockwise Motion Fault-Limit: Enable this option to use a physical input that will
cause the Axis to Fault (Stop) if the input becomes true or false (based on the setting below) when
moving in the Clockwise or Positive direction. This is typically used as an over-travel limit switch.
If a Fault-Limit is tripped, use the Axis Reset Fault (AXRSTFLT) instruction or re-trigger the Axis
Config (AXCONFIG) instruction to clear the fault. Any attempt to move in the same direction that
caused the fault will immediately generate another fault condition. Movement of the Axis in the
opposite direction is permitted.

Limit Input: This needs to be one of the onboard X discrete input elements. This
is where the over travel limit switch would be wired to.
Stop/fault when Limit is: Choose OFF to cause the Axis to fault (stop) when the
specified input goes from True to False. Choose ON to cause the Axis to fault
(stop) when the specified input goes from False to True.
Enable Negative/Counter-Clockwise Motion Fault-Limit: Enable this option to use a physical input
that will cause the Axis to Fault (Stop) if the input becomes true or false (based on the setting below)
when moving in the Counter-Clockwise or Negative direction. This is typically used as an over-travel

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-65

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXCONFIG, continued
limit switch.
If a Fault-Limit is tripped, use the Axis Reset Fault (AXRSTFLT) instruction or re-trigger the Axis
Config (AXCONFIG) instruction to clear the fault. Any attempt to move in the same direction that
caused the fault will immediately generate another fault condition. Movement of the Axis in the
opposite direction is permitted.

Limit Input: This needs to be one of the onboard “X” discrete input elements.
This is where the over travel limit switch would be wired to.
Stop/fault when Limit is: Choose OFF to cause the Axis to fault (stop) when the
specified input goes from True to False. Choose ON to cause the Axis to
fault (stop) when the specified input goes from False to True.
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE if
the parameters configured in the instruction and proper devices were specified.
•
JMP to Stage: If the parameters configured in the instruction and proper devices were
specified, the PLC will jump to that stage.

On Error:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE if
there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction or with the devices specified.
•
JMP to Stage: If there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction or with
the devices specified, the PLC will jump to that stage.

12-66

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXFOLLOW
The Axis Position Following with Offset (AXFOLLOW) instruction is used to establish a
Master/Follower connection for an Axis so that the Follower’s movement is synchronized to the
Master’s movement. The Master can be another Axis or a High-Speed Counter/Timer. Pulse
Outputs for a given AXIS cannot be commanded until the AXCONFIG instruction has been
configured and run successfully.
Because the Follower Axis will need the ability to overtake the Master Axis during a Goto
Relative Offset operation, ensure that the Maximum Velocity and Acceleration parameters of
the Master and Follower Axes have been configured with enough capacity to allow this. The
Follower Axis can be made more responsive by configuring it with higher Maximum Velocity or
a faster Acceleration or both.
If the instruction is enabled with the Goto Offset Signal OFF, the Axis will behave in a Velocityfollowing manner. As soon as the Goto Offset Signal turns ON, the Axis will now behave
in a Position-following manner and will remain so until the instruction is terminated. If the
instruction is enabled with the Goto Offset Signal ON, the Axis will behave in a Positionfollowing manner until the instruction is terminated.
To help keep track of the Axes movement relative to each other, any time the Axis is in Position
Following mode the Follower Axis associated structure member, .MstSlvCoordError, will
contain the difference (in pulse counts) between the Master Axis position and the Follower Axis’
position.
An (a) Axis Device (the slave axis) and either a (b) Master Axis, High-speed Counter or Timer
must be configured before the AXFOLLOW instruction can be used. This is setup in the
Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section of the System
Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the (c) Configure
Axis… button and (d) Configure Master Register Device... button.

After the Axis has been configured (see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for
more details), the AXFOLLOW instruction may now be used.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-67

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXFOLLOW, continued
NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not
generate pulses to physical outputs of the
PLC. Axis0 can be used for generating
pulse output profile register values to be
used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET
or TDOPLS) or as the master for other
axes in following-type applications (AXCAM,
AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

Master Register: This is the Axis,
High-Speed Counter or Timer that
provides the position source value.
This can be any of the Axes or HighSpeed Counter/Timers.
Non-Axis Master Filter Time: This
parameter is only enabled if the Master
Register is a High-Speed Counter/
Timer. This value is the Filter Time
Constant which specifies how often (in
Seconds) the Slave’s position is calculated. This can be any constant value or any numeric
location.
Configure Master Register Device: This button will open the BRX High-Speed Input or Axis/
Pulse Output dialog in the System Configuration.
Gear Ratio Multiplier: A multiplier that will be applied when the Follower’s position
is calculated. This can be any constant value or any numeric location. Unlike the similar
parameter in the Electronic Gearing (AXGEAR) instruction, this value cannot be adjusted
while the instruction is enabled.
Relative Offset Position: The Follower’s position value will be adjusted by this pulse count
value each time the Goto Offset Signal turns ON. This can be any constant value or any
numeric location.
Relative Offset Velocity: The additional velocity the Follower Axis will use when moving to the
Relative Offset Position. This value specifies how much faster (in pulses/second) the Follower
Axis can move than the Master Axis when attempting to move to the Relative Offset Position.
This value can be any constant between 0 and 250,000 or any numeric location containing a
value in that range.
Goto Offset Signal: Each time this Bit transitions from OFF to ON, the Follower Axis will
attempt to move to the Relative Offset Position using the Relative Offset Velocity. If the
Relative Offset Position is reached the instruction will turn this Bit OFF. This can be any Bit
memory address.

12-68

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXFOLLOW, continued
NOTE: If the Bit assigned to the Goto Offset Signal stays ON, it indicates the Follower Axis does not have the
capacity to overtake the Master Axis. Make the Follower Axis more responsive by configuring it with higher
Maximum Velocity or a faster Acceleration, or both.

On Error:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE if
there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction, with the devices specified or if
the AXFOLLOW move was interrupted before completion.
•
JMP to Stage: If there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction, with the
devices specified or the AXFOLLOW move was interrupted before completion, the PLC will jump to
that stage.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-69

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXFOLLOW, continued
Example AXFOLLOW ladder.
Rung 1 configures Axis 1 parameters. Rung 2 configures Axis 2 parameters. Rung 3 uses the
AXVEL instruction to set the velocity structure. Rung 4 sets the AXFOLLOW instruction that
will describe the motion of both axes.

12-70

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXGEAR
The Axis Electronic Gearing (AXGEAR) instruction is used to create a type of Master/Slave
connection that will synchronize the movement of one axis relative to another axis or a HighSpeed Counter/Timer. Pulse Outputs for a given AXIS cannot be commanded until the
AXCONFIG instruction has been configured and run successfully.
AXGEAR always behaves in a Position-Following mode. The Slave axis position is derived from
the Master position so that any time the position of the Master Axis changes, the position of the
Slave Axis will move to a position that has been modified by the user-supplied gear ratio. When
the move to position operation is enabled, the AXGEAR instruction will use the current values
of the Gear Ratio, the Axis Maximum Velocity, Accel, Decel and the Master’s Target Position to
calculate the move profile. Any changes to the Gear Ratio and Target Position will result in a
trajectory change of the AXGEAR Axis.
To help keep track of the Axes movement relative to each other, any time the Axis is in Electronic
Gearing mode the Slave Axis associated structure member, .MstSlvCoordError, will contain the
difference (in pulse counts) between the Master Axis position and the Slave Axis position.
An (a) Axis Device (the slave axis) and either a (b) Master Axis, High-speed Counter or Timer
must be configured before the AXGEAR instruction can be used. This is setup in the Setup BRX
High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section of the System Configuration.
This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the (c) Configure Axis… button and
(d) Configure Master Register Device... button.

After the Axis has been configured (For more details, see the High-speed I/O Hardware
Configuration section), the AXGEAR instruction may now be used.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-71

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXGEAR, continued
NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will
not generate pulses to physical outputs
of the PLC. Axis0 can be used for
generating pulse output profile register
values to be used for Table Driven
Outputs (TDOPRESET or TDOPLS) or as
the master for other axes in followingtype applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW
or AXGEAR).

Master Register: This is the Axis,
High-Speed Counter or Timer that
the Slave Axis will be electronically
geared to. This can be any of the
Axes or High-Speed Counter/
Timers.
Non-Axis Master Filter Time:
This parameter is only enabled if
the Master Register is a High-Speed
Counter/Timer. This value is the Filter Time Constant which specifies how often (in Seconds)
the Slave’s position is calculated. This can be any constant value or any numeric location.
Configure Master Register Device: This button will open the BRX High-Speed Input or Axis/
Pulse Output dialog in the System Configuration.
Gear Ratio Multiplier: A multiplier that will be applied each time the Slave’s position is
calculated. A value of 0 will cause the Slave Axis to stop. This can be any constant value or any
numeric location.
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will remain FALSE until
the enable leg goes back OFF. Once the enable leg turns OFF, if the instruction’s device/parameters
were valid, this bit will turn ON once the .CurrentVelocity reaches 0.
•
JMP to Stage: Similarly, the JMP will not occur until after the instruction is enabled, then
disabled, and all the instruction’s device/parameters were valid and the .CurrentVelocity reaches 0.
On Error:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE if
there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction, with the devices specified or if
the AXGEAR move was interrupted before completion.
•
JMP to Stage: If there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction, with the
devices specified or the AXGEAR move was interrupted before completion, the PLC will jump to that
stage.

12-72

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXGEAR, continued
Example AXCAM ladder.
This example demonstrates the usage of the AXGEAR instruction. Axes 0, 1& 2 are configured
in the first scan with AXCONFIG.

(Ladder continued on next page.)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-73

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXGEAR, continued
In this section when C66 goes high AXCAM is executed. Axis 1 and Axis 2 will move
proportionally depending on the data specified in gear ratio multiplier field of the AXGEAR
instruction. Virtual Axis 0 position is the pointer used. As the Virtual Aixs 0 moves from
position 0 to position 10000 the position of Axis 1 and Axis 2 will follow proportionally to the
values in R0 and R1. Axis 2 rotation should be opposed to Axis 1.
(Ladder continued from previous page.)

12-74

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXHOME
The Axis Perform Home Search (AXHOME) instruction is used to perform the necessary
steps to move the specified Axis to a known starting position. Pulse Outputs for a given
AXIS cannot be commanded until the AXCONFIG instruction has been configured and run
successfully.
An (a) Axis Device must be configured before the AXHOME instruction can be used. This is
setup in the “Setup BRX High-speed I/O” dialog that is in the “BRX Onboard I/O” section
of the System Configuration. You can link directly with the (b) Configure Axis… button in
the AXHOME instruction.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-75

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXHOME, continued
After the Axis has been configured (see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section
for more details), the AXHOME instruction may now be used.

NOTE: Axis 0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the master for other axes in following-type applications (AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

Homing Velocity (Signed): The maximum velocity the Axis will ramp up to when moving
toward Discrete Input Limit 1. The Axis will ramp up and down using the Axis current
Acceleration and Deceleration settings. This can be any constant value from -250000 to -10,
0, and 10 to 250000 or any numeric location containing a value in that range. The sign of
the value will indicate the direction of travel. Positive numbers will move the Axis clockwise,
negative numbers will move the Axis counter-clockwise.

12-76

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXHOME, continued
Discrete Input Limit 1: The Home Search operation requires at least one discrete input.
•
Discrete Input: The discrete input where the Home limit switch is connected. This must be one
of the on-board discrete inputs.
•
Event: Selects which of the following conditions will indicate the Home switch has been
reached:

1. Rising Edge
2. Falling Edge
3. Rising OR
Falling Edge
4. High Level
5. Low Level
Termination: Specifies what action to take after reaching the Home switch (Input Limit 1)
•
Position: Use the Axis current positioning configuration to move the Axis to an absolute pulse
count relative to the position of Discrete Input Limit 1.

Offset from Limit 1: When Discrete Input Limit 1 is reached, the Axis marks the
position of the switch and will then move the Axis toward the specified Position.
•

Creep to Second Position: Move the Axis to a second discrete Input Limit switch.

Creep Velocity (Signed): The maximum frequency the Axis will ramp up to when
moving toward Discrete Input Limit 2. The Axis will ramp up and down using the
Axis current Acceleration and Deceleration settings. This can be any constant value
between -250000 to -10, 0, and 10 to 250000 or any numeric location containing
a value in that range. The sign of the value will indicate the direction of travel:
positive numbers will move the Axis clockwise, negative numbers will move the Axis
counter-clockwise.
Discrete Input Limit 2: Use a discrete input for Limit 2. This could be a second
discrete input or the same input as Discrete Input Limit 1.
Discrete Input: The discrete input where the Discrete Input Limit 2 switch is
connected. This must be one of the on-board discrete inputs.
Event: Selects which of the following conditions will indicate the Home switch
has been reached:
• Rising Edge
• Falling Edge
• Rising OR
Falling Edge
• High Level
• Low Level

Decelerate to 0 Velocity: The Axis will decelerate from the Homing Velocity to 0.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-77

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXHOME, continued
Zero Position At: Enable this option to have the Axis set its Current Position to 0 after the
following step of the Home Search operation:
•
Limit 1: Set the Current Position to 0 when the Discrete Input Limit 1 switch is reached. Any
additional movement of the Axis during the Termination phase will be reflected in the Axis Current
Position value.
•
Home/When Done: Set the Current Position to 0 when all phases of the Home Search
operation is complete.

Input Leg: Specifies how the instruction will be enabled to run:
•
Edge Triggered: Each time the input logic transitions from OFF to ON this instruction will run
to completion. This selection does not allow the Home Search operation to be interrupted once it has
started except by manually turning OFF the .MasterEnable for the Axis, which will put the Axis into a
fault condition that must be cleared before the Axis will be permitted to move. Use the AXRSTFAULT
(Reset Axis Limit Fault) instruction to clear an Axis Fault.
•
Power Flow Enabled: When the Input logic transitions from OFF to ON the instruction will
begin to execute and will continue executing as long as the input logic remains ON. This selection
allows the Home Search operation to be interrupted by turning the input logic OFF. This is an error
condition but it does not put the Axis into a Fault condition.

On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE if
the parameters configured in the instruction and proper devices were specified and the Home operation
completes uninterrupted.
•
JMP to Stage: If the parameters configured in the instruction and proper devices were specified,
the PLC will jump to that stage once the Home operation completes.

On Error:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE if
there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction, with the devices specified or if
the Home operation was interrupted before completion.
•
JMP to Stage: If there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction, with the
devices specified or the Home operation was interrupted before completion, the PLC will jump to that
stage.

12-78

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXHOME, continued
Examples of various AXHOME configurations are considered on the following pages.
Termination at Position
of Limit 1
Example 1: Termination
at Position
of Limit 1
(Axis moves back to Limit 1 Position)
Accel
Rate

Decel
Rate
Limit 1

Start

Decel Rate

Accel Rate

Homing Velocity

$Axis1.CurrentPosition
goes to here.

The Axis decelerates, changes direction and goes back to
$Axis.CurrentPosition = 0 (Not looking at Limit 1 anymore).

Example 2: Termination Using Creep to Limit 2.

The Axis decelerates, changes direction and goes back to the
falling edge of Limit 2 and the $Axis.CurrentPosition goes
to 0 Take note that Limit 2 is the same physical switch in this
situation. It could be a different one if it would make better
sense for the application.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-79

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXHOME, continued
Example 3: Using Level and Edge Limits, Sharing the Same Input.

The Axis decelerates, changes direction and goes back to the
Falling Edge of Limit 2 and the $Axis.CurrentPosition goes to
0. Take note that Limit 2 is the same physical switch in this
situation. It could be a different one if it would make better
sense for the application.

Example 4: Using Level and Edge Limits,
Sharing the Same Input.

This is the same setup as the prior example but the Input
for limit 1 on ON at the time of enabling the AXHOME
instruction. The first movement does not occur in this case and
the Axis creeps back to the Falling Edge of the switch.

12-80

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXHOME, continued
Example 5: Termination Decelerate to 0 Velocity.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

In this case, when the AXHOME operation is complete, the
$Axis1.CurrentPosition will contain a negative value.

Example 6: Termination Decelerate to 0 Velocity.

In this case, when the AXHOME operation is complete, the
$Axis1.CurrentPosition will go to a 0 value.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-81

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXJOG
The Axis Jog (AXJOG) instruction sets an Axis into a mode where its position can be manually
adjusted by moving the Axis in the forward or reverse direction. Jogging is a simple velocity
move that uses the Acceleration and Deceleration parameters specified in the Axis Configuration
to ramp up to and ramp down from the Target Velocity specified in the AXJOG instruction or
the Maximum Velocity specified in the Axis Configuration, whichever is lower.
An (a) Axis Device must be configured
before the AXJOG instruction can
be used. This is done in the Setup
BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is
in the “BRX Onboard I/O” section
of the System Configuration. You
can open this dialog directly with the
(b) Configure Axis… button.

After the Axis has been configured (below) the AXJOG instruction may now be used (See the
High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for more details).

NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the master for other axes in following-type applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

12-82

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXJOG, continued
Zero Count at Completion: When this option is enabled the Current Position of the Axis
will be set to 0 when the Enable/Reset input transitions from ON to OFF. If this option is
not enabled, the Axis will retain the contents of the Current Position after the Jog is complete.
Target Velocity: Specifies the speed that the Axis will output pulses when the Enable Leg
of the AXJOG is ON and either the Forward or Reverse Leg is ON. If this value is higher
than the Maximum Velocity specified in the Axis Configuration, the Axis Configuration value
will be used. Forward and Reverse moves will use the Axis Configuration’s Acceleration and
Deceleration values when ramping up to and ramping down from the Maximum Velocity
allowed.
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will remain FALSE until
the enable leg goes back OFF. Once the enable leg turns OFF, if the instruction’s device/parameters
were valid, this bit will turn ON once the .CurrentVelocity reaches 0.
•
JMP to Stage: Similarly, the JMP will not occur until after the instruction is enabled, then
disabled, and all the instruction’s device/parameters were valid and the .CurrentVelocity reaches 0.

On Error:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE
when proper instruction parameters are NOT properly entered or the instruction IS NOT completed
successfully. The specified bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Error
bit will remain ON even if the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: when proper instruction parameters are NOT properly entered or the instruction
IS NOT completed successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.
NOTE: Because this instruction puts the Axis into an operational mode (as opposed to performing a single
operation), On Success is defined as getting the Axis into Jog mode with no errors. This means that the On
Success indication will turn ON after the Enable/Reset input logic transitions from ON to OFF and the Axis’
Current Velocity is at 0. When these conditions are met the Axis’ Mode is “Idle”. You should wait until the
On Success indication turns ON before attempting to execute any other Axis instruction.

Example Ladder Logic:

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-83

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXPOSSCRV
The Axis Move to Position Using S-Curve (AXPOSSCRV) instruction is used to move an Axis
from its current position to a specified target position using the Axis configured parameters
and the specified Jerk parameter which will yield an s-curve velocity profile. Pulse Outputs
for a given Axis Device cannot be commanded until the AXCONFIG instruction has been
configured and run successfully.
An (a) Axis Device must be configured before the AXPOSSCRV instruction can be used.
This is setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section
of the System Configuration. You can open this dialog directly with the (b) Configure Axis…
button.

After the Axis has been configured (see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section
for more details), the AXPOSSCRV instruction may now be used.

NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the Master for other axes in following-type applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

12-84

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXPOSSCRV, continued
Input Leg
•
Edge Triggered: The move to position operation will be performed each time the input transitions
from OFF to ON. Once a move to position operation is in progress it can only be stopped by manually
setting the axis .MasterEnable member to OFF, which will put the axis into a Fault state.
•
Power flow Enabled: The move to position operation will begin when the input transitions from
OFF to ON and will continue to completion as long as the input remains ON. This selection has the
benefit of being able to interrupt a move to position operation by setting the input state to OFF and
NOT putting the Axis into a Fault state.

Target Type
•
Absolute: Absolute moves are measured from the axis zero position. When an axis is initialized,
its current position is set to 0. An absolute move to 10000 will generate 10000 pulses to move the axis
forward 10000 pulses. A subsequent absolute move to -10000 will
(Absolute)
generate 20000 pulses to move the axis backward past 0 to the -10000
Position Value
position. If you execute an absolute move with a Position Value that
is the same as the Axis Current Position the axis will not move as the 0
Current
Target
Position
Position
absolute position is already reached.
•
Relative: Relative moves are measured from the Axis’ current
position. When an axis is initialized, its current position is set to
0. A relative move to 10000 will generate 10000 pulses to move the axis forward 10000 pulses.
A subsequent relative move of -10000 will generate 10000 pulses to
move the axis backward to that 0 position.
(Relative)
•
Zero-out Current Position Before Initial Move: Enable this
option to have the axis set its Current Position value to 0 before any
move operation.

Position Value

Current
Position

Target
Position

•
Position Value: The target position (pulse count) to move the
axis to. This can be any constant value, or any numeric location with
a value in that range.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-85

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXPOSSCRV, continued
Linear vs. Rotary
•
Linear: The series of pulses will produce forward or backwards motion along a fixed linear path.
If the Target Position value is a higher value than the Current Position value, the resulting move will
be in the positive (increasing) direction. If the Target Position value is a lower value than the Current
Position, the resulting move will be in the negative (decreasing) direction.
•
Rotary: The series of pulses will produce Clockwise or CounterClockwise motion along a fixed
circular path either as an absolute position value or relative position as noted in the discussion below.

Move to Absolute Target in Clockwise Direction: Taking into account the Rotary
Range specified in the AXCONFIG and the Target Position Value, the PLC will always
generate pulses in an increasing (positive)
direction. So if the Target Position value is
lower than the Current Position, the PLC will
‘roll over’ in the clockwise direction to achieve
the position. If the Target Position Value
specified exceeds the Rotary Range, the Axis
will move to the modulus result. For example:
If the Rotary Range is 0–359 (360 degrees) and
a Target Position Value of 500 was specified, the
Axis will output 140 pulses.
Move to Absolute Target in Counterclockwise
Direction: Taking into account the Rotary
Range specified in the AXCONFIG and the
Target Position Value, the PLC will always generate pulses in a decreasing (negative)
direction. So if the Target Position value is
higher than the Current Position value, the
PLC will ‘roll over’ in the Counter clockwise
direction to achieve the position. If the Target
Position Value specified exceeds the Rotary
Range, the Axis will move to the modulus result.
For example: If the Rotary Range is 0–359 (360
degrees) and a Target Position Value of 500 was
specified, the Axis will output 220 pulses.

12-86

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXPOSSCRV, continued
Move to Absolute Target in Shortest
Direction: Taking into account the Rotary
Range specified in the AXCONFIG and the
Target Position Value, the PLC will calculate
the shortest distance between the Target
Position Value and the Current Position
value and go in either Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise direction to achieve the target. If
the Target Position Value specified exceeds
the Rotary Range, the Axis will move to the
modulus result. For example: If the Rotary
Range is 0–359 (360 degrees) and a Target
Position Value of 500 was specified, the Axis
will output 140 pulses.
Relative Rotary Target Type, so sign of
Position Value parameter specifies direction:
A positive Position Value will move the Axis
in a Clockwise direction and a negative
Position Value will move the Axis in a
Counter Clockwise direction. If the Target
Position Value specified exceeds the Rotary
Range, the Axis will move to the modulus
result. For example: If the Rotary Range is
0–359 (360 degrees) and a Target Position
Value of 500 was specified, the Axis will
output 140 pulses.
Jerk: The Jerk term specifies how quickly the Axis is allowed to achieve maximum Acceleration
and Deceleration on its way to reaching maximum Velocity. This value is specified in pulses/
sec3.
Supersede Default Properties: These parameters allow this AXPOSSCRV instruction to
override the values specified in the AXCONFIG instruction. They only temporarily change
the values in the AXCONFIG for this movement. To permanently change the parameters in
the AXCONFIG, use the Set Axis Properties (AXSETPROP) instruction.
•
Maximum Velocity (pulses/sec): The fastest frequency of output pulses that will be generated
during the move to position operation. This can be any positive constant from 10 to 250000, or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
•
Acceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis is
ramping up from a slower pulse rate to a higher pulse rate. This can be any positive constant or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
•
Deceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis is
ramping down from a higher pulse rate to a slower pulse rate. This can be any positive constant or any
numeric location with a value in that range.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-87

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXPOSSCRV, continued
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE when
instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes successfully. The specified bit
is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Success bit will remain ON even if
the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: When instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes
successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.

Example Usage:

12-88

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXPOSTRAP
The Axis Move to Position Using Trapezoid (AXPOSTRAP) instruction is used to move
an Axis from its current position to a specified target position using the Axis’ configured
parameters which will yield a trapezoid velocity profile (linear acceleration and deceleration).
Pulse Outputs for a given AXIS cannot be commanded until the AXCONFIG instruction has
been configured and run successfully.
An (a) Axis Device must be configured before the AXPOSTRAP instruction can be used. This
is setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section of
the System Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the (b)
Configure Axis…” button.

After the Axis has been configured (below), the AXPOSTRAP instruction may now be used
(See the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for more details).

NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the Master for other axes in following-type applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-89

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXPOSTRAP, continued
Move Type
•

Single move: The axis will perform 1 move to the specified position.

Edge Triggered: The move to position operation will be performed each time the input
transitions from OFF to ON. Once a move to position operation is in progress it can
only be stopped by manually setting the axis .MasterEnable member to OFF, which will
put the axis into a Fault state.
Power flow Enabled: The move to position operation will begin when the input
transitions from OFF to ON and will continue to completion as long as the input
remains ON. This selection has the benefit of being able to interrupt a move to position
operation by setting the input state to OFF and NOT putting the axis into a Fault state.
•
Multi-move: The axis can perform multiple moves by changing the “Position Value” register and
triggering the “Update Target Position” bit.
•
Trigger Target Position: Specify an internal bit for this field. Changing this bit from OFF to
ON will result in the PLC changing its Target Position (without stopping) to the value loaded into the
“Position Value” register. The PLC will automatically turn the “Update Target Position” bit back OFF
after changing its target position. The .AtPosition bit member of the Axis structure can be monitored
to ensure completion.

Target Type
•
Absolute: Absolute moves are measured from the axis
zero position. When an axis is initialized, its current position
is set to 0. An absolute move to 10000 will generate 10000
pulses to move the Axis forward 10000 pulses. A subsequent
absolute move to -10000 will generate 20000 pulses to move
the Axis backward past 0 to the -10000 position. If you
execute an absolute move with a Position Value that is the
same as the axis Current Position the axis will not move as the
absolute position is already reached.
•
Relative: Relative moves are measured from the axis current position. When an axis is initialized,
its current position is set to 0. A relative move to 10000
will generate 10000 pulses to move the axis forward 10000
pulses. A subsequent relative move of -10000 will generate
10000 pulses to move the Axis backward to that 0 position.

12-90

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXPOSTRAP, continued
•
Zero Current Position Before Initial Move: Enable
this option to have the Axis set its Current Position value to
before any move operation.

Single Move: Current Position is set to 0
before the move to position operation begins.
Multi-Move: Current Position is set to 0
before the first move to position but does not
happen on subsequent OFF to ON transitions
of the Trigger Target Position.
•
Position Value: The target position (pulse count) to move the Axis to. This can be any constant
value, or any numeric location with a value in that range.

Linear vs. Rotary:
•
Linear: The series of pulses will produce forward or backwards motion along a fixed linear path.
If the Target Position value is a higher value than the Current Position value, the resulting move will
be in the positive (increasing) direction. If the Target Position value is a lower value than the Current
Position, the resulting move will be in the negative (decreasing) direction.
•

Rotary

Move to Absolute Target in Clockwise Direction: Taking into account the Rotary
Range specified in the AXCONFIG and the Target Position Value, the PLC will always
generate pulses in an increasing (positive)
direction. So if the Target Position value is
lower than the Current Position, the PLC
will ‘roll over’ in the clockwise direction to
achieve the position. If the Target Position
Value specified exceeds the Rotary Range, the
Axis will move to the modulus result. For
example: If the Rotary Range is 0–359 (360
degrees) and a Target Position Value of 500
was specified, the Axis will output 140 pulses.
Move to Absolute Target in Counterclockwise
Direction: Taking into account the Rotary
Range specified in the AXCONFIG and the
Target Position Value, the PLC will always
generate pulses in a decreasing (negative)
direction. So if the Target Position value is
higher than the Current Position value, the
PLC will ‘roll over’ in the Counter clockwise
direction to achieve the position. If the Target
Position Value specified exceeds the Rotary
Range, the Axis will move to the modulus
result. For example: If the Rotary Range is
0–359 (360 degrees) and a Target Position
Value of 500 was specified, the Axis will output
220 pulses.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-91

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXPOSTRAP, continued
Move to Absolute Target in Shortest
Direction:
Taking into account
the Rotary Range specified in the
AXCONFIG and the Target Position
Value, the PLC will calculate the
shortest distance between the Target
Position Value and the Current Position
value and go in either Clockwise or
Counter Clockwise direction to achieve
the target. If the Target Position Value
specified exceeds the Rotary Range, the
Axis will move to the modulus result.
For example: If the Rotary Range
is 0–359 (360 degrees) and a Target
Position Value of 500 was specified, the
Axis will output 140 pulses.
Relative Rotary Target Type, so sign
of Position Value parameter specifies
direction: A positive Position Value will
move the Axis in a Clockwise direction
and a negative Position Value will
move the Axis in a Counter Clockwise
direction. If the Target Position Value
specified exceeds the Rotary Range, the
Axis will move to the modulus result.
For example: If the Rotary Range
is 0–359 (360 degrees) and a Target
Position Value of 500 was specified, the
Axis will output 140 pulses.

Supersede Default Properties
Selecting these parameters allows the AXPOSTRAP instruction to override the values specified
in the AXCONFIG instruction. They only temporarily change the values in the AXCONFIG
for this movement. To permanently change the parameters in the AXCONFIG, use the Set
Axis Properties (AXSETPROP) instruction.
•
Maximum Velocity (pulses/sec): The fastest frequency of output pulses that will be generated
during the move to position operation. This can be any positive constant from 10 to 250000, or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
•
Acceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis is
ramping up from a slower pulse rate to a higher pulse rate. This can be any positive constant or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
•
Deceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis is
ramping down from a higher pulse rate to a slower pulse rate. This can be any positive constant or any
numeric location with a value in that range.

12-92

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXPOSTRAP, continued
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE when
instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes successfully. The specified
bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Success bit will remain ON even
if the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: When instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes
successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.

Example Usage:

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-93

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXRSTFAULT
The Reset Axis Limit Fault (AXRSTFAULT) instruction is used to clear the fault in an axis
that has either reached one of the configured Fault Limits while it was moving or has had its
.MasterEnable manually reset.
After the instruction has cleared the fault state in an axis fault, any attempt to move the Axis
in the same direction that caused the fault will immediately generate another fault condition.
Movement of the axis in the opposite direction that caused the fault is permitted.
The AXCONFIG (Axis Configuration) instruction will also reset an Axis that is in a fault state.
An (a) Axis Device must be configured before the AXRSTFAULT instruction can be used.
This is setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section
of the System Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the
(b) Configure Axis… button.

After the axis has been configured (see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for
more details), the AXRSTFAULT instruction may now be used.

NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the Master for other axes in following-type applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

12-94

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXRSTFAULT, continued
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE
when instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes successfully. The
specified bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Success bit will remain
ON even if the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: When instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes
successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.

Example Usage

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-95

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXSETPROP
The Set Axis Properties (AXSETPROP) instruction is used to make runtime changes to the
configured parameters of an Axis.
An (a) Axis Device must be configured before the AXSETPROP instruction can be used. This
is setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section of
the System Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the (b)
Configure Axis… button.

After the Axis has been configured (below) the AXSETPROP instruction may now be used (see
the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for more details).

NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the master for other axes in following-type applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

12-96

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXSETPROP, continued
Position: The current count will be set to this value when this instruction is enabled. This can be any
constant value or any numeric location.
Minimum Velocity (pulses/sec): The slowest frequency of output pulses that will be generated when
the output is enabled. This can be any positive constant from 10 to 250000 or any numeric location
with a value in that range.
Maximum Velocity (pulses per second): The fastest frequency of output pulses that will be generated
when the output is enabled. This can be any positive constant from 10 to 250000 or any numeric
location with a value in that range.
Acceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis is ramping
up from a slower pulse rate to a higher pulse rate. This can be any positive constant or any numeric
location with a value in that range.
Deceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): The rate at which the pulses will be generated when the axis is
ramping down from a faster pulse rate to a slower pulse rate. This can be any positive constant or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
Fault Deceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): Any time a Fault Limit is reached or the Axis .MasterEnable is
turned OFF, the axis will decelerate to a velocity of 0 pulses/sec at this specified rate. A value of 0 will
cause the Axis to immediately stop moving. This can be any positive constant or any numeric location
with a value in that range.
Pulse Output/Encoder Scale: If the motor and the encoder have different pulse-per-revolution values,
enter the scale value required to bring them into alignment.
Encoder Deadband (counts): Having some deadband value around the encoder current position can
prevent the pulse output from generating alternating small pulses trying to get the input value to an
exact number. This value is applied both above and below the encoder value. For example: A value of
2 will be a deadband of 2 above and 2 below for a span of 4 counts.

On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE when
instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes successfully. The specified
bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Success bit will remain ON even
if the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: When instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes
successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-97

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXSETPROP, continued
Example Usage

12-98

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

AXVEL
The Axis Set Velocity Mode (AXVEL)
instruction is used to put an axis into
an operation mode where its movement
is controlled by velocity rather than
position. Pulse Outputs for a given
axis cannot be commanded until the
AXCONFIG instruction has been
configured and run successfully.
The ladder logic input to this instruction
is an Enable/Reset, which means that
when the Input logic turns ON the
axis will ramp up to the axis structure’s
.TargetVelocity value, and when the
Input logic turns OFF the axis will
ramp down to a velocity of 0 and the
instruction will end.
While the instruction is enabled,
changing the axis associated structure
member .TargetVelocity will dynamically
change the output pulse frequency and will follow the specified Acceleration/Deceleration
Mode of the instruction to achieve the speed change.
An (a) Axis Device must be configured before the AXVEL instruction can be used. This is
setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section of
the System Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the
(b) Configure Axis… button.
After the axis has been configured (below), the AXVEL instruction may now be used (See the
High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for more details).

NOTE: Axis0 is a ‘virtual axis’ and will not generate pulses to physical outputs of the PLC. Axis0 can be
used for generating pulse output profile register values to be used for Table Driven Outputs (TDOPRESET or
TDOPLS) or as the Master for other axes in following-type applications (AXCAM, AXFOLLOW or AXGEAR).

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-99

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

AXVEL, continued
Using Velocity Value in: This field indicates the proper axis structure member to use for the
desired Velocity.
Initialize .TargetVelocity (signed): Enable this option to set the velocity of the axis when this
instruction is enabled. A non-zero value will cause the axis to begin moving at the specified
velocity as soon as this instruction is enabled. This value can be any constant between -250000
to -10, 0, and 10 to 250000 or any numeric location containing a value in that range. The sign
of the value will indicate the direction of travel: positive numbers will cause the axis to move
clockwise, negative numbers will cause the axis to move counter-clockwise. Any value that is
below the axis Configured Minimum Velocity will result in the Axis Minimum Velocity being
used.

Acceleration/Deceleration Mode:
Specifies what level of Acceleration / Deceleration to use when the axis is changing to a new
Target Velocity. The graphic will change with the selection to display what the velocity curve
will look like for that selection.
•
Trapezoid Accel / Decel: The axis will ramp from the Current Velocity to the new Target Velocity
value using the axis currently configured Acceleration and Deceleration values which results in a
trapezoid velocity path.
•
S-Curve Accel / Decel: The axis will ramp from the Current Velocity to the new Target Velocity
value using the axis currently configured Acceleration and Deceleration values in addition to the
following Jerk parameter which results in an s-curve velocity path.
•
Apply Jerk to Accel / Decel (pulses / sec3): This selection is only available for S-Curve Accel
/ Decel. Whereas the Acceleration and Deceleration values specify how quickly the Axis is allowed
to reach maximum velocity, the Jerk parameter specifies how quickly the Axis is allowed to achieve
maximum Acceleration and Deceleration. This can be any positive constant greater than 0 or any
numeric location with a value in that range.
•
None (Instantaneous): The axis will immediately begin moving at the specified Target Velocity
value; there is no ramp up or ramp down to the new velocity.

Supersede Acceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): When the axis is ramping up from a slower velocity
to a higher velocity use the specified rate instead of the axis configured acceleration rate. This
can be any positive constant or any numeric location with a value in that range.
Supersede Deceleration Rate (pulses/sec2): When the axis is ramping down from a faster
velocity to a slower velocity use the specified rate instead of the axis configured deceleration
rate. This can be any positive constant or any numeric location with a value in that range.
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will remain FALSE until
the enable leg goes back OFF. Once the enable leg turns OFF, if the instruction device/parameters were
valid, this bit will turn ON once the .CurrentVelocity reaches 0.
•
JMP to Stage: Similarly, the JMP will not occur until after the instruction is enabled, then
disabled, and all the instruction device/parameters were valid and the .CurrentVelocity reaches 0.

AXVEL, continued
On Error:

12-100

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE
when proper instruction parameters are NOT properly entered or the instruction IS NOT completed
successfully. The specified bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Error
bit will remain ON even if the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: When proper instruction parameters are NOT properly entered or the instruction
IS NOT completed successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.
NOTE: Because this instruction puts the Axis into an operational model (as opposed to performing a single
operation), On Success is defined as getting the Axis into Velocity mode with no errors. This means that
the On Success indication will turn ON after the Enable/Reset input logic transitions from ON to OFF and the
Axis’ Current Velocity is at 0. When these conditions are met the Axis’ Mode is “Idle”. You should wait until
the On Success indication turns ON before attempting to execute any other Axis instruction.

Example Usage

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-101

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDODECFG
Once a TDOPLS-Load Programmable Limit Switch Table for Table Driven Output or
TDOPRESET-Load Preset Table for Table Driven Output has been enabled it will continue to
control that output even if the input logic is no longer ON. Use the Deconfigure Table Driven
Output (TDODECFG) instruction to stop the Preset Table or PLS table from controlling the
Table Driven Output.
This instruction is useful for situations when the application may require changing control of
the Table Driven Output from one instruction, such as a TDOPRESET, to another.
There is one item that must be configured externally to the instruction in order to use the
TDODECFG function: (a )Table Driven Output Device. This item is setup in the Setup BRX
High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section of the System Configuration.
This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the (b) Configure Table Driven
Outputs…” button.

After the Table Driven Output has been configured (below), the TDODECFG instruction may
now be used (see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for more details).

12-102

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDODECFG, continued
On Success:
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE when
instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes successfully. The specified
bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Success bit will remain ON even
if the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: When instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes
successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.

Example Usage

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-103

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPLS
A Load Programmable Limit Switch Table for Table Driven Output (TDOPLS) contains a
table with a series of start and stop positions similar to the cams on a shaft. These cam positions
are compared to the current count value of the specified Master Register, which can be a Highspeed Counter, Timer or AXIS Current position value. When the count value falls between
any of the positions in the table, the discrete output that is specified is turned ON or OFF
according to the table configuration. Each table can have up to 64 cam positions. Each PLS
table compares the count value of one Master Register counter and can drive one High-speed
I/O discrete output.
Once a PLS table has been enabled for a Table Driven Output it will continue to control that
output even if the input logic is no longer ON. Use the De-configure Table Driven Output
(TDODECFG) instruction to stop the PLS table from controlling the Table Driven Output.
There are two items that must be configured externally to the instruction in order to use the
PLS feature: (a) a Table Driven Output Device and (b) a Master Register. Both of these items
are setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX Onboard I/O section of
the System Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly in the instruction from the (c)
Configure Table Driven Outputs… and (d) Configure Master Register Device… buttons.

12-104

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPLS, continued
Refer to both graphics below. After the (b) Table Driven Output Device and (a) Master Register
Device have been configured (see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for more
details), the TDOPLS instruction may now be used.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-105

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPLS, continued
Initialize .InputValOffset: A positive value in this field (a) means that the entries will act at a
lower value than shown. A negative value means that the entries will act at a higher value than
shown. For example: An offset of 500 is configured in the .InputValOffset field (a). The first
entry (b, c) is configured to turn ON the output at 1000 and (d, e) turn OFF at 2000. When
the table runs, the output will actually turn ON at a value of 500 and turn OFF at 1500. If the
.InputValOffset was configured for -500, the first output would have turned ON at a value of
1500 and OFF at 2500.

12-106

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPLS, continued
Source Register Scaling: The TDOPLS instruction can use the raw count value from the
specified Master Register or, if scaling was enabled in the High-speed I/O setup, the scaled value
to do its comparisons.
•
Raw Pulse Counts (No Scaling) – Select this option to enter the Preset Count values in the Table
as raw count values. The image below shows (a) Raw Pulse Counts (No Scaling selected, indicating
the Master Register scaling was not enabled. The (b) table entry shows that the values entered are based
on raw counts.

•
Use Source Register Scaling – If the Master Register has been configured to scale the current
count value you can use the scaled values in the table by selecting this option and entering values that
are scaled the same as the Master Register. The image below shows (a) Use Source Register Scaling
selected, indicating the Master Register scaling was enabled. The (b) table entry shows that the entries
are based on the scaled values.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-107

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPLS, continued
Load Raw PLS Table from Data Block (a): When enabled, the values used by the PLS Table
come from the values stored in the specified memory range. This allows for more dynamic
control of the PLS function.
•
Table Start Address (b): The beginning address in PLC memory where the PLS table data is
stored.
•
Number of PLS Steps (c): The number of steps in the PLS table that are stored in PLC memory.
A PLS Table can have up to 64 steps.
•
Table Data Block Range (d): Using the two values above, this shows the range of PLC memory
that will be used as the PLS data table. With a starting address of D0 and a total of 2 steps, the memory
range is D0 to D3.
NOTE: The PLC TDO PLS Table Editor button is available only when the Do-more! Designer software is
connected and Online with the BRX CPU.

•
PLC TDO PLS Table Editor button (e): Click this to open the PLS Table Editor. The editor
allows you to edit the data values in the specified Data Block. The data configuration options on this
dialog (Default Output State, value for “Greater Than or Equal”, value for “Less Than”) are the same
as the main dialog. Detailed information of the PLC TDO PLS Table Editor dialog screen is discussed
later in this section.

12-108

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPLS, continued

Default Output State (a): The Default Output state determines the starting state of the Output
when the PLS instruction is enabled and the state that the Output is in when the count is NOT
within the Entry comparisons. If the Default Output State is OFF, the Output will be ON
when the count is within the Entry comparison values. If the Default Output State is ON, the
Output will be OFF when the count is within the Entry comparison values.
Raw (or Scaled) PLS Count Steps Output ON when (b): A table of entries that determines
the Output state when the TDOPLS is running.
•
The entries in the table (b) can be constants or variables. If variables are used, the instruction
must be disabled and re-enabled after the variable value has been changed. The values in the entry
table cannot be overlapping.
•
The values must be increasing with the Entry numbers. In other words, the values in (c) And
Less Than must be larger than the value in (d) Greater Than or Equal to.

Output On/Off when Greater Than or Equal to: The value that represents the
lower edge of the cam position. This can be any value between -2,147,483,648 and
2,147,483,647.
And Less Than: The value that represents the upper edge of the cam position. This
can be any value between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.
If invalid entry values are used when specifying constant values, the Do-more! Designer
programming software will indicate an error (below) and not allow the instruction configuration
to be completed.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-109

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPLS, continued
If variables are used and invalid entry values are specified, the “On Error” state will become true
(Set Bit or JMP to Stage).
If the Scaling was configured for the Master Register counter and the Use Source Register
Scaling option was specified, the entry values will be the scaled values and no conversion will
be necessary.
Insert (e): Add an empty Step above the currently highlighted Step in the table.
Remove (f): Delete the currently highlighted Step from the table.
Import (g): Import the contents of the PLS Table from a CSV file. The format of the import
file is two numbers per line, separated by a comma or whitespace, all numbers must be in
ascending order, and a maximum of 64 lines. Please review CSV file formatting information
later in this TDOPLS instruction section, under the section explaining the PLC TDO PLS
Table Editor dialog.
On Success (h):
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE when
instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes successfully. The specified bit
is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Success bit will remain ON even if
the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: If the parameters configured in the instruction and proper devices were specified,
the PLC will jump to that stage.

On Error (i):
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE if
there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction or with the devices specified.
•
JMP to Stage: If there was a problem with the parameters configured in the instruction or with
the devices specified, the PLC will jump to that stage.

12-110

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPLS, continued
PLC TDO PLS Table Editor: Allows you to edit the data values in the specified Data Block.
The data configuration options on this dialog (Default Output State, value for “Greater Than
or Equal”, value for “Less Than”) are the same as the main dialog.
NOTE: Initial values for Default Output State, PLS Table Start Address, and Number of PLS Entries come
from the main instruction editor. If these values are changed while editing the table data with this dialog those
values will be updated on the main instruction editor when this dialog is closed.
NOTE: If the PLC TDO PLS Table Editor dialog is opened when the Number of PLS Entries is a variable
(memory address), the value in that location is read and the data in that number of rows will be read from the
PLC to prefill the table. The Also Write Table Length to PLC selection will be enabled and that variable location
will be prefilled here so that when the table data is written back to the PLC this location will be updated as well.
NOTE: A graph of the current PLS Table configuration is displayed at the bottom of the editor which shows
each of the entries. Clicking on the graph will place the cursor on the table entry that contains that location.
If incorrect data values are entered, i.e. overlapping data, a message will be displayed instead of the graph.

•

PLC TDO PLS Table Editor Dialog:

Source Register Scaling (a): Same as the main dialog. The TDOPLS instruction can
use the raw count value from the specified Master Register or, if scaling was enabled in
the High-speed I/O setup, it can use the scaled value to do its comparisons.

PLS Data Entry (b): Same as main dialog. Entries must be unique within the Table,
the lower and upper positions of a step cannot overlap the other cam positions. The
data has to be incremental.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-111

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPLS, continued
Output On/Off when Greater Than or Equal to: The value that represents the
lower edge of the cam position. This can be any value between -2,147,483,648
and 2,147,483,647.
And Less Than: The value that represents the upper edge of the cam position.
This can be any value between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.
Default Output State (c): Same as main dialog. Specifies the state of the first entry in
the table.
OFF (default): The output is OFF to start with. The first entry in the table will
be a point which the output turns ON and subsequent entries will flip between
OFF / ON / OFF / etc.
ON: The output is ON to start with. The first entry in the table will be a point
which the output turns OFF and subsequent entries will flip between ON / OFF /
ON / etc.
Read from PLC button (d): Overwrite the contents of
the table with values from the PLC memory location
specified in the Load Raw PLS Table from Data Block
section.
Confirmation is requested before reading the PLC
data. In this example the starting data block is D0,
D10 holds a value of 5, which indicates 10 DWords
will be read:
Write to PLC (e): Overwrite the contents of PLC
memory at the location specified in the Load Raw PLS
Table from Data Block section with the current contents
of the table.
Confirmation is requested before writing data to the
PLC. In this example, there are 5 rows of data. A 5 is
written o D10 and the 10 DWords of data is written
to D0 to D9.
Insert Row button (f): (Insert button in main dialog) add an empty Step above the
currently highlighted Step in the table.
Append Row (g): Add a new row after the current last step in the table.
Delete Row button (h): (Remove button in main dialog) delete the currently
highlighted Step from the table.
Clear Table button (i): Will display a confirmation dialog explaining it will delete all
rows and the table will end up with a single row with values of 0 for the Greater Than
or Equal to and 0 for and Less Than.
Import button (j): (Import button in main dialog) Import the contents of the PLS
Table from a CSV file. The format of the import file is two numbers per line, separated
by a comma or whitespace, all numbers must be in ascending order, and a maximum
of 64 lines.

12-112

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPLS, continued
NOTE: Any available text editor or an Excel worksheet can be used to create a CSV file. Just save the file
as a .CSV file type.

Example of how data should be formatted in the CSV file:
a.
Two integer values per row
separated by comma (surrounded
by any amount of white space) or
just white space.
b.
You can also have empty rows.
c.
You can also use a line comment
starting with two forward slashes: // This is a comment
Example on how to format the data per line in the CSV file:
a.
Simple comma separated values 1 and 2. (See line one below.)
b.
Some white space before and/or after the comma is OK (see line two below).
c.
Whitespace before, between, and after is OK also (i.e. comma is optional, see
line three below).
d. Comment line (no data allowed). (see line four below.)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-113

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPRESET
A Load Preset Table for Table Driven Output (TDOPRESET) instruction contains a series of
steps that are processed in the order they appear in the table. These steps compare the current
count value of the specified Master Register, which can be a High-speed Counter, Timer or
AXIS Current position value, to the Preset Count in the Step, and when the count values
match, the step action is performed on the selected discrete output and the next step in the
table becomes the active step. Each Preset Table can have up to 64 steps. Each Preset Table
compares the count value of one Master Register counter and can drive one High-speed I/O
discrete output.
Once a Preset table has been enabled for a Table Driven Output, it will continue to control
that output even if the input logic is no longer ON. Use the Deconfigure Table Driven
Output (TDODECFG) instruction to stop the Preset table from controlling the Table Driven
Output.
There are two items that must be configured externally to the instruction in order to use
the Preset feature: (a) A Table Driven Output Device and (b) a Master Register Device.
Both of these items are setup in the Setup BRX High-speed I/O dialog that is in the BRX
Onboard I/O section of the System Configuration. This dialog can be opened directly in
the instruction from the (c) Configure Table Driven Outputs… and (d) Configure Master
Register Device…buttons.

12-114

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPRESET, continued
After the (a) Table Driven Output Device and (b) Master Register Device have been configured
(see the High-speed I/O Hardware Configuration section for more details), the TDOPRESET
instruction may now be used.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-115

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPRESET, continued
Initialize .InputValOffset: A positive value in this field means that the entries will act at a lower
value than shown. A negative value means that the entries will act at a higher value than shown.
For example: An offset of 500 is configured in the .InputValOffset field. The first entry is
configured to SET the output at 1000. When the table runs, the output will actually SET at a
value of 500. In the .InputValOffset was configured for -500, the first output would have SET
at a value of 1500.

Source Register Scaling: The TDOPRESET instruction can use the raw count value from the
specified Master Register or, if scaling was enabled in the High-speed I/O setup, the scaled value
to do its comparisons.

•
Raw Pulse Counts (No Scaling) (a): Select this option to enter the Preset Count values in the
Table as raw count values. The image above shows (a) Raw Pulse Counts (No Scaling) selected,
indicating the Master Register scaling was not enabled. The (b) Raw Preset Count Steps table entry
shows that the values entered are based on raw counts.

12-116

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPRESET, continued
•
Use Source Register Scaling: If the Master Register has been configured to scale the current count
value you can use the scaled values in the table by selecting this option and entering values that are scaled
the same as the Master Register. The image below shows (a) Use Source Register Scaling selected,
indicating the Master Register scaling was enabled. The (b) Scaled Preset Steps table entry shows that
the entries are based on the scaled values.

Load Raw Preset Table from Data Block (a): When enabled, the values used by the Preset

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-117

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPRESET, continued
Table come from the values stored in the specified memory range. This allows for a more
dynamic control of the Preset function.
•
Table Start Address (b): The beginning address in PLC memory where the Preset table data is
stored. This must be a block of Signed DWords.
•
Number of Preset Steps (c): The number of steps in the Preset table that are stored in PLC
memory. A Preset Table can have up to 64 steps.
•
Table Data Block Range (d): Using the two values above, this shows the range of PLC memory
that will be used as the Preset data table. With a starting address of D0 and a total of 10 steps, the
memory range is D0 to D19. Data formatting will be discussed in the PLC TDO Preset Table Editor
section found later in this section.
NOTE: The PLC TDO Preset Table Editor button is available only when the Do-more! Designer software is
connected and Online with the BRX CPU.

•
PLC TDO Preset Table Editor button (e): Click to open the PLC TDO Preset Table Editor
which allows you to edit the data values in the specified Data Block. The data configuration options
on this dialog (Preset Count, Preset Function, Function Parameter) are the same as the main dialog.
Detailed information of the PLC TDO Preset Table Editor dialog screen is discussed later in this
section.

Raw (or Scaled) Preset Count Entries Output xx when: This is the table of entries for Raw

12-118

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPRESET, continued
(or Scaled) Preset Count Steps (a): This is the list of steps that determines the Table Driven
Output state when the TDOPRESET is running.
•

Preset count: The pulse count values in the table can be constants or variables. If variables are

used, the instruction must be disabled and re-enabled after the variable value has been changed. This
can be any value in the range of -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.
•
Preset Function (b): Select the action to perform on the Table Driven Output when the Step is
triggered.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
•

Set: Turns ON the Table Driven Output.
Reset: Turns OFF the Table Driven Output.
Reset Table/Acc: Performs a reset of the Master Register which sets its current
count value to the Initial Reset Value specified in the Timer/Counter Function
setup, and sets the current step in the Preset Table to Step 0.
Pulse On: Turns ON the Table Driven Output for the amount of time
specified in the Function Parameter, which is the duration of the output pulse
in microseconds (1 to 16,777,215).
Pulse Off: Turns OFF the Table Driven Output for the amount of time
specified in the Function Parameter, which is the duration of the output pulse
in microseconds (1 to 16,777,215).
Toggle: Inverts the state of the Table Driven Output. If the Table Driven
Output is currently ON, it is turned OFF, or it is turned ON if it is currently
turned OFF.

Several things to consider when using this instruction:

Unlike the TDOPLS instruction, the values in the entry table do not have to
be increasing with the Entry numbers. The table runs step by step in order
of entry. Therefore, if the value in a higher entry is lower than a previous
entry, the current count value must be decreasing in order for the step to be

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-119

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPRESET, continued

completed. For example, if Step 0 is configured as Set at 500 and Step 1 is
configured as Reset at 0, the Output will be Set ON when the current counts
reach 500 or more and the Output will be Reset to OFF when the current
counts decrease to 0 or less.
In order for the table to run continuously, the final entry function must be to
(X) Reset Count. After the step with the Reset Count function is complete,
the table will start over at Step 0. When the TDOPRESET instruction is
disabled and re-enabled, it will start over at Step 0.
If the Scaling was configured for the Master Register counter and the “Use
Source Register Scaling” option was specified, the Step values will be entered as
scaled values and no conversion will be necessary.

•

Insert button (c): add an empty Step above the currently highlighted Step in the table.

•

Remove button (d): delete the currently highlighted Step from the table.

•
Import button (e): Import the contents of the Preset table from a CSV file. The format of the
import file is two or three numbers per line, separated by a comma or whitespace, and a maximum of 64
lines. Please review the CSV file formatting information later in this TDOPRESET instruction section,
under the section explaining the PLC TDO Preset Table Editor dialog.

On Success (f):
•

Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become TRUE
when instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes successfully. The
specified bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Success bit will
remain ON even if the instruction input logic goes OFF.

•

JMP to Stage: When instruction parameters are properly entered and the instruction completes
successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.

On Error (g):
•
Set Bit: The bit will become FALSE when the instruction is enabled and will become when proper
instruction parameters are NOT properly entered or the instruction IS NOT completed successfully.
The specified bit is enabled with a SET operation, not an OUT operation. The On Error bit will
remain ON even if the instruction input logic goes OFF.
•
JMP to Stage: When proper instruction parameters are NOT properly entered or the instruction
IS NOT completed successfully, the PLC will jump to that stage.
NOTE: Initial values for Preset Table Start Address, and Number of Table Rows to be Read (or Number of
Preset Steps) come from the main instruction editor. If these values are changed while editing the table
data with this dialog, those values will be updated on the main instruction editor when this dialog is closed.
NOTE: If the Number of Preset Steps is a variable (memory address), the value in that location is read and
the data in that number of rows will be read from the PLC to prefill the table. The Also Write Table Length
to PLC selection will be enabled and that variable location will be prefilled here so that when the table data is
written back to the PLC this location will be updated as well.

12-120

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPRESET, continued
PLC TDO Preset Table Editor

•

Source Register Scaling (a): Same as the main dialog. The TDOPRESET instruction can use the
raw count value from the specified Master Register or, if scaling was enabled in the High-speed
I/O setup, it can use the scaled value to do its comparisons.

•

Raw (or Scaled) Preset Count Steps (b): Same as main dialog. This is the list of steps that
determines the Table Driven Output state when the TDOPRESET is running.

Preset count: The PLC TDO Preset Table Editor is reading a block of D
memory, it is editing the values that go into that block. The Preset Count in
the PLC TDO Preset Table Editor can only be contant values. This value can
be in the range of -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.
Preset Functions: Select the action to perform on the Table Driven Output
when the Step is triggered.
•
Set: Turns ON the Table Driven Output.
•
Reset: Turns OFF the Table Driven Output.
•
Reset Table/Acc: Performs a reset of the Master Register which sets its
current count value to the Initial Reset Value specified in the Timer/
Counter Function setup, and sets the current step in the Preset Table
to Step 0.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-121

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPRESET, continued
•

12-122

Pulse On: Turns ON the Table Driven Output for the amount of time
specified in the Function Parameter, which is the duration of the output
pulse in microseconds (1 to 16,777,215).
•
Pulse Off: Turns OFF the Table Driven Output for the amount of time
specified in the Function Parameter, which is the duration of the output
pulse in microseconds (1 to 16,777,215).
•
Toggle: Inverts the state of the Table Driven Output. If the Table
Driven Output is currently ON, it is turned OFF, or it is turned ON if
it is currently turned OFF.
Read from PLC button (c): Overwrite the contents of the table with values
from the PLC memory location specified in the Load Raw Preset Table from
Data Block section.
•
Confirmation is requested before
reading the PLC data. In this
example the starting data block
is D0, D30 is the memory
address that stores the Number
of Preset Steps. This has a value
of 4. Eight DWords will be read
from the PLC starting at D0:
Write to PLC (d): overwrite the contents
of PLC memory at the location specified
in the Load Raw Preset Table from Data
Block section with the current contents
of the table.
•
Confirmation is requested before
writing data to the PLC. The four
rows of data are stored in D0 to
D7
•
Confirmation request before
writing data to the PLC with the
Also write Table Length to PLC
enabled. In this example, there are
4 rows of data. A 4 is written to
D30 and the 8 DWords of data is
written to D0 to D7.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPRESET, continued
5.

Format of the Preset Data Read from PLC or Written to the PLC memory
addresses: When using the PLC TDO Preset Table Editor, the data values
in the specified memory locations must be formatted properly. Improperly
formatted data will generate a warning message. The following example shows
a range of D0 to D7, which corresponds to a starting Preset Data Table address
of D0 and 4 steps. Each step is comprised of two DWords. Each Preset table
entry consists of 2 signed DWord locations:
•
The first DWord location corresponds to the Preset Count where the
specified command will take place. This can be any value between
-2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.
•
The second DWord location contains the Function Code for the
command to be performed and the additional data required by a
command code.
•
The upper BYTE (Byte 0) contains one of the following values to
indicate the action:
0: Set
1: Reset
2: Pulse ON
3: Pulse OFF
4: Toggle
5: Reset Table & Acc
•
When using the Pulse ON or Pulse OFF command, the lower 3
BYTEs of the second DWord location will contain the amount of
time (in microseconds) the pulse will be ON or OFF respectively.
•
Example: This shows the Preset Table filled in with the desired values:
Line 1
Step 0: Preset Count of 500. Set = Code 0.
Line 2
Step 1: Preset Count of 300. Reset = Code 1.
Line 3
Step 2: Preset Count of 500. Pulse ON = Code 2.
Function Parameter of 1,000,000.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-123

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

TDOPRESET, continued
Line 4
Step 3: Preset Count of 1000. Reset Table/Acc = Code 5.
•
The following Data View shows the Native values for the Data Block
range of D0 to D7 associated with our example:

•

The following Data View shows the second DWord of each step in
BCD/HEX data type:
D1 corresponds to SET (code 0) of Step 0.
D3 corresponds to RESET (code 1) of Step 1.
D5 corresponds to Pulse ON (code 2) of Step 2.
D7 corresponds to Reset Table/Acc (code 5) of Step 3.

•

The upper Byte represents the Function Code. The lower three Bytes
represent the Function Parameter value. 0Xuullllll.
For Step 0, function code 0 (Set) is uu = 00.
For Step 1, function code 1 (Reset) is uu = 01.
For Step 2, function code 2 (Pulse ON) is uu = 02. Pulse ON has a
function parameter of time in microseconds, which is llllll = 0F4240.
Converting Hex 0F4240 to Decimal is 1,000,000.
For Step 3, function code 5 (Reset Table/Acc) is uu = 05.
If, for example, we want to change the Pulse ON to last 2,500,000
microseconds, D5 would have a BCD/HEX value = 0X022625A0.

•

12-124

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 12: BRX Do-more! Onboard Motion Control and Highspeed I/O

TDOPRESET, continued
•

Insert Row button (e): (Insert button in main dialog) add an empty Step above the currently
highlighted Step in the table.

•

Append Row (f): Add a new row after the current last step in the table.

•

Delete Row button (g): (Remove button in main dialog) delete the currently highlighted Step
from the table.

•

Clear Table button (h): Will display a confirmation dialog explaining it will delete all rows and
the table will end up with a single row to Set at a Preset Value of 0.

•

Import button (i): (Import button in main dialog) Import the contents of the PLS Table from a
CSV file. The format of the import file is two or three numbers per line, separated by a comma
or whitespace, with a maximum of 64 lines.

Below is an example of how data should be formatted in the CSV file.

Column A holds the Preset Count. This can be any value between
-2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
Column B holds the Preset Function code. The following table shows
the available function codes.
Preset Function Codes
0

SET

No function parameter needed

RESET

No function parameter needed

PULSE ON

Requires function parameter.
Time in microseconds: 1 to 16,777,215

PULSE OFF

Requires function parameter.
Time in microseconds: 1 to 16,777,215

TOGGLE

No function parameter needed

RESET TABLE
& COUNT

No function parameter needed

Column C holds the Function Parameter, which is the amount of time
(in microseconds) the pulse will be ON or OFF. This is required for the
PULSE ON and PULSE OFF function codes.
Column D holds the comments, which is indicated by the “//” before
the text.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

12-125

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX Do-more!
Communications

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Overview................................................................................................................... 13-3
Terminology.............................................................................................................. 13-3
General Concepts..................................................................................................... 13-4
USB Communications............................................................................................... 13-5
Serial Communications............................................................................................. 13-6
RS-232....................................................................................................................... 13-6
RS-485....................................................................................................................... 13-8
Serial Port Settings................................................................................................. 13-10
Serial Protocols....................................................................................................... 13-13
MRX Instruction...................................................................................................... 13-16
MWX Instruction.................................................................................................... 13-18
K-Sequence............................................................................................................. 13-20
ASCII........................................................................................................................ 13-21
STREAMIN Instruction............................................................................................ 13-22
STREAMOUT Instruction......................................................................................... 13-24
Ethernet.................................................................................................................. 13-26
Wiring..................................................................................................................... 13-27
IP Addressing and Subnets.................................................................................... 13-27
Port Numbers......................................................................................................... 13-28
Ethernet Protocols.................................................................................................. 13-29
PEERLINK Instruction.............................................................................................. 13-29
Do-more! Protocol.................................................................................................. 13-30

Table of Contents

1
2
3
4
13
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
E

RX............................................................................................................................ 13-30
WX........................................................................................................................... 13-34
Modbus TCP/IP....................................................................................................... 13-38
MRX Instruction...................................................................................................... 13-40
MWX Instruction.................................................................................................... 13-42
HOST Ethernet Protocol......................................................................................... 13-44
DLRX....................................................................................................................... 13-45
DLWX...................................................................................................................... 13-47
EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging)........................................................................... 13-49
EtherNet/IP Client (Master)................................................................................... 13-52
SMTP – EMAIL......................................................................................................... 13-57
EMAIL...................................................................................................................... 13-60

13-2

BRX User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Communications
Overview
The purpose of this chapter is to help the user gain an understanding of the communications
capabilities of the BRX MPU.
The BRX MPU is capable of both serial and Ethernet communications using a wide variety of
protocols. Listed in the table below are the supported methods and protocols.

Communications
Serial RS-232/RS-485

Ethernet

Do-more! Protocol (Server)

Do-more! Protocol (Client, Server)

Modbus RTU (Client, Server)

Modbus TCP (Client, Server)

K-Sequence (Server)

HOST ECOM Protocol (Client, Server)

ASCII (In & Out)

EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging (Client, Server))
Ethernet Remote I/O
SMTP (Email)
SNTP (Time Server)
TCP Raw Packet
UDP Raw Packet

Terminology
During the course of this chapter we will use terminology and phrases that are specific to a
Protocol or Physical Medium the user should understand. By way of explanation we have
included some common terms and definitions in this section. Definitions and explanations of
specific parameters particular to each Protocol will be discussed later in this chapter.
Physical Medium – Wires, radios, cellular service, or satellite link. The physical method
(hardware) on which the data is being transmitted or received. The physical medium
contains no data information. Examples of a physical medium are: RS-232, RS-485 and
Ethernet 10/100 Base T.
Protocol – A Protocol is the specification for the formatting of the data (bits, bytes and
words) being transmitted through the physical medium. Examples of some common industry
protocols are: Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, K-Sequence, DirectNet and EtherNet/IP.
One way to think of the Physical Medium and the Protocol is to liken them to placing a phone
call. The phone call is being placed over wires, cellular service or even perhaps a satellite link.
This is the physical medium. Now if the call was to China, you would say “Hello” in English.
If the person on the other end understands English, they will respond with “Hello”. If the
person on the other end only understands Mandarin Chinese they might respond “Ni Hao”.
If you do not understand Chinese, you will be confused as to what they are saying. This is the
same for a Protocol. If your PLC uses Modbus TCP/IP and you try to talk to a PLC that only
understands EtherNet/IP, then you will not be able to communicate with it. The Protocols
must match in order to communicate.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Client (Master) – A Client is a Master device that requests data from a Server (Slave) device.
Server (Slave) – A Server is a Slave device that responds to a request from a Client (Master)
device.
UDP – User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is part of the Transport Layer of the Internet Protocol
Suite. The Transport Layer is Layer 6. UDP is a simple connectionless transport mechanism
for Ethernet packets. Checksums are used for data integrity, however it has no error correction
or guarantee of delivery. It is considerably faster than TCP/IP due to these factors. It is widely
used when data is time sensitive because dropped packets may be preferable to retries and
delays.
TCP – TCP or TCP/IP is part of the Transport Layer of the Internet Protocol Suite. The
Transport Layer is Layer 6. TCP is defined as a reliable, ordered and an error checked delivery
method. TCP/IP is most often used when the data integrity is more important than raw speed.
Field Device – A device external to the BRX MPU.

General Concepts
The BRX Do-more! MPU is capable of both serial and Ethernet communications to a wide
variety of field devices such as HMIs, SCADA systems, PLCs, barcode readers and scales.
The following sections of this chapter will be of significant help to you when connecting and
communicating with the various protocols needed for these types of devices. For advanced
users it is possible to write custom protocols using the raw commands provided in the Do-more!
Designer software. So a thorough working knowledge of the protocol is required to accomplish
this.
The BRX Do-more! MPU has tightly coupled security features incorporated into it to protect
your installation. See the manual section for each protocol and also the Do-more! Designer
software help file for more information on password protection and Protocol Specific Memory.
Multiple user accounts are supported and logged when accessed. When programming, session
based communication with unique IDs is utilized to prevent unauthorized access.
The Do-more! Protocol can access the full memory structure and is capable of utilizing a
security account to protect the data. Some HMIs and SCADA software such as C-more,
C-more Micro and Point of View, can utilize the Do-more! Protocol for enhanced security
while accessing the full memory area.
Protocol Specific memory areas are blocked out of the User Memory when using Modbus
RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, HOST ECOM and K-Sequence protocols. These memory areas are
only accessible externally by using the specific protocol that corresponds to the type of memory
being accessed. They are usable by the programmer to pass data externally when using third
party devices. This is discussed in more detail in each Protocol section later in this chapter.

13-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

USB Communications
The POM slot USB port is useful for programming the BRX Do-more! MPU. It is compatible
with Desktop PCs and Laptops utilizing USB 2.0 or higher, communicating through USB
Type A to USB Type B cable. It does not support connections to other USB devices such as
printers.
The POM slot USB port relies on drivers included with Windows, so there are no drivers to
download. It truly is plug and play.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Serial Communications
The RS-232/485 port is a removable three-pin screw terminal
block located on the front of the CPU. This port is software
selectable to communicate as RS-232 or as RS-485. In the
RS-485 mode you can also enable a 120 Ohm termination
resistor if needed.
The RS-232/485 port can be connected to the Do-more!
Designer programming software, Modbus RTU master or
slave devices, DirectLogic PLCs via K-Sequence protocol,
as well as devices that send or receive non-sequenced ASCII
strings or characters.

RS-232
RS-232 is a single point wiring standard that can be used to
connect external devices to the PLC.
DTE

RS-232/485

TX
RX

GND

1 0V
2 RXD
TX/D+ 3 TXD
RX/D-

Pinout

RS232

1
2
3

GND
RXD
TXD

DTE
0V 1
RXD 2
TXD 3

Built-in RS-232 Specifications

13-6

Port Name

RS-232/RS-485

Description

Non-isolated Serial port that can communicate via RS-232 or
RS-485 (software selectable). Includes ESD protection and builtin surge protection.

Supported Protocols

Do-more!™ Protocol (Default)
Modbus RTU (Client & Server)
K-Sequence (Slave)
ASCII (In & Out)

Data Rates

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud

Default Settings

RS-232, 115200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Station #1

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

Port Type

Removable 3-pin terminal strip 3.5 mm pitch

RS-232 TXD

RS-232 Transmit output

RS-232 RXD

RS-232 Receive input

RS-232 GND

Logic ground

RS-232 Maximum Output Load (TXD/RTS)

3kΩ, 1000pf

RS-232 Minimum Output Voltage Swing

±5V

RS-232 Output Short Circuit Protection

±15mA

Cable Requirements

RS-232 use P/N L19772-XXX from automationdirect.com

Maximum Distance

30 meters (100 feet); 6 meters (20 foot) recommended maximum

Replacement Connector

ADC Part # BX-RTB03S

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Serial Communications, continued
The manner in which external devices are wired to the CPU depend on whether the device
is considered to be Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communications Equipment
(DCE). The CPU is considered a DTE device. Most Modbus or ASCII devices being
connected to the CPU will also be considered a DTE device and will need to swap TX and RX
(as shown below), but you should always consult the documentation of that device to verify.
If a device such as a Modem, which is a DCE device, is placed between the CPU and another
Modbus or ASCII device it will most likely require connecting the signals straight across (TX
to TX and RX to RX). Again, this can differ from manufacturer to manufacturer so always
consult the documentation before wiring the devices together.
RS-232 is a ground referenced signal and as such it is susceptible to noise and ground
differentials which may make it unsuitable for use in some circumstances.
The wiring for RS-232 is shown below. Please note that there are no connections for RTS
(Ready To Send), CTS (Clear To Send) or for port powered devices (+5VDC).
DTE

RS-232/485

TX
RX

GND

1 GND
2 RX
TX/D+ 3 TX
RX/D-

BRX
MPU

DTE
GND (0V) 1
RX 2
TX 3
Field
Device

NOTE: Recommended distance between RS-232 devices is less than 6 meters (20 feet) in industrial
environments. For longer distances, please consider using RS-485 or Ethernet.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

RS-485
RS-485 is a multi-point wiring standard that can be used to connect external devices to the
PLC.

Built-in RS-485 Specifications
Port Name

RS-232/RS-485

Description

Non-isolated Serial port that can communicate via RS-232 or
RS-485 (software selectable). Includes ESD protection and builtin surge protection.

Supported Protocols

Do-more!™ Protocol (Default)
Modbus RTU (Client & Server)
K-Sequence (Slave)
ASCII (In & Out)

Data Rates

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud

Default Settings

RS-232, 115200bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Station #1

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

Port Type

Removable 3-pin terminal strip 3.5 mm pitch

RS-485 Station Addresses

1–247

RS-485 TXD-/RXD-

RS-485 transceiver low

RS-485 TXD+/RXD+

RS-485 transceiver High

RS-485 GND

Logic ground

RS-485 Input Impedance

19kΩ

RS-485 Maximum Load

50 transceivers, 19kΩ each, 120Ω termination

RS-485 Output Short Circuit Protection

±250mA, thermal shut-down protection

RS-485 Electrostatic Discharge Protection

±8kV per IEC1000-4-2

RS-485 Electrical Fast Transient Protection

±2kV per IEC1000-4-4

RS-485 Minimum Differential Output Voltage

1.5 V with 60Ω load

RS-485 Fail Safe Inputs

Logic high input state if inputs are unconnected

RS-485 Maximum Common Mode Voltage

-7.5 V to 12.5 V

Cable Requirements

RS-485 use P/N L19827-XXX from automationdirect.com

Maximum Distance

1000 meters (3280 feet)

Replacement Connector

ADC Part # BX-RTB03S

The RS-485 port is useful for connecting multiple devices on one network and/or connecting
devices to the CPU at much longer distances than RS-232. The RS-485 standard supports
distances of up to 1000 meters without requiring a repeater. The distance can be increased by
placing an RS-485 repeater on the network, if necessary. The RS-485 Port on the CPU can
support up to 50 devices, depending on the load of each device (assuming a 19kΩ load for each
device).

13-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications
RS-485 utilizes a differential signal which makes it much more immune to noise and grounding
issues than RS-232 and is therefore a much better choice when available for communications.
This port only supports RS-485, 2-wire connections. For 4-wire RS-485 or RS-422, a
converter, such as an FA-ISOCON must be used.
The wiring for RS-485 is shown below. Please note that there are no connections for RTS
(Ready To Send), CTS (Clear To Send) or for port powered devices (+5VDC).
RS-232/485

TX
RX

GND

Signal GND

RX/D-

TXD – / RXD –

TX/D+

TXD+ / RXD+

Signal GND
TXD – / RXD –
TXD+ / RXD+
RXD –

Belden 9841, or
equivalent, is
recommend for
RS-485 networks.

6
1

RTS +

Jump RTS + and CTS +
RTS –

RXD+

Jump RTS – and CTS –

TXD+
CTS +
5

10
15

CTS –

TXD –

DL06 CPU Port 2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Serial Port Settings
Setting up your serial port is straightforward. Follow the simple steps below.
1.

You must know what physical medium your connecting device uses.

Establish which protocol your device supports.

3. Wire the physical medium using the wiring diagrams for either RS-232 or RS-485 on the
previous pages.
4.

Select supported protocol from the configuration list in the Do-more! Designer software.

Select baud rate, data bits, stop bits and parity for your device.

6. Set the baud, data bits, stop bits and parity to match your device and Do-more! Designer
software.
7.

If your device is a Client device such as an HMI, then your setup is completed.

8. If your device is a Server device and the BRX Do-more! MPU will be requesting data from it,
then some ladder logic must be written. Please refer to the specific section for your chosen protocol.
The Do-more! Designer software help file is also a good resource for setting up communications.

To set up your serial communications port in Do-more! Designer, from the PLC drop-down
menu at the top of the screen, select System Configuration.

13-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications
The System Configuration dialog will appear. Within this dialog box you can (a) pick the
Protocol and (b) Port Type, whether the port should be used for RS-232 or RS-485.

Once you have selected the desired Protocol and Port Type, click (c) the button labeled Change
@IntSerial Device Settings.
The Edit Serial Port Settings dialog (right) will appear.
Here you will configure the serial port settings to match
any additional device(s) settings. These settings must
match exactly in order for the devices to communicate
properly.
Unit ID – This is the Modbus protocol identification number
when the BRX Do-more! MPU functions as a server device.
For RS-232 this value should always be set to 1. For RS-485,
this value will depend on how many other devices are present
on the network and how they are to be numbered.
Baud Rate – The rate at which the data is transmitted. The
higher the number the faster the data will be transmitted.
Choosing a lower value can help with issues when the data is
not being received reliably.

Available Baud Rate choices: 115200, 57600, 38400,
19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200
Data Bits – The number of bits in each character.

Available choices: 7 or 8.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Edit Serial Port Settings Parameters, continued
Stop Bits – The number of bits sent to denote the end of each character.
Available choices: 1 or 2.
Parity – The method of error detection used during transmission.
Available choices: None, Odd, Even
Transmit Control – Designates when data will be transmitted.

Available choices include:
• Unconditional – Data will be transmitted as soon as it reaches the output buffer
• Wait for CTS – Data will be transmitted when the CTS line is asserted.
• Delayed 5ms, delayed 50ms, delayed 250ms, delayed 500ms – After data reaches
the output buffer, the RTS line will be asserted, and the transmitting of the data
will be delayed by the selected number of milliseconds.
RTS Control – This setting is unused in BRX Do-more! MPUs and should always be set to Follows
Transmitter.
Timeout – how many milliseconds should the instruction wait for the remote Modbus RTU Server
to respond, this can be any constant from 0 to 32767.
Retries – how many times should the instruction retry the communication with the remote Modbus
RTU Server, this can be any constant from 0 to 255.
Inter-packet Delay – the amount of time (in microseconds) the Modbus/RTU Client will place
between packets as they are sent, this can be any be any constant value between 0 and 65535.

13-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Serial Protocols
The BRX Do-more! MPU has several Protocol choices for
communicating to external devices. In this section we will
go over the choices and describe each choice.

Serial RS-232/RS-485
Do-more! Protocol (Server)
Modbus RTU (Client, Server)

Do-more! Protocol

K-Sequence (Server)

The Do-more! protocol is a proprietary protocol that is used
ASCII (In & Out)
exclusively by the Do-more! family of controllers. This is
a very feature rich and secure protocol that is used to communicate between the Do-more!
Designer software and Do-more! controllers. It can also be used to communicate between
multiple Do-more! controllers or to other devices such as the C-more HMI, and some SCADA
systems such as Point of View support the Do-more! Protocol.

Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU is a protocol overseen by Modbus.org. This is an open standard, meaning that
anyone can utilize it freely.
Modbus RTU can be utilized as either a client or server configuration. It supports multiple
server (slave) devices on RS-485 and a single server (slave) device on RS-232.

Modbus RTU Server (Slave)
As a Modbus RTU Server (Slave), the BRX MPU is functioning as a listening/replying device.
When an external Client (Master) device requests data from the BRX MPU, the MPU will
reply with the appropriate data.
All Modbus data is stored in four sets of registers in the BRX MPU. This memory area is
blocked off specifically for Modbus communications. You must place data in these registers in
order for a Modbus device to be able to access it.
The Modbus data area is loosely data typed and casting or other instructions such as PUBLISH
and SUBSCRIBE can be utilized to convert data in this area to the correct data type required.

Modbus
Register Type

Range

Holding Coil

00000–01023

Input Coil

10000–11023

Holding Register

MHR

30000–31047

Input Register

MIR

40000–42047

Please reference the Help file on casting, PUBLISH and SUBSCRIBE.
NOTE: Ranges can be expanded in the Memory Configuration section of the Do-more! Designer software
as needed.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Serial Protocols, continued
The Modbus RTU Server (Slave) supports the following function codes:

Modbus
Function
Code

Description

Read coil

Read discrete inputs

Read holding registers

Read input registers

Write single coil

Write single registers

Read exception status

Write multiple coils

Write multiple registers

Mask write registers

Modbus RTU Client (Master)
As a Modbus RTU Client (Master), the BRX MPU is requesting data from a Modbus RTU
Server (Slave) device. In order for this to work, you need to know quite a few things about your
Server device such as the function codes that it supports, the data registers that are accessible
and possibly the Unit ID or Slave Address.
Server Device
Unit ID 1

BRX MPU
Client Device

Server Device
Unit ID 2

BRX MPU used as a Modbus RTU Client (Master) Example

13-14

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Serial Protocols, continued
NOTE: Only one Modbus RTU Client (Master) can be on a network.

Opening the System Configuration dialog box you will
find the Serial Port Configuration section where you can
select the required protocol. Setting the serial port as (a)
Modbus RTU Server (Slave), select (b) to create a the
device @IntSerialDevice. This device will handle all of the
communications with the external Modbus Servers (Slaves)
through the serial port on the front of the BRX MPU.
As a Modbus RTU Client (Master), you do not have to
sequence the MRX read and MWX write instructions.
You can just drop them into your program and they will
work in a round robin manner. However, sequencing the
instructions will give you better control and allow you
to build complex communication patterns to optimally
communicate with your devices.
Selecting (c) Modbus RTU Client (Master) creates the
device @IntSerModbusClient. Clicking on (d) brings up
the EditModbus RTU Client Settings dialog box (below).
Here you can configure Modbus Protocol Settings.
Timeout – Time in milliseconds that the instruction waits
for the remote Modbus RTU Server to respond, this
can be any constant from 0 to 32767.
Retries – The number of retries of the instruction to
communicate with the remote Modbus RTU Server,
this can be any constant from 0 to 255.
Inter-packet Delay – Time, in microseconds, that the
Modbus/RTU Client will place between packets as
they are sent, this can be any be any constant value
between 0 and 65535.
Communication
instructions in Do-more!
Designer have Success and Error feedback built in so that
you can either set a bit or move to a Stage if you are doing
stage style programming. There are examples of using
Stage (state) programming in the software Help file that
show how you could use this to implement a complex
communications routine.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

MRX Instruction
The MRX instruction, found in the Instruction Tool Box under
the Protocol-Standard tab (right and below), is used to read from
a Modbus RTU Server (Slave). (For more detailed information
please refer to the Do-more! Designer Help files.)

Device – The device associated with the physical port that you want to communicate from.
@IntSerModbusClient is the name of the device associated with the built in serial port when set
as a Modbus Client (Master).
Unit ID – The ID number of the Server (Slave) device that the BRX MPU will talk to. Typically
this is 1 for RS-232. For RS-485, this number could change depending on which device
number you are talking to on the network.
Function Code – Select from the drop-down list one of the following Modbus function codes
to use:
1 - Read Coils
2 - Read Discrete Inputs
3 - Read Holding Registers
4 - Read Input Registers
7 - Read Exception Status

13-16

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

MRX Instruction, continued
Modbus Address 0... + offset value entered below:
From Modbus Offset Address – The address in the Modbus Server (Slave) that you will be reading
from. This address may be offset by a value of +1 depending on how the manufacturer followed the
Modbus standard..
Number of Modbus Coils/ Registers – Based on the Function Code selected, this selection specifies
how many consecutive elements to read. For example, if using function code 3, read holding
registers, with an offset of 1, your request starts with MHR1, which corresponds to Modbus address
400001.
To Do-more Memory Address – Specifies the beginning address of a range of bits or numeric
locations in the MPU where the data that is read will be stored. This data type (bit or register) must
match the type expected by the Function Code.

Do-more Range – This is the ending register where the data will be stored at, calculated by
taking the To Do-more Memory address and adding the Number of Modbus Coils/Registers
value to it.
Enable – Designates how this instruction will operate. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge – Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one
time. Typically, this instruction will take more than one controller scan to complete. Configured this
way the instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval – Select this option to have this instruction run as long as the
instruction has power flow. After the instruction has initially run, if the instruction still has power
flow, the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the specified amount of time before running
again. The following options select how much time (in milliseconds) to wait between successive runs.
A value of zero milliseconds (0ms) means the instruction will re-run immediately.

On Success – When the instruction completes successfully this action will be performed.
On Error – When the instruction does not successfully complete, this action will be performed.
Exception Response – For errors where the message was received properly by the Server (Slave)
device, this will contain a value to indicate why the Server rejected the message. This can aid
in troubleshooting the issue.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

MWX Instruction
The MWX instruction, found in the Instruction Tool
Box under Protocol - Standard (right and below), is used
to write to a Modbus RTU Server (Slave). (For specific
information please refer to the Do-more! Designer help
files.)

Device – The device associated with the physical port that you want to communicate from.
@IntSerModbusClient is the name of the device associated with the built in serial port when
set as a Modbus Client (Master).
Unit ID – The ID number of the Server (Slave) device the BRX MPU is talking to. Typically
this is 1 unless there are multiple devices on the network..
Function Code – Select from the drop-down list one of the following Modbus function codes
to use:
5 - Write Single Coil
6 - Write Single Register
15 - Write Multiple Coils
16 - Write Multiple Registers

13-18

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications
Modbus Address 0... + offset value entered below:
To Modbus Offset Address – The starting register to which you will be writing data. This address
may be offset by a value of +1 depending on how the manufacturer followed the Modbus standard.
Number of Modbus Coils/ Registers – This selection specifies how many consecutive elements to
write from the Modbus Offset Address. For example, if using function code 6,write a single register,
with an offset of 1, it would write a value to Modbus address 400001.
From Do-more Memory Address – specifies the beginning address of a range of bits or numeric
locations in the MPU to where the data will be written. This data type (bit or register) must match
the type expected by the Function Code.

Do-more Range – This is the ending register from where the data will be written, calculated
by taking the From Do-more! Memory address and adding the Number of Modbus Coils/
Registers value to it.
Enable – Designates how this instruction will operate. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge - Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one
time. Typically, this instruction will take more than one controller scan to complete. Configured this
way the instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval - Select this option to have this instruction run as long as the
instruction has power flow. After the instruction has initially run, if the instruction still has power
flow, the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the specified amount of time before running
again. The following options select how much time (in milliseconds) to wait between successive runs.
A value of 0ms means the instruction will re-run immediately.

On Success – When the instruction completes successfully this action will be performed.
On Error – When the instruction does not complete successfully this action will be performed
Exception Response – For errors where the message was received properly by the Server (Slave)
device, this will contain a value to indicate why the Server rejected the message. This can aid
in troubleshooting the error issue.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

K-Sequence
Server
The BRX Do-more! MPU can serve as a K-Sequence server to communicate to legacy devices
that utilize the K-Sequence protocol such as DirectLogic PLC’s, C-more HMI, SCADA
systems, etc.
All K-Sequence data is stored in four sets of registers in the BRX Do-more! MPU. The memory
area is blocked off specifically for K-Sequence communications. You must place data in these
registers in order for a K-Sequence Client device to be able to access it.
The K-Sequence data area is loosely data typed. Instructions such as Publish and Subscribe are
used to communicate with a K-Sequence Client and then casting can be utilized to convert data
in this area to the proper data type needed as well. Please see the Help file for more information
on Casting, PUBLISH and SUBSCRIBE.

K-Sequence
Register Type

Range

Input Register

DLX

0–777

Output Register

DLY

0–777

Internal Coil Register

DLC

0–777

Internal Word Register

DLV

0–3777

NOTE: Ranges can be expanded in the Memory Configuration section of the Do-more! Designer software
as needed.

13-20

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

ASCII

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

The BRX Do-more! MPU can communicate with devices
that utilize a non-sequenced or a custom protocol. When
using ASCII messaging it is important to know how the
external device communicates. This will require knowledge
of how the external device expects to send and receive the
data. Most ASCII devices have specification guidelines
in the user manual that explain the methods needed to
facilitate communications. Having this reference handy can
be invaluable, saving time while programming instead of
struggling with getting the communications working.
Utilizing ASCII as a messaging medium requires
that the serial port (a) be set to Program Control.
To configure the port settings select (b) the Change
@IntSerial Device Settings button. This will bring up the
(c) Edit Serial Port Settings dialog. The communications
settings here need to match those of the device you are
communicating with.

Once set, the STREAMIN and STREAMOUT instructions
(right) can be utilized.
One beneficial feature of the BRX Do-more! MPU is that the
serial ports are buffered so that bi-directional data transfer is
possible without needing the external device to pause between
sending and receiving.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-21

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

STREAMIN Instruction
The STREAMIN instruction is found
in the Instruction Tool Box under the
Protocol-Custom/ASCII tab.
Device – The device name associated
with the physical port to which you
want to communicate. @IntSerial is the
name of the device associated with the
built in serial port for ASCII control.
Complete when...
Length is...bytes OR – Specifies the
number of characters received that will
signal the completion of the instruction.
The OR is used if Delimiter(s) received
OR is selected.
Delimiter(s) received OR – Message
characters that once received will signal
the completion of the instruction. The
OR implements:
Exact sequence –
The specified characters must be
receive in the order specified
Any one delimiter(s) – Receipt of any of the specified characters will signal completion.
Trim Delimiter(s) from Output String – Removes the delimiter characters from the Data
Destination.
Network Timeout – The maximum amount of time that the instruction waits for completion.

Advanced – When selected a text box opens on the right. Allows the backspace character to
remove characters from the received string before being placed into the Data Destination.
Data Destination
String Structure – The String memory location for the incoming data to be stored.
Numeric Data Block

Start Address – The offset into the Byte Buffer Data Block to store the incoming data.
Create Byte Buffer – Creates a data block of bytes to store the incoming data.
Buffer Size in Bytes – The maximum number of bytes that will be placed in the Byte
Buffer Data Block.
Number of Bytes Read – Stores the number of bytes that were read into the Byte
Buffer Data Block.
Endian Settings
Swap Byte – Swaps the bytes in each word of incoming data.

13-22

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

STREAMIN Instruction, Continued
Swap Word – Swaps the words in each Double Word of incoming data.

On Success – When the instruction completes successfully this action will be performed.
On Error – When the instruction does not complete successfully this action will be performed.

Example using STREAMIN instruction.
A barcode reader is an example of using STREAMIN and ASCII messaging. The string
“BADC 4567” represented by the barcode is transmitted to the MPU as ASCII text with the
use of the STREAMIN instruction.

BADC 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9



  


Begin
String

NOTE: Using @IntSerial.InQueue > 0 is the best way to trigger the STREAMIN function.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

STREAMOUT Instruction
The STREAMOUT instruction is found in the Instruction Tool Box under the ProtocolCustom/ASCII tab.

Device – The device associated with the physical port from which you want to communicate.
@IntSerial is the name of the device associated with the built in serial port for ASCII control.
Data Source
String Structure – The String memory location that contains the data to be transmitted.
Numeric Data Block
• Create Byte Buffer... – Only available
when Numeric Data Block is selected.
Clicking this button opens Create
Unsigned Byte Data Block box (right).
Here you will name and create a data
block of bytes to store the data to be
transmitted.
• Buffer Start – The offset into the Byte
Buffer Data Block for the data to be
transmitted.
• Number of Bytes to Output – The
number of bytes that will be transmitted.
Endian Settings
•
Swap Byte – Swaps the bytes in each word of incoming data.
•
Swap Word – Swaps the words in each Double Word of incoming data.
Flush INPUT device first – Clears the input buffer to ready it for a return response.

13-24

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Example using STREAMOUT Instruction.
The example below uses the STREAMOUT instruction and ASCII messaging.
A sensor on the conveyor triggers a conveyor jam event in the program. The string “Conveyor
Jam” is transmitted as ASCII text with the use of the STREAMOUT instruction.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Ethernet
The RJ-45 Ethernet port connector is located on the CPU
faceplate. Rated at 10/100 Mbps, it accepts standard CAT5e
cable and has built-in auto-crossover capability; no crossover
cable is required.

Ethernet Port Specifications
Port Name

ETHERNET

Ethernet Port
Type

RJ45, CAT5e, 10/100 BASE-T, Auto
Crossover

Description

Standard transformer isolated Ethernet port
with built-in surge protection

Transfer Rate

10 Mbps (Orange LED) and 100 Mbps
(Green LED)

Port Status LED

LED is solid when network LINK is
established. LED flashes when port is
active (ACT).

Supported
Protocols

Do-more! Protocol
Ethernet Remote I/O
Modbus TCP/IP (Client & Server)
EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging)
HOST ECOM (DirectLogic)
SMTP (Email), SNTP (Time Server)
TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Raw packet)

Cable
Recommendation

C5E-STxxx-xx from AutomationDirect.com

Ethernet Port Numbers

13-26

Modbus TCP/IP

502 (configurable), TCP

EtherNet I/P
(Explicit
Messaging)

44818 (configurable), UDP

HOST ECOM

28784, UDP

Do-more! Protocol

28784, UDP

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Wiring
The Ethernet port on the BRX Do-more! CPU’s utilizes standard networking cables and
devices. Category 5e cabling is preferred. Cables can be either patch (straight through) or
crossover as the BRX Do-more! CPU Ethernet port has Auto MDI detection.
Crossover Cable
10Base-T/100Base-TX
1
8

TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8

OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN

RJ45

GRN/WHT
GRN
OR/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
OR
BRN/WHT
BRN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TD+
TD–
RD+
RD–

RJ45

IP Addressing and Subnets
IP Addresses (used in conjunction with the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address) are
used for network routing. This allows for easy and logical separation of networks. It is outside
of the scope of this user manual to explain how IP Addresses and Subnet masks are configured
for actual usage. There are many books, documents and tools (Subnet calculators) on the
Internet that provide this information. Each facility and network will incorporate their own
rules and guidelines for how their networks are to be configured.
We suggest that users maintain their IP addressing and Subnets according to common
networking practices by using private network addressing when at all possible. Examples of
private addressing IP ranges can be found in the table below.

IP Addressing and Subnets
IP Address Range

Typical Subnet

Classful Description

192.168.0.0–192.168.255.255

255.255.0.0

Class C Network

172.16.0.0–172.31.255.255

255.240.0.0

Class B Network

10.0.0.0–10.255.255.255

255.0.0.0

Class A Network

NOTE: Notice that the IP range of 169.254.0.1 – 169.254.255.254 is not listed above. This range is reserved
for APIPA addressing and is not recommended for use with most networks.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Port Numbers
When doing TCP and UDP/IP communications, there is a Source Port number and
Destination Port number for every message. The Client device must be aware of the
Destination Port Number(s) the Server device is expecting to see, while the Server device must
listen for this Destination Port number. After the Server device has received the message with
the Destination Port Number on which it is listening, it will formulate the return message
(if the applications require this) with the Source Port Number from the message sent as its
Destination Port Number.
It is important to understand a little about the Port numbering concept because many Ethernet
devices, such as routers with firewalls, will block messages with Destination Port numbers that
are not configured for that device. Listed below are the default Port Numbers used in the BRX
Do-more! platform. Some of the Port Numbers are configurable, allowing more flexibility
when going through many different router applications.

Default Port Numbers
Ethernet

Port Numbers

TCP or UDP

Configurable

Peerlink

28784

UDP

Do-more! Protocol (Client, Server)

28784

UDP

Yes1

Modbus TCP (Client, Server)

502

TCP

Yes

HOST ECOM Protocol (Client, Server)

28784

UDP

EtherNet/IP
(Explicit Messaging (Client, Server))

44818

TCP

Yes

Ethernet Remote I/O

28784

UDP

SMTP (Email)

TCP

Yes

SNTP (Time Server)

123

TCP

TCP Raw Packet

TCP

Yes

UDP Raw Packet

UDP

Yes

1 Secondary Ethernet Connection can be enabled for the built-in Ethernet port of a BRX MPU. By default it has a UDP Port Number of
5000. It can be configured to any decimal number between 5000 and 65535, except for 28784.Pur

poses

While all of these protocols can be enabled on the BRX Do-more! CPU Ethernet port, it
should be noted that Ethernet has a finite amount of traffic that can be handled. The amount
of traffic load on the Ethernet port should be considered and polling times for Clients and
Servers adjusted accordingly to allow ample time for the BRX Do-more! CPU to respond to
and create requests for other devices.
NOTE: Care should be taken when adding a BRX Do-more! MPU to an existing network as some protocols
can create a significant traffic load.

13-28

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Ethernet Protocols
The BRX Do-more! MPU has several Ethernet Protocol choices for communicating to external
devices. In this section we will go over the choices and describe each choice.
Ethernet Protocols
Peerlink
Do-more! Protocol (Client, Server)
Modbus TCP (Client, Server)
HOST ECOM Protocol (Client,
Server)
EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging
(Client, Server))
SMTP (Email)
SNTP (Time Server)
TCP Raw Packet
UDP Raw Packet

PEERLINK Instruction
The PEERLINK instruction
allows easy data sharing across any
PLC that is running Do-more!
technology.
To set this instruction up, place
your data into the appropriate PL
(PEERLINK) registers that you wish
this PLC to share to other Do-more!
PLCs. Then check the box that
corresponds to that memory area.
When this instruction is enabled,
it will then automatically broadcast
this information to all other
Do-more! PLC’s that are listening
with a PEERLINK instruction.
To listen for broadcasts from other Do-more! PLC’s, all you have to do is place the instruction
in your ladder code. If this PLC is not sharing data, do not check any boxes. Incoming data
will automatically be placed into the same register area that the broadcasting PLC has checked.
Using PUBLISH and SUBSCRIBE instructions can help to get data into and out of the PL
memory area as the PL memory area is untyped data. See the Do-more! Designer help file for
more information on PEERLINK, PUBLISH and SUBSCRIBE instructions.
NOTE: Keep in mind that multiple Do-more! PLC’s cannot broadcast to the same memory area. This will
cause an error.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Do-more! Protocol
The Do-more! protocol is a proprietary protocol that is used exclusively by the Do-more!
family of controllers. This is a very feature rich and secure protocol for communication with
the Do-more! Designer software and between Do-more! controllers. It can also be used to
communicate between multiple Do-more! controllers or between some brands of HMI’s, such
as C-more, to a Do-more! controller. Some SCADA systems such as POV also support the
Do-more! Protocol.

RX
The Do-more! Network Read (RX) instruction uses the Do-more! proprietary protocol to
read incoming data on the on-board Ethernet port from another Ethernet-equipped Do-more!
CPU. RX uses UDP (not TCP) protocol to communicate with the remote Do-more! CPU.
Each RX instruction can contain up to 50 individual read requests for a total of up to 1000
bytes of data. The RX instruction can read from all of the built-in memory blocks, all of the
built-in structures, and any user-created memory blocks from the remote PLC. RX does NOT
support reading a Heap Item from a remote Do-more! CPU.
In contrast to DirectLOGIC (DLRX / DLWX) and Modbus/TCP (MRX / MWX) network
communication which only has access to the protocol-specific memory blocks in the remote
CPUs, Do-more! RX has direct access to nearly all of the memory in the remote Do-more! CPU
- including direct access to the CPU I/O memory.
The RX instruction establishes a session with the remote Do-more! CPU. The session is
established using one of the User Accounts on the remote Do-more! CPU. It is through that
User Account (System Security) that any access restrictions on what can be accessed can be
enforced. By default it will use the Default User account (no password required).

13-30

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

RX, continued
IP Address – The IP Address of the Do-more! CPU to read the data from. This can be either
a Fixed (static) IP Address or a Variable (dynamic) value.
Fixed IP Address – The TCP Address assigned to the Do-more! CPU. IP addresses are canonically
represented in dot-decimal notation, consisting of four decimal numbers, each ranging from 0 to
255, separated by dots.
Variable IP Address – The IP Address resides in the specified memory location. This can be any
readable DWord numeric location.

UDP Port Number – The port number of the Do-more! CPU) to read the data from. The
default value of 28784 (0x7070) is typically the correct number for Do-more! protocol. It is
possible to use a different UDP Port Number if the Enable Secondary Ethernet Connection is
turned on under the CPU Configuration settings. This secondary UDP Port Number defaults
to 5000. This UDP Port Number can be any decimal value between 5000 and 65535, except
for 28784 (the port number used by Do-more Designer)..
Remote Password – The RX instruction requires that a communication session be established
with the remote Do-more! CPU before the data read operations can be processed. Depending
on how the remote system is configured, this may require the user to enter the password for
the User Account to allow the session to be established. If no remote password is selected, the
connection will be established using the Default User account.
Enable – Designates how this instruction is enabled. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge – Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one
time. Typically, this will take more than one controller scan. Configured this way the Do-more!
Network Read (RX) instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval – Select this option to have this instruction run as long
as the instruction has power flow. After the Do-more! Network Read (RX) has initially run,
if the instruction still has power flow, the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the
specified amount of time before running again. The following options select how much time (in
milliseconds) to wait between successive runs.
• Constant – specifies the interval time in Hours / Minutes / Seconds / Milliseconds.
• Variable – This can be any readable numeric location that contains a value between 0 and
2,147,483,647 which represents the number of milliseconds to wait before running again. A
value of 0 ms means this instruction will be set to run on the next scan.

On Success – Selects which of the following actions to perform if the Network Read operation
is successful:
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify any writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.
On Success Counter – Enable this option and select a DWord location to store the total number of
times the RX completed successfully. This can be any DWord location.

On Error – Selects which of the following actions to perform if the Network Read operation

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

RX, continued

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

is unsuccessful:
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.
On Error Counter – Enable this option and select a DWord location to store the total number of
times the RX failed to complete. This can be any DWord location.
Extended Error Information – Enable this selection then enter a memory location to store any error
codes returned for this instruction. This can be any writable numeric location. The list following is
of the Extended error responses and their meaning:

-1 = Protocol Error occurred. The value in LastProtoError (DST38) contains the
protocol error code as follows:
2 (0x02) = Out Of Sessions: the remote PLC currently has 32 concurrent connections
and cannot accept any more.
3 (0x03) = Illegal Operation: the User Account for the password in the instruction
does not have Write Data privilege.
4 (0x04) = Invalid Session: an error occurred with the session to the remote PLC, for
example the remote PLC lost power during the session.
6 (0x06) = Invalid Argument: the write requests are not formed properly (you should
never see this).
14 (0x0E) = Invalid Password: the password in the instruction does not match any
User Account in the remote PLC,
20 (0x14) = Bad DMPP Request: one or more of the write requests cannot be
processed, most likely the request is for a location that is out of range on the remote
PLC or the memory block doesn’t exist on the remote PLC. The Extended Error
location will contain the entry number of the write request that is causing the error.
0 = No Extended Error
1 – 50 = row number of the bad read request if the Last Protocol Error Code was 20
(0x14).
Insert – Select Insert to open Read From Remote Into Local setup dialog box (See page following).

13-32

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

RX, continued
Read From Remote Into Local

Read From Remote – The first location in the remote PLC to begin reading data:

Type (a) – The Block Name of the remote memory location to read. This drop-down
list contains an entry for all of the built-in memory data blocks, all of the built-in
structures, and an entry for a User Block that exists on the remote PLC.
Number of Elements (b) – The number of consecutive elements to read.
Into Local (c) – The beginning location in the PLC to store the data from the read
operation. The Into Local location must be the same data type and have the same
element size as the specified Read From Remote data location. For example you can
read from WY (Signed Word) into N (Signed Word) but you cannot read from WY
(Signed Word) into V (Unsigned Word).
The remaining fields (d) are to help you maintain the size limitations. Fields validate
immediately as you make changes in the editor.
Current – The number of bytes in the read request currently being edited.
Others – The number of bytes in the read requests already in this instruction.
New Size – The total number of bytes of all the read requests in the instructions,
including the one currently being edited.
Bytes Remaining – The number of bytes of the 1000 byte limit remaining for read
requests.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

WX
The Do-more! Network Write (WX) instruction uses the Do-more! proprietary protocol to
write data over the on-board Ethernet port to another Ethernet-equipped Do-more! CPU. WX
uses UDP (not TCP) protocol to communicate with the remote Do-more! CPU.
Each WX instruction can contain up to 50 individual write requests for a total of up to 1000
bytes of data. The WX instruction can write to all of the built-in memory blocks, all of the
built-in structures, and any user-created memory blocks in the remote PLC. WX does NOT
support writing to a Heap Item in the remote Do-more! CPU.
In contrast to DirectLOGIC (DLRX / DLWX) and Modbus/TCP (MRX / MWX) network
communication which only has access to the protocol-specific memory blocks in the remote
CPUs, Do-more! WX has direct access to nearly all of the memory in the remote Do-more!
CPU – including direct access to the PLC’s I/O memory.
The WX instruction establishes a session with the remote Do-more! CPU. The session is
established using one of the User Accounts on the remote Do-more! CPU. It is through that
User Account (System Security) that any access restrictions on what can be accessed can be
enforced. By default it will use the Default User account (no password required).

IP Address – The IP Address of the Do-more! CPU to write the data to. This can be either a
Fixed (static) IP Address or a Variable (dynamic) value.
Fixed IP Address – The TCP Address assigned to the Do-more! CPU. IP addresses are canonically
represented in dot-decimal notation, consisting of four decimal numbers, each ranging from 0 to
255, separated by dots.
Variable IP Address – The IP Address resides in the specified memory location. This can be any
readable DWord numeric location.

UDP Port Number – The port number of the Do-more! CPU) to write the data to. The
default value of 28784 (0x7070) is typically the correct number for Do-more! protocol. It is
possible to use a different UDP Port Number if the Enable Secondary Ethernet Connection is
turned on under the CPU Configuration settings. This secondary UDP Port Number defaults

13-34

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

WX, continued
to 5000. This UDP Port Number can be any decimal value between 5000 and 65535, except
for 28784 (the port number used by Do-more Designer).
Remote Password – The WX instruction requires that a communication session be established
with the remote Do-more! CPU before the data write operations can be processed. Depending
on how the remote system is configured, this may require the user to enter the password for
the User Account to allow the session to be established. If no remote password is selected, the
connection will be established using the Default User account.
Enable – Designates how this instruction is enabled. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge – Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly
one time. Typically, this will take more than one controller scan. Configured this way the
Do-more Network Write (WX) instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval – select this option to have this instruction run as
long as the instruction has power flow. After the Do-more! Network Write (WX) has initially
run, if the instruction still has power flow, the instruction will remain enabled and will wait
the specified amount of time before running again. The following options select the time (in
milliseconds) delay between successive runs.
Constant - specifies the interval time in Hours / Minutes / Seconds / Milliseconds.
Variable - This can be any readable numeric location that contains a value between 0 and
2,147,483,647 which represents the number of milliseconds to wait before running again. A value of
0 ms means this instruction will be set to run on the next scan.

On Success – Selects which of the following actions to perform if the Network Write operation
is successful:
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify any writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.
On Success Counter – Enable this option and select a DWord location to store the total number of
times the WX completed successfully. This can be any DWord location.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-35

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

WX, continued
On Error – Selects which of the following actions to perform if the Network Write operation
is unsuccessful:
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.
On Error Counter – Enable this option and select a DWord location to store the total number of
times the RX failed to complete. This can be and DWord location.

Extended Error Information – Enable this selection then enter a memory location to store
any error codes returned for this instruction. This can be any writable numeric location. The
following lists the Extended error responses and their meaning:
-1 = Protocol Error occurred. The value in LastProtoError (DST38) contains the
protocol error code as follows:
2 (0x02) = Out Of Sessions: the remote PLC currently has 32 concurrent connections
and cannot accept any more.
3 (0x03) = Illegal Operation: the User Account for the password in the instruction
does not have Write Data privilege.
4 (0x04) = Invalid Session: an error occurred with the session to the remote PLC, for
example the remote PLC lost power during the session.
6 (0x06) = Invalid Argument: the write requests are not formed properly (you should
never see this).
14 (0x0E) = Invalid Password: the password in the instruction does not match any
User Account in the remote PLC.
20 (0x14) = Bad DMPP Request: one or more of the write requests cannot be
processed, most likely the request is for a location that is out of range on the remote
PLC or the memory block doesn’t exist on the remote PLC. The Extended Error
location will contain the entry number of the write request that is causing the error.
0 = No Extended Error
1 – 50 = Row number of the bad read request if the Last Protocol Error Code was 20
(0x14).
Insert – Select Insert to open Write From Local Into Remote dialog box.

13-36

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

WX, continued
Write From Local Into Remote

Write from Local (a) – The first location of the source data in the Local PLC:
Number of Elements (b) – The number of consecutive elements to write.
Into Remote (c) – The beginning location in the remote PLC to store the data from the write
operation. The Into Remote location must be the same data type and have the same element
size as the specified Write From Local data location. For example you can write from WY
(Signed Word) into N (Signed Word) but you cannot write from WY (Signed Word) into V
(Unsigned Word).
ID (d) – The beginning offset to write the data.
The remaining fields (e) are to help you maintain the size limitations. These fields validate
immediately as you make changes in the editor.
Current – The number of bytes in the read request currently being edited.
Others – The number of bytes in the read requests already in this instruction.
New Size – The total number of bytes of all the read requests in the instructions, including the
one currently being edited.
Bytes Remaining – The number of bytes of the 1000 byte limit remaining for read requests.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Modbus TCP/IP
Modbus TCP is a protocol overseen by Modbus.org. This standard is an open standard
meaning that anyone can utilize it freely.
Modbus TCP can be utilized as either a client or server configuration. It supports Clients and
Servers in a Peer to Peer fashion.

Server
As a Modbus TCP Server (Slave), the BRX Do-more MPU is functioning as a listening/replying
device. The external Client (Master) device will request data registers from the BRX Do-more!
and the BRX Do-more! will reply with the appropriate data.
All Modbus Client data is stored in four sets of registers in the BRX Do-more!. This memory
area is blocked off specifically for Modbus communications. You must place data in these
registers in order for a Modbus Client device to be able to access it.

Modbus Data Registers
Register Type

Range

Holding Coil

00000–01023

Input Coil

10000–11023

Holding Register

MHR

30000–32047

Input Register

MIR

40000–42047

The Modbus data area is loosely data typed and casting or other instructions such as PUBLISH
and SUBSCRIBE can be utilized to convert data in this area to the proper data type needed as
well. Please see the help file for more information on casting, PUBLISH and SUBSCRIBE.
NOTE: Ranges can be expanded in the Memory Configuration section of the Do-more! Designer software
as needed.

The Modbus TCP Server (Slave) supports the following function codes:
Function
Code

13-38

Description

Read Coils

Read Discrete Inputs

Read Holding Registers

Read Input Registers

Write Single Coils

Write Single Registers

Read Exception Status

Write Multiple Coils

Write Multiple Registers

Mask Write Register

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

Modbus TCP Client (Master)
As a Modbus TCP Client (Master), the BRX Do-more! MPU is requesting data from a Modbus
TCP Server (Slave) device.
In order for this to work, you need to know quite a few things about your Server (Slave) device
such as the function codes that it supports, the data registers that are accessible and possibly the
Unit ID or Slave Address.
In order to utilize the BRX Do-more! as a Modbus TCP Client you will need to create a
Modbus TCP Client Device. This device will handle all of the communications with the
external Modbus servers by using the Ethernet port on the front of the BRX MPU.
Note that there is a default @IntMODTCPClient device created automatically. You can
choose to use this device, however we strongly recommend that you make a new Device for
each Modbus TCP server that you will be communicating with. This will allow simultaneous
communications to flow uninterrupted
if one of the Modbus TCP servers goes offline.
BRX_Modbus_Read_App_Example

Modbus TCP
Server Device
Node
1
IP=192.168.133.008
@ModTCPSlave1

BRX MPU
Client Device
IP=192.168.133.001

Ethernet
Switch

Modbus TCP
Server Device
IP=192.168.133.009
@ModTCPSlave2

Modbus TCP
Server Device
IP=192.168.133.010
@ModTCPSlave3

As a Modbus TCP Client, you do not have to sequence the MRX read and MRX write
instructions. If you are so inclined, you can just drop them into your program and they will
work in a round robin manner. However, sequencing the instructions will give you better
control and allow you to build complex communication patterns to optimally communicate
with your devices.
The communications instructions in Do-more! Designer have Success and Error built into
the instructions so that you can either set a bit or move to a Stage if you are doing state style
programming. There are examples of using Stage (state) programming in the software help file
to show how you could use this to implement a complex communications routine.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-39

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

MRX Instruction
The MRX instruction is used to
read from a Modbus TCP Server.
Following is a brief description of
the MRX instruction parameters.
For more detailed information
please refer to the Do-more!
Designer help files.
Device – The device associated
with the physical port that you
want to communicate from.
@IntModTCPClient is the name
of the device associated with the
built in Ethernet port when set
as a Modbus TCP Client. We
strongly recommend that you
make a new Device for each
Modbus TCP server that you
will be communicating with.
This will allow simultaneous
communications
to
flow
uninterrupted if one of the
Modbus TCP servers goes offline.
IP Address – The IP Address of
the Modbus TCP Server (Slave)
to read the data from. This can
be either a Fixed (static) IP Address or a Variable (dynamic) value.
Fixed IP Address – The TCP Address assigned to the Modbus TCP Server (Slave). IP addresses are
canonically represented in dot-decimal notation, consisting of four decimal numbers, each ranging
from 0 to 255, separated by dots.
Variable IP Address – The IP Address resides in the specified memory location. This can be any
readable DWord numeric location.

TCP Port Number – This should normally be set to 502 unless the end device has had the
default port number changed.
Unit ID – The ID number of the Server (Slave) device. Typically this is 255 unless you are
talking to a Modbus Serial Gateway style of device.
Function Code – selects which of the following Modbus function codes to use:
1 - Read Coils
2 - Read Discrete Inputs
3 - Read Holding Registers
4 - Read Input Registers
7 - Read Exception Status

13-40

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

MRX Instruction, continued
From Modbus Offset Address – The address in the Modbus Server (Slave) that you will be
reading from. This address may be offset by a value of +1 depending on how the manufacturer
followed the Modbus standard.
Number of Modbus Coils/ Registers – Based on the Function Code selected, this selection
specifies how many consecutive elements to read.
To Do-more Memory Address – Specifies the beginning address of a range of bits or numeric
locations in the CPU where the data that is read will be stored. This data type (bit or register)
must match the type expected by the Function Code.
Do-more Range – This is the ending register where the data will be stored at, calculated by
taking the To Do-more Memory address and adding the Number of Modbus Coils/Registers
value to it.
Enable – Designates how this instruction will operate. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge - Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one time.
Typically, this instruction will take more than one controller scan to complete. Configured this way the
instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval - Select this option to have this instruction run as long as the
instruction has power flow. After the instruction has initially run, if the instruction still has power flow,
the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the specified amount of time before running again.
The following options select how much time (in milliseconds) to wait between successive runs. A value
of 0ms means the instruction will re-run immediately.

On Success – When the instruction completes successfully this action will be performed.
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify any writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.

On Error – When the instruction does not complete successfully this action will be performed.
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify any writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.

Exception Response – For errors where the message was received properly by the Server (Slave)
device, this will contain a value to indicate why the Server rejected the message. This can aid
in troubleshooting the issue with the message.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-41

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

MWX Instruction
The MWX instruction is used to write to a Modbus TCP Server. For specific information
please refer to the Do-more! Designer help files.

Device – The device associated with the physical port that you want to communicate from.
@IntModTCPClient is the name of the device associated with the built in Ethernet port when
set as a Modbus TCP Client. We strongly recommend that you make a new Device for each
Modbus TCP Server (Slave) that you will be communicating with. This will allow simultaneous
communications to flow uninterrupted if one of the Modbus TCP servers goes offline.
IP Address – The IP Address of the Modbus TCP Server (Slave) to read the data from. This
can be either a Fixed (static) IP Address or a Variable (dynamic) value.
Fixed IP Address – The TCP Address assigned to the Modbus TCP Server (Slave). IP addresses are
canonically represented in dot-decimal notation, consisting of four decimal numbers, each ranging
from 0 to 255, separated by dots.
Variable IP Address – The IP Address resides in the specified memory location. This can be any
readable DWord numeric location.

13-42

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

MWX Instruction, continued
TCP Port Number – This should normally be set to 502 unless the end device has had the
default port number changed.
Unit ID – The ID number of the Modbus TCP Server (Slave) device. Typically this is 255
unless you are talking to a Modbus Serial Gateway style of device.
Function Code – Selects which of the following Modbus function codes to use:
5 - Write Single Coil
6 - Write Single Register
15 - Write Multiple Coils
16 - Write Multiple Registers

To Modbus Offset Address – The starting register that you will be writing to. This address may
be offset by a value of +1 depending on how the manufacturer followed the Modbus standard.
Number of Modbus Coils/ Registers – This selection specifies how many consecutive elements
to write from the Modbus Offset Address.
From Do-more Memory Address – Specifies the beginning address of a range of bits or numeric
locations in the CPU where the data that will be written from. This data type (bit or register)
must match the type expected by the Function Code.
Do-more Range – This is the ending register where the data will be written from, calculated by
taking the To Do-more Memory address and adding the Number of Modbus Coils/Registers
value to it.
Enable – Designates how this instruction will operate. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge – Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one time.
Typically, this instruction will take more than one controller scan to complete. Configured this way the
instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval – Select this option to have this instruction run as long as the
instruction has power flow. After the instruction has initially run, if the instruction still has Power
Flow, the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the specified amount of time before running
again. The following options select how much time (milliseconds) to wait between successive runs. A
value of 0ms means the instruction will re-run immediately.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-43

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

HOST Ethernet Protocol
Server
The BRX Do-more! MPU can serve as a HOST Ethernet Protocol server to communicate to
legacy devices that utilize the HOST Ethernet protocol such as DirectLogic PLC’s, C-more
HMI, SCADA systems, etc.
All data is stored in four sets of registers in the BRX Do-more!. This memory area is blocked
off specifically for HOST Ethernet Protocol communications. You must place data in these
registers so that a HOST Ethernet Protocol Client device will be able to access it.

HOST Data Registers
DirectLogic Type

Do-more Block Name

Default Octal Range

Discrete Input (X)

DLX

0–777

Discrete Output (Y)

DLY

0–777

Control Relay (C)

DLC

0–777

16-Bit Data (V)

DLV

0–3777

The HOST Ethernet Protocol data area is loosely data typed and casting or other instructions
such as PUBLISH and SUBSCRIBE can be utilized to convert data in this area to the proper
data type needed as well. Please see the help file for more information on casting, PUBLISH
and SUBSCRIBE.
NOTE: Ranges can be expanded as needed in the Memory Configuration section of the Do-more! Designer
software.

13-44

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

DirectLogic Client (Master)
The BRX Do-more! MPU can be a HOST Ethernet Protocol Client to communicate to legacy
devices that utilize the HOST Ethernet protocol such as DirectLogic PLC’s.

DLRX

Network Device – The device associated with the physical port that you want to communicate
from. @IntEthernet is the name of the device associated with the built in Ethernet port.
Remote Address – specifies which of the following addressing modes to use:
Slave ID - Selects the Slave ID (Module ID) of the remote DirectLOGIC slave. The Slave ID can be
any constant value in the range of 1 to 90, or any readable numeric location that contains a value in
that range. If Slave ID is selected, a TCP/IP broadcast is used to perform the network read operation.
This means that both the Do-more! controller and the remote ECOM module must be in the same
Broadcast Domain.
Fixed IP Address – Specifies the IP Address assigned to the remote slave ECOM module. IP addresses
are canonically represented in dot-decimal notation, consisting of four decimal numbers, each ranging
from 0 to 255, separated by dots.
Variable IP Address – The IP Address resides in a memory location in the PLC, allowing the IP Address
to be changed at runtime. This can be any readable DWord numeric location. Each octet of the IP
Address is stored in one byte of the Variable Address location.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-45

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

DLRX Instruction, continued
From DL - Designates the data type and the address of the data to read from the DirectLOGIC
controller.
V-Memory – Locations in a DirectLOGIC controller are unsigned 16-bit values. Each V-Memory
location is 2 bytes in length, so reading V-Memory requires the length be in 2-byte increments. The
memory address value must begin on a byte boundary. Single Bit locations in the DirectLOGIC
controllers cannot be read individually, you must read the byte that contains the desired bit.
Number of Bytes – Designates the number of elements of the selected type to read.
X, Y, C, S, T, CT, GX, GY, SP – Bit locations must be read in 1-byte increments

Enable – designates how this instruction will operate. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge - select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one time.
Typically, this instruction will take more than one controller scan to complete. Configured this way
the instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval - Select this option to have this instruction run as long as the
instruction has power flow. After the instruction has initially run, if the instruction still has power flow,
the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the specified amount of time before running again.
The following options select how much time (in milliseconds) to wait between successive runs. A value
of 0ms means the instruction will re-run immediately.

13-46

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

DLWX

Network Device – The device associated with the physical port that you want to communicate
from. @IntEthernet is the name of the device associated with the built in Ethernet port.
Remote Address - Specifies which of the following addressing modes to use:
Slave ID – Selects the Slave ID (Module ID) of the remote DirectLOGIC slave. This can be any
constant value in the range of 1 to 90, or any readable numeric location that contains a value in that
range. If Slave ID is selected, the a TCP/IP broadcast is used to perform the network read operation,
this means that both the Do-more controller and the remote ECOM module must be in the same
Broadcast Domain.
Fixed IP Address – Specifies the IP Address assigned to the remote slave ECOM module. IP addresses
are canonically represented in dot-decimal notation, consisting of four decimal numbers, each ranging
from 0 to 255, separated by dots.
Variable IP Address – The IP Address resides in a memory location in the PLC. This allows the IP
Address to be changed at runtime. This can be any readable DWord numeric location. Each octet of
the IP Address is stored in one byte of the Variable Address location.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-47

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

DLWX Instruction, continued
From – Specifies the beginning memory address in the Do-more controller of the data to send
to the remote slave. This value can be any readable numeric location.
To DL – Designates the data type and the address of the data to Write to the DirectLOGIC
controller.
V-Memory locations in a DirectLOGIC controller are unsigned 16-bit values. Each V-Memory
location is 2 bytes in length, so reading V-Memory requires the length be in 2-Byte increments. The
memory address value must begin on a Byte boundary. Single Bit locations in the DirectLOGIC
controllers cannot be read individually, you must read the Byte that contains the desired Bit.
Number of Bytes – Designates the number of elements of the selected type to read.
X, Y, C, S, T, CT, GX, GY, SP – Bit locations must be read in 1-Byte increments.

Enable – designates how this instruction will operate. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge – Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one
time. Typically, this instruction will take more than one controller scan to complete. Configured this
way the instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval – Select this option to have this instruction run as long as the
instruction has power flow. After the instruction has initially run, if the instruction still has Power
Flow, the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the specified amount of time before running
again. The following options select how much time (in milliseconds) to wait between successive runs.
A value of 0ms means the instruction will re-run immediately.

13-48

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging)
Server
The EtherNet/IP Explicit Message Server must be enabled in the System Configuration dialog
box.

Once this is enabled, you must click the EtherNet/IP Settings button to set the data blocks that
will be served to outside EtherNet/IP Clients.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-49

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging), continued
TCP Port Number (44818 is default) – Designates the TCP port number on which the
EtherNet/IP Explicit Message Server will accept connections. The default value of 44818 is
the industry standard and will rarely need to be changed. However, this can be any constant
value between 0 and 65535.
Device Name – Up to 32 characters that will be returned in requests for the Identity Class.
NOTE: Runtime status of the EtherNet/IP Server is accessed through the built-in structure
$IntEIPServer which has the following members:
.ActiveSessions (read-only) – The number of concurrent open connections to EtherNet/IP clients.
.LastError – Last error reported to an EtherNet/IP client.
.Errors – Total number of errors returned to all EtherNet/IP clients.
.Transactions – Total number or completed client requests to EtherNet/IP clients.

Select the quantity of Data Blocks (up to 8 data blocks - Block 1 to Block 8) that will be made
available to EtherNet/IP Clients. You can specify how many data blocks will be used and then
configure each of the blocks in the sections below.
Access Control – Specify external access ability.
Enable Reads (Get Single Attribute – Service Code: 0x0E) – Allows EtherNet/IP Clients to read
from this data block using Get Single Attribute.
Enable Writes (Set Single Attribute – Service Code: 0x10) – Allows EtherNet/IP Clients to write to
this data block using Set Single Attribute.

Do-more Mapped Memory – Specifies the first location in a data block in the Do-more PLC
memory that will be accessed when requests with this Class/Instance/Attribute are received.
Element Type – Select the memory block to use from the drop-down list of available numeric
memory blocks.
Starting Element – Specify the first element in the memory block to use.
Element Count – The number of successive Elements in the Do-more memory block to use. The
maximum total size on an EtherNet/IP request is 500 bytes, so the maximum number of elements
per block will depend on the size of the individual elements. Refer to the chart below:
Mapped Range – Displays the currently selected range of Elements.
Size – Displays the size of the selected Element range in Bytes.

Explicit Messaging Assembly Instance – Displays the Path (class / instance / attribute) of the
data block being configured.

Element Count
Element Type

13-50

Maximum Number of This
Type per Data Block

Bit

4000

Byte

500

Word

250

DWord

125

Real

125

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

EtherNet/IP (Explicit Messaging), continued
Class – The Class of all the data blocks is fixed at 0x04 (assembly class).
Instance – Each of the 8 blocks is assigned a unique Instance as shown in this table.
Attribute – The Attribute of each of these data blocks is fixed at 0x03.

CONFIGURATION NOTES: – This area contains information pertinent to the configuration
selections being made.

Instance Blocks
Block
Number

Instance ID

101 (0x65)

102 (0x66)

103 (0x67)

104 (0x68)

105 (0x69)

106 (0x6A)

107 (0x6B)

108 (0x6C)

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-51

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

EtherNet/IP Client (Master)
EIPMSG Instruction – The Send EtherNet/IP Message instruction implements an Explicit
Unconnected EtherNet/IP Client using the on-board Ethernet port of a Do-more! CPU. An
explicit message client initiates request/response oriented communications with EtherNet/IP
servers. Message rates and latency requirements should not be too demanding. Examples
of other explicit message servers you can talk to are barcode scanners, scales, drives, or other
intelligent devices.

Device – Designates which of the pre-configured EtherNet/IP Client devices to use when
sending the message. Part of the configuration for a device is assigning a name to the device.
It is that name which will show up in the Device selection drop-down menu. For more
information on configuring devices go to the Help file.
IP Address – The IP Address of the EtherNet/IP Server (Slave) to send the message to. This can
be either a Fixed (static) IP Address or a Variable (dynamic) value as described below:
Fixed Address – The TCP/IP Address assigned to the EtherNet/IP Server (Slave). IP addresses are
canonically represented in dot-decimal notation, consisting of four decimal numbers, each ranging
from 0 to 255, separated by dots.
NOTE: Invoking the Element Browser (F9) for this field will bring up the IP Address Lookup utility that can
find the IP Address for a given name.

Variable IP Address – The IP Address resides in the specified memory location. This can be any
readable DWord numeric location.

TCP Port Number – The port number of the EtherNet/IP Server (Slave) to send the message to.
The default value of 44818 is typically the correct port number for EtherNet/IP protocol. This
can be any constant value between 0 and 65535, or any readable numeric location containing
a value in that range.

13-52

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

EtherNet/IP Client (Master), continued
Path – Specifies the parameters for the request. The specific values needed for the fields will be
provided by the manufacturer of the EtherNet/IP server that you are talking to.
Class – The Class ID value (defined by the EtherNet/IP Server). This can be any positive integer
value or any readable numeric location.
Instance – The Instance ID value (defined by the EtherNet/IP Server). This can be any positive
integer value or any readable numeric location.
Use Attribute – Enable this option to specify the Attribute value (defined by the EtherNet/IP Server).
This can be any positive integer value or any readable numeric location.

Service - Specifies the operation to perform on the set of objects. Choose from the following
list of predefined Services, or select Generic and enter the Service number.
Specific Service – Select one of the predefined Service Requests below:

Get Single Attribute (14, 0x0E) - request a single attribute
Set Single Attribute (16, 0x10) - write a single attribute
Get All Attributes (1, 0x01) - request all of the attributes
Set All Attributes (2, 0x02) - write to all of the attributes
Generic Service – Specify a Service that is NOT one of the predefined Service Requests. This can be
any constant integer value or readable memory location.

Create Data Block – If an appropriate data block does not already exist, or if you want to create
an additional data block for use in this instruction, then click this button to open a dialog
where you can create a new data block of the required type.
Use Request Service Data Buffer – This selection will be automatically enabled when any
Set Attribute service is selected and automatically disabled when any Get Attribute service is
selected. This buffer can be enabled any time the Generic Service is selected.
Req is String Structure – Select this option if the data for the Set Attribute service or any Generic
service is contained in a String, then enter the String element to use. This can be any of the systemdefined Short Strings, or system-defined Long Strings, or any of the user-defined Strings. The
maximum length of the String to send is 500 bytes.
Req is Numeric Data Block – Select this option if the data for the Set Attribute service or any
Generic service is contained in a numeric memory block. The maximum size of the data block that
can be sent in a single service request 500 bytes (250 Words, 125 DWords, 125 Reals).
Req Start – Specify the first element of the memory block that is the data for the Set Attribute or
Generic service.
Req Number of Bytes - The number of consecutive BYTEs of data for the Set Attribute or Generic
service (Words = 2 Bytes, DWord = 4 Bytes, Real = 4 Bytes).

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-53

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

EtherNet/IP Client (Master), continued
Use Response Service Data Buffer – This selection will be automatically enabled when any
Get Attribute service or any Generic service is selected and automatically disabled when any
Set Attribute service is selected. This buffer can be enabled any time the Generic Service is
selected.
Res is String Structure – Select this option to store the data from the Get Attribute service or any
Generic service in a String, then enter the String element to use. This can be any of the systemdefined Short Strings, or system-defined Long Strings, or any of the user-defined Strings. The
maximum length of the String that could potentially be received is 500 bytes, so make sure the String
can handle the maximum response for the desired service.
Res is Numeric Data Block – Select this option to store the data from the Get service or any Generic
service in a numeric memory block. The maximum size of the data block that can be read in a single
service request 500 bytes (250 Words, 125 DWords, 125 Reals).
Res Start – Specify the first element in the numeric data block to store the data that was returned by
the Get Attribute or Generic service. This can be any writable numeric location.
Res Length in BYTEs – Specify a memory location to store the actual number of Bytes of data that
was returned by the Get Attribute or Generic service. This can be any writable numeric location.
Res Max Length in BYTEs – Specify the maximum number of BYTEs of the returned data to
retain to store in the data block. This can be any positive integer constant between 1 and 500 or any
readable numeric location.
NOTE: The byte length value should be a multiple of the number of BYTEs in a single element in the numeric
memory block. For example, if the memory block consists of DWords or Reals, this value should be a
multiple of 4, as there are 4 BYTEs per DWord or Real.

General Status Code – enable this option to store the value returned from the EtherNet/IP
Server in response to processing the Service Request; enter the numeric location to store the
value. This can be any writable numeric location. This value could indicate success or be an
error code. Consult the documentation for the EtherNet/IP Server for information on how to
interpret General Status Code values.
Extended Status – Enable this option to store any extended status value returned from the EtherNet/
IP Server in response to processing the Service Request.
Ext is String Structure – Select this option to store the extended status information in a String, then
enter the destination String element. This can be any of the system-defined Short Strings, or systemdefined Long Strings, or any of the user-defined Strings.
Ext is Numeric Data Block – Select this option to store the Extended Status data in a numeric data
block.
Ext Start – Specify the first element in the numeric data block to store the Extended Status data.
This can be any writable numeric location.
Ext Length in BYTEs – Specify a memory location to store the actual number of Bytes of Extended
Status data. This can be any writable numeric location.
Ext Max Length in BYTEs – Specify the maximum number of BYTEs of Extended Status data to
store in the data block. This can be any positive integer constant between 1 and 500, or any readable
numeric location.

13-54

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

EtherNet/IP Client (Master), continued
NOTE: The byte length value should be a multiple of the number of BYTEs in a single element in the numeric
memory block. For example, if the memory block consists of DWords or Reals, this value should be a
multiple of 4, as there are 4 BYTEs per DWord or Real.

Enable – Designates how this instruction will operate. Select from one of the following:
Once on Leading Edge - Select this option to have this instruction run to completion exactly one
time. Typically, this instruction will take more than one controller scan to complete. Configured this
way the instruction is Edge Triggered.
Continuous on Power Flow at Interval - Select this option to have this instruction run as long as the
instruction has power flow. After the instruction has initially run, if the instruction still has power
flow, the instruction will remain enabled and will wait the specified amount of time before running
again. The following options select how much time (in milliseconds) to wait between successive runs.
A value of zero milliseconds (0ms) means the instruction will re-run immediately.

On Success – When the instruction completes successfully this action will be performed.
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.
On Error Counter – Enable this option and select a DWord location to store the total number of
times the RX failed to complete. This can be any DWord location.

On Error – When the instruction does not complete successfully this action will be performed.
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127 in the current
Program code-block.
On Error Counter – Enable this option and select a DWord location to store the total number of
times the RX failed to complete. This can be any DWord location.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-55

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

EtherNet/IP Client (Master), continued
Create Data Block – If an appropriate data block does not already exist, or if you want to
create an additional data block for use in this instruction, then click this button to open a
dialog where you can create a new data block of the required type.

Data Block Name (1 to 16 letters) – Block names must be unique, and consist of 1 to 16
characters (A-Z, a-z; no numbers, no spaces).
Number of Elements – Specifies the number of bytes in the data block. The data blocks
must be created on a DWord (4-byte) boundary. The maximum number of Bytes that can be
received from a single packet is 1024.
Data Block Range – Displays the first and last element of the block that will be created based
on the current entries for Data Block Name and Number of Elements.
Data Type – The data block will consist of Unsigned Bytes.
Make Data Block Retentive (retain values after power loss) – A data block marked as retentive
will hold its state through a power cycle or a Program-to-Run mode transition. The status of
memory NOT marked as retentive will be cleared at power up and during a Program-to-Run
mode transition.

13-56

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

SMTP – EMAIL
The Edit SMTP Client Settings dialog is used to configure an SMTP connection from the
Do-more! controller to an SMTP server in order for the controller to send Email. The
information that is required to configure an SMTP connection is always going to be specific to
the installation. It is up to the programmer to locate the required information.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-57

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

SMTP – EMAIL, continued
Device Name – The name given to the SMTP Client. This is the name that will be referenced
in the Send Email (EMAIL) instructions. Device Names can consists of 1 to 16 alphanumeric
characters. Device names must follow Nickname rules.
SMTP Server IP Address – The IP address of the SMTP server that will process the Email
sent from the controller. If the IP Address of your SMTP Server is not static, you can use the
DNSLOOKUP and DEVWRITE instructions to determine it at runtime before executing an
EMAIL instruction. See the example in the EMAIL Help Topic DMD0068. If this is the case,
just fill in a dummy IP Address in the SMTP Configuration.
Clicking the DNS Loopkup button will open the IP Address Lookup utility so that Do-more!
Designer can search for the IP Address assigned to a given SMTP Server name. This requires
a functional connection to a DNS Server.
NOTE: The IP Address of the SMTP Server can be resolved at runtime by using the Name to IP Address
(DNSLOOKUP) instruction to find the IP Address associated with a Server’s name, then use the Write Device
Register (DEVWRITE) instruction to set the SMTP Client Device to use the IP Address that was found.

SMTP Server Port – The default value of 25 is the standard IP port number that is used by
SMTP servers. The SMTP Server Port number can be examined at runtime with the Read
Device Register (DEVREAD) instruction, and changed at runtime through the Write Device
Register (DEVWRITE) instruction.
Timeout –This is the amount of time (in seconds) the SMTP Client will attempt to connect
to the specified SMTP server before reporting an error. The default value of 30 seconds should
be sufficient in most instances. Be aware that it is quite normal for communications with
SMTP servers to take several seconds of time; setting this value too low will only cause needless
problems.
From Email Address – Specifies the Email address that all Emails using this SMTP Client will
use in the ‘From’ field. Email addresses must be in the form of X@Y.Z. SMTP servers typically
require that the ‘From’ address be configured as a recipient address on that SMTP server before
they will accept Emails from that address.
Authentication – If the SMTP server requires authentication before it will accept an Email
from the controller, select one of the following three methods:
Disabled – If the SMTP server does not require authentication
AUTH LOGIN – Authenticate by logging into the SMTP Server with the Username and Password
specified below
AUTH PLAIN – Authenticate by logging into the SMTP Server with the Username and Password
specified below
POP before SMTP – An authentication that attempts to get Email before attempting to send
an Email, the premise being that if an Email client can log in and read Email the Client must be
legitimate
Pop3 Port – The default port number of 110 is the standard IP port number for POP3 requests
and should not need to be change. The Pop3 Port number can be examined at runtime with the
Read Device Register (DEVREAD) instruction, and changed at runtime through the Write Device
Register (DEVWRITE) instruction.

13-58

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

SMTP – EMAIL, continued
Account Information – The three authentication methods above require a UserID and
Password. For ‘AUTH LOGIN’ and ‘AUTH PLAIN’, the account information is for the
SMTP account, for ‘POP before SMTP’ method, the account information is for the POP3
account.
Username - 1 to 64 characters
Password - 1 to 19 characters

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-59

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

EMAIL
The Send Email (EMAIL) instruction is used to send an Email message. This instruction is
only valid for Do-more! controllers that have an on-board Ethernet port. The message portion
of the Email can be any combination of text and data elements from the controller. An Email
can also send an attachment which can be any file on any of the built-in file systems.

SMTP Device – Designates the SMTP Client device to use to send the Email. An SMTP
Client device must be configured before the Send Email instruction can be added to a program.
To – One or more primary audience Email addresses separated by semicolons. This can be a
string literal (text in double quotes), or any String element.
Cc (optional) – One or more Courtesy Copy (or Carbon Copy) Email addresses separated by
semicolons. This can be a string literal (text in double quotes), or any String element.
Bcc (optional) – One or more Blind Carbon Copy Email addresses separated by semicolons.
This can be a string literal (text in double quotes), or any String element.
Subject – The Total number of characters in Subject line is limited to 1024 characters. This
can be a string literal (text in double quotes), or any readable String element.
Automatically insert space after each term – Will insert a space between the terms when the
instruction is processed. This is most useful when the Message Field contains only a list of
elements that would otherwise require a manually entered space character to separate the items.

13-60

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

EMAIL, continued
Message – Text box in which to place the body of the Email message. There can be up to
1023 characters of data in a Message field. This data can consist of any combination of the
following:
String Literal (text in double quotes).
Control characters.
Any readable String element.
Controller data elements (V0, D0, T0.Acc, etc.).
Data formatting functions (FmtInt, FmtReal, etc.).
String selection function (Lookup).
For a complete description of the available data options provided by the scripting language for
use in the Text Field, see the Help file.
Attach File – Enable this option to send an existing file from one of the file Systems in the
Do-more CPU along with the Message text.
File System – Specifies which of the available file systems contains the file.

@RamFS – The 1 MB file system in the Do-more CPU’s system RAM. All Do-more
CPUs will have this file system available.
@SDCardFS – On PLC systems that have the microSD card slot, this selection is the
file system on the removable media in that slot.
File Name – The full path (including any directories) of the file on the specified file system. This
can be text enclosed in double quotes, or any system or user-defined string. The File Name allows a
maximum length of 255 characters including spaces and non-alphanumeric characters, excluding the
following characters which have special meaning to the file system * ? “ : < >. The File Name is not
case sensitive.
Delete File After Email Sent – Enable this option to delete the specified file AFTER the Email has
been successfully sent to the specified SMTP Server.

On Success – When the instruction completes successfully this action will be performed.
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127
in the current Program code-block.
On Error – When the instruction does not complete successfully this action will be performed
Set Bit – Enable this selection then specify writable bit location.
JMP to Stage – Enable this selection then specify any Stage number from S0 to S127
in the current Program code-block.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

13-61

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 13: BRX Do-more! Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Notes:

13-62

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter

Future Release of
BRX Remote I/O
For Future Use

BRX Do-more!
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Hardware Maintenance............................................................................................ 15-2
Diagnostics................................................................................................................ 15-3
CPU Indicators.......................................................................................................... 15-5
PWR Indicator .......................................................................................................... 15-6
RUN Indicator........................................................................................................... 15-7
ERR Indicator............................................................................................................ 15-7
Communications Problems...................................................................................... 15-7
I/O Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 15-8
Noise Troubleshooting........................................................................................... 15-10

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1 Hardware Maintenance
Standard Maintenance
2
The BRX Platform is a low maintenance system requiring only a few periodic checks to help
reduce the risks of problems. Routine maintenance checks should be made regarding two key
items.
3
Air quality (cabinet temperature, airflow, etc.)
CPU battery
4
Air Quality Maintenance
5
The quality of the air your system is exposed to can affect system performance. If you
have placed your system in an enclosure, check to see that the ambient temperature is not
6
exceeding the operating specifications. If there are filters in the enclosure, clean or replace
them as necessary to ensure adequate airflow. A good rule of thumb is to check your system
environment every one to two months. Make sure the BRX Platform is operating within the
7
system operating specifications.
CPU Battery Replacement
8
A battery is included with the CPU. When installed, the time and date along with retentive
memory values will be retained. The battery is not needed for program backup. It is
9
recommended that the battery be replaced annually.
10
Battery (Optional)
11
+
12
13
14
15
A
B
NOTE: Proper orientation of battery is with the “+” symbol facing left when viewed from front of MPU.
C
D
Battery Replacement
Coin Battery CR2032
ADC Part # D0-MC-BAT

D0-MC-BAT

CR2
032

NOTE: Do not
remove tape
from battery.

15-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Coin type, 3.0 V Lithium
battery, 190mAh,
battery number CR2032

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Your BRX MPU performs many predefined diagnostic routines with every CPU scan. The diagnostics
have been designed to detect various types of failures for the CPU and I/O modules. There are two
primary error classes, critical and non-critical.

Critical Errors
Critical errors are errors the CPU has detected that present a risk of the system not functioning safely or
properly. If the CPU is in Run Mode when the critical error occurs, the CPU will switch to Stop Mode
(Remember, in Stop Mode all outputs are turned off). If the critical error is detected while the CPU
is in Stop Mode, the CPU will not enter Run Mode until the error has been corrected. Here are some
examples of critical errors:
Power supply failure
Parity error or CPU malfunction
I/O configuration errors
Certain programming errors.

Non-Critical Errors
Non-critical errors are flagged by the CPU as requiring attention. They can neither cause the
CPU to change from Run Mode to Stop Mode, nor do they prevent the CPU from entering
Run Mode. There are system memory addresses that the application program references to
detect if a non-critical error has occurred. The application program can be used to take the
system to an orderly shutdown or to switch the CPU to Stop Mode if necessary.
Some examples of non-fatal errors are:
Backup battery voltage low
Certain programming errors

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

15-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Finding Diagnostic Information
The CPU automatically logs critical and non-critical error codes. Logged errors can be found
in the following places marked with a time and date stamp:
Under the PLC menu item, select System Information and then pick the System Status tab. All errors
and messages are shown here.
Also check the Event Log tab for further system status.

15-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

CPU Indicators
The BRX MPU has indicators on the faceplate to help diagnose problems with the system.
The table below gives a quick reference of potential problems associated with each status
indicator. The pages following the table contain a detailed analysis of each of these problems.
CPU Mode
Switch
Swit
PWR
W

CPU Status
Indication LEDs

RUN
TERM

RUN

STOP

MEM
ERR
R
SD
RS-232/485
RS-2
232
2/4
2/4
/48
85
85

TX
TX

CPU Status Indicators
Indicator
PWR

MEM

ERR

GND
RX/D-TX/D+
+

Serial Port

Description

OFF

Base power 3OFF

Green

Base power ON

Yellow

Low battery

OFF

CPU is in STOP (Program) mode

Green

RX
CPU is in RUN mode

Yellow

Forces are active

OFF

No ROM activity, No SD card

Green

SD Card installed and mounted*

Yellow

ROM activity (Flash or SD card)

Red

microSD Card installed and not
mounted*

OFF

CPU is functioning normally

Red

CPU fatal hardware error or
software watchdog error

USB

RUN

Status

R
RX

Pluggable Option
Module (POM) Slot

*A microSD card will become “mounted” once the MPU recognizes the

microSD card and renders it accessible for use.

CPU Mode Switch
Position

Description

RUN

Puts the CPU into RUN mode - assuming there are no
issues that prevent it from happening, like errors in the
project currently loaded in the CPU, or a problem with the
hardware.

TERM

Allows the Do-more Designer programming software to set
the CPU’s mode using the “Set PLC Mode” utility.

STOP

Puts the CPU into Stop (Program) mode which stops
running the currently loaded project.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

15-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1 PWR Indicator
There are three general reasons for the CPU power status LED (PWR) to be OFF:
2
1. Power to the MPU is incorrect or is not applied.
2. MPU power supply is faulty.
3
3. Other component(s) have the power supply shut down.
Incorrect MPU Power
4
If the voltage to the power supply is not correct, the MPU may not operate properly or may
not operate at all. Use the following guidelines to correct the problem.
5
WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect the system power before
6
inspecting the physical wiring.
1. First, disconnect the system power and check all incoming wiring for loose connections.
7
2. If you are using a separate termination panel, check those connections to make sure the wiring is
connected to the proper location.
8
3. If the connections are acceptable, reconnect the system power and measure the voltage at the
power supply connection terminal block to ensure it is within specification. If the voltage is not
9
correct, shut down the system and correct the problem.
4. If all wiring is connected correctly and the incoming power is within the specifications required,
the MPU should be replaced.
10
Faulty MPU
11
There is no simple test for a faulty MPU other than substituting a known good one to see if
this corrects the problem. If you have experienced major power surges, it is possible the MPU
12
has been damaged. If you suspect this is the cause, a line conditioner should be installed on the
incoming line. This will keep damaging voltage spikes from reaching the MPU.
13
External Device or Module Causes the Power Supply to Shutdown
Module:
14
If the Power LED is not lit, remove all modules including a POM module (if present) from
the BRX Platform and reapply power. If the Power LED is still unlit, then the BRX unit has
15
sustained damage and will need to be replaced.
External Device:
A
External influence from a communications port.
Test as follows:
B
1. Turn off power to the BRX Platform.
2. Disconnect all external devices (i.e., communication cables) from the BRX Platform.
C
3. Reapply power.
4. If power supply operates normally then check for a shorted device or shorted cable.
D
15-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

RUN Indicator
If the CPU will not enter the Run mode (the RUN indicator is off), the problem is usually in
the application program, unless the CPU has a critical error. If a critical error has occurred,
the ERR LED should be on. You can use Do-more! Designer Software to determine the cause
of the error.
When the RUN LED is yellow it indicates the CPU has one or more memory locations with
Forced values.

ERR Indicator
If the ERR indicator is OFF, it means the CPU is functioning normally. If the ERR indicator
is ON, the CPU has experienced one or more of the following conditions:
A Fatal Hardware Error.
A Software Watchdog Error has occurred.
An I/O module has been removed while the CPU is in RUN mode.
An I/O module in an Ethernet I/O Slave drop is not present.

If rebooting the BRX Platform clears the error, you should monitor the system and determine
what caused the problem. You will find this problem is sometimes caused by high frequency
electrical noise introduced into the MPU from an outside source. Check your system grounding
and install electrical noise filters if the grounding is suspected. If power cycling the system does
not reset the error, or if the problem returns, you should replace the MPU.
The ERR indicator can be made to BLINK from the Edit Link dialog in order to help identify
the CPU. This is helpful where you may have multiple MPUs in a cabinet.

Communications Problems
If you cannot establish communications with the MPU, check these items:
The cable is disconnected.
The cable has a broken wire or has been wired incorrectly.
The cable is improperly terminated or grounded.
The device connected is not operating at the correct baud rate.
The device connected to the port is sending data incorrectly.
A grounding difference exists between the two devices.
Electrical noise is causing intermittent errors.
If it is determined that a built-in CPU communications port is bad, the MPU should be
replaced. If it is a POM communications port, just replace the POM port.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

15-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1 I/O Troubleshooting
Things to Check
2
If you suspect an I/O error, there are several things that could be causing the problem:
A blown fuse
3
A loose terminal block
The 24VDC supply has failed or 24VDC has not been supplied to the I/O common.
4
The I/O point has failed.
5
Error Codes
Also, in the Do-more! Designer software, you can go to the PLC menu item, select System
Information and then pick the System Status tab.
6
All errors and messages are shown here. Also check the Event Log for further information on
system status such as rebooting.
7
Some Quick Steps
8
When troubleshooting the BRX Platform I/O there are a few facts you should be aware of
which may assist you in quickly correcting an I/O problem:
The CPU cannot detect shorted or open output points. If you suspect one or more points
9
on an output module to be faulty, you should measure the voltage drop from the common
to the suspect point. Remember, when using a Digital Volt Meter, leakage current from an
10
output device, such as a triac or a transistor, must be considered. A point which is off may
appear to be ON if no load is connected to the point.
The I/O point status indicators on the modules are logic side indicators. This means the
11
LED which indicates the ON or OFF status reflects the status of the point in respect to
the CPU. For an output module, the status indicators could be operating normally, while
12
the actual output device (transistor, Triac etc.) could be damaged. With an input module,
if the indicator LED is ON, the input circuitry should be operating properly. To verify
proper functionality, check to see that the LED goes off when the input signal is removed.
13
Leakage current can be a problem when connecting field devices to I/O points. False input
signals can be generated when the leakage current of an output device is great enough to
14
turn on the connected input device. To correct this, install a resistor in parallel with the
input or output of the circuit. The value of this resistor will depend on the amount of
leakage current and the voltage applied but usually a 10kΩ to 20kΩ resistor will work.
15
Verify that the wattage rating of the resistor is correct for your application.
The easiest method to determine if an I/O point has failed is to replace the MPU or the
A
expansion module if you have a spare. However, if you suspect another device to have
caused the failure in the MPU or the expansion module, that device may cause the same
failure in the replacement as well. As a point of caution, you may want to check devices or
B
power supplies connected to the failed MPU or expansion module before replacing it with
a spare.
C
D
15-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Testing Output Points
Output points can be set ON or OFF using the force function to override a point even while
the program is running. However, this is not a recommended method to test the output
points.
NOTE: RUN LED will turn Yellow when one or more outputs are forced.

WARNING: Depending on your application, forcing I/O points may cause unpredictable machine
operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. Make sure you have taken
all appropriate safety precautions prior to testing any I/O points.

If you want to do an I/O check independent of the application program, follow the procedure
in the table below:
Step

Action

1.
2.
3.

Use Do-more! Designer software to communicate on-line to the CPU.
Change to Program Mode.
Go to the first rung of $Main. All System Tasks should be disabled by following Step 4 as well.
Insert a rung with an “END” statement. (This will cause program execution to occur only at address
0 and prevent the application program from turning the I/O points on or off).
Change to Run Mode.
Use the programming device to set (turn) on or off the points you wish to test.
When you finish testing I/O points delete the “END” statement at the first rung.

4.
5.
6.
7.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

15-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Chapter 15: BRX Do-more! Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1 Noise Troubleshooting
Electrical Noise Problems
2
Noise is one of the most difficult problems to diagnose. Electrical noise, whether conducted
or radiated, can enter a system in many different ways. It may be difficult to determine how
the noise is entering the system but the corrective actions for either type of noise problem are
3
similar.
Conducted noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system by
4
way of an attached wire, panel connection, etc. It may enter through an I/O point, a
power supply connection, the communication ground connection, or the chassis ground
connection.
5
Radiated noise is when electrical interference is introduced into the system without a direct
electrical connection such as radio waves.
6
Reducing Electrical Noise
7
While electrical noise cannot be eliminated completely, it can be reduced to a level that will not
affect system function. Proper grounding of components and signal wiring along with proper
isolation of voltages can minimize noise in the system.
8
1. Grounding:
Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. A good earth ground
9
can be the single most effective way to correct noise problems. If a ground is not available,
install a ground rod as close to the system as possible.
10
Ensure all ground wires are single point grounds and are not daisy chained from one
device to another. Ground metal enclosures around the system. A loose wire is no more
than a large antenna waiting to introduce noise into the system; therefore, you should
11
tighten all connections in your system. Loose ground wires are more susceptible to noise
than the other wires in your system. Review Chapter 1, “General Installation and Wiring
12
Guidelines”, if you have questions regarding how to ground your system.
2. Isolation:
13
Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the MPU and I/O.
Installing an isolation transformer for all AC sources can correct this problem.
DC power sources should be properly grounded, except for Class II power supplies.
14
Switching DC power supplies commonly generate more noise than linear supplies.
Place input and output wiring in separate wireways or wiring bundles. Keep AC and DC
15
wiring separated as well. Never run I/O wiring parallel or close proximity to high voltage
wiring.
A
B
C
D
15-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

EU Directives (CE)

Appendix

In This Appendix...
European Union (EU) Directives................................................................................ A-2
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines.............................................................................. A-5

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

1 European Union (EU) Directives
NOTE: The information contained in this section is intended as a guideline and is based on our interpretation
2
of the various standards and requirements. Since the actual standards are issued by other parties, and in
some cases governmental agencies, the requirements can change over time without advance warning or
notice. Changes or additions to the standards can possibly invalidate any part of the information provided in
3
this section.
This area of certification and approval is absolutely vital to anyone who wants to do business in
4
Europe. One of the key tasks that faced the EU member countries and the European Economic
Area (EEA) was the requirement to bring several similar yet distinct standards together into one
5
common standard for all members. The primary purpose of a single standard was to make it
easier to sell and transport goods between the various countries and to maintain a safe working
and living environment. The Directives that resulted from this merging of standards are now
6
legal requirements for doing business in Europe. Products that meet these Directives are
required to have a CE mark to signify compliance.
7
Member Countries
As of January 1, 2015, the members of the EU are Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Republic
8
of Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania,
9
Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, and United Kingdom. Iceland, Liechtenstein, and Norway
together with the EU members make up the European Economic Area (EEA) and all are covered
10
by the Directives.
Applicable Directives
11
There are several Directives that apply to our products. Directives may be amended, or added,
as required.
12
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive — this Directive attempts to ensure that devices,
equipment, and systems have the ability to function satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment
without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbance to anything in that environment.
13
• Machinery Safety Directive — this Directive covers the safety aspects of the equipment, installation,
etc. There are several areas involved, including testing standards covering both electrical noise
14
immunity and noise generation.
•L
ow Voltage Directive (LVD) — this Directive is also safety related and covers electrical equipment
that has voltage ranges of 50–1000VAC and/or 75–1500VDC.
15
•B
attery Directive — this Directive covers the production, recycling, and disposal of batteries.
A
Compliance
B
NOTE: As of July 22, 2017 ROHS has been added as an additional requirement for CE Compliance per Directive
2011/65/EU. All products bearing the CE mark must be ROHS compliant.
C
Certain standards within each Directive already require mandatory compliance. The EMC
Directive, which has gained the most attention, became mandatory as of January 1, 1996. The
Low Voltage Directive became mandatory as of January 1, 1997.
D
A-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)
Ultimately, we are all responsible for our various pieces of the puzzle. As manufacturers, we
must test our products and document any test results and/or installation procedures that are
necessary to comply with the Directives. As an end user, you are responsible for installing the
products applying “good engineering practices” and in a manner which will ensure compliance
is maintained. You are also responsible for testing any combinations of products that may
(or may not) comply with the Directives when used together. The end user of the products
must comply with any Directives that may cover maintenance, disposal, etc. of equipment or
various components. Although we strive to provide the best assistance available, it is impossible for
us to test all possible configurations of our products with respect to any specific Directive. Because
of this, it is ultimately your responsibility to ensure that your machinery (as a whole) complies with
these Directives and to keep up with applicable Directives and/or practices that are required for
compliance.
This then is the product specific standard for CPUs and covers the low voltage and EMC
directives as required for European CE certification. This standard has many tests together with
test procedures and limits, but also references the below standards for some tests.
IEC
60068
-2-1:1990
Part 2 Test A
-2-2:1974
Part 2 Test B

IEC
60417
All Parts

IEC
60664

IEC
60695

IEC
60707

IEC
60947

IEC
60950

IEC
61000

IEC
61010

-1:1992
Part 1

-2-1
(all sheets)
Part 2

:1999

-5-1:1997
Part 5-1

-1:2001
Part 1

-4-2:1995
Part 4-2

-1:2001
Part 1

-3:1992

-7-1:2002
Part 7-1

-2-6:1995
Part 2: Test Fc

-4-3:2002
Part 4-3
-4-4:1995

-2-6:1995
Part 2: Test Fc

CISPR
11:1999

-4-5:1995
Part 4-5

-2-14:1984
Part 2 Test N

CISPR
16-1:1999
Part 1

-4-6:1996
Part 4-6

-2-27:1987
Part 2 Test Ea

CISPR
16-2:1999
Part 2

-4-8:1993
Part 4-8
-4-12:1995
Part 4-12

-2-30:1980
Part 2 Test Db
-2-31:1969
Part 2 Test Ec
-2-32:1975
Part 2 Test Ed

For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced
document (including any amendments) applies.

The BRX system, manufactured by HOST Engineering, when properly installed and used,
conforms to the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Low Voltage Directive, and Machinery
Directive requirements of the following standards:
• Product Specific Standard for Programmable Controllers
EN61131–2:2003 Programmable controllers, equipment requirements and tests.
• Warning on Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
We recommend that all personnel take necessary precautions to avoid the risk of transferring static
charges within the control cabinet and provide clear warnings and instructions on the cabinet
exterior. Such precautions may include the use of earth straps, grounding mats and similar staticcontrol devices, or the powering off of the equipment inside the enclosure before the door is
opened.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

A-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

• Warning on Radio Interference (RFI)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate preventative measures.

General Safety
• External switches, circuit breaker or external fusing are required for these devices.
• The switch or circuit breaker should be mounted near the programmable controller equipment.

Special Installation Manual
The installation requirements to comply with the requirements of the Machinery Directive,
EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive are slightly more complex than the normal
installation requirements found in the United States. To help with this, we have published a
special manual which you can order or download from our website:
• DA–EU–M – EU Installation Manual that covers special installation requirements to meet the EU
Directive requirements. Refer to this manual for updated information.

Other Sources of Information
Although the EMC Directive gets the most attention, other basic Directives such as the
Machinery Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, also place restrictions on the control
panel builder. Because of these additional requirements it is recommended that the following
publications be purchased and used as guidelines:
• BSI publication BS TH 42073: November 2000 – covers the safety and electrical aspects of the
Machinery Directive
• EN 60204–1:2006 – Safety of Machinery; General electrical requirements for machinery, including
Low Voltage and EMC considerations
• IEC 61000–5–2: EMC earthing and cabling requirements
• IEC 61000–5–1: EMC general considerations

It may be possible for you to obtain this information locally; however, the official source of
applicable Directives and related standards is:
Publications Office
2, rue Mercier
2985 Luxembourg
LUXEMBOURG
Quickest contact is via the web at:
http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/european-standards/harmonised-standards.
Another source is the British Standards Institution at:
British Standards Institution – Sales Department, Linford Wood:
Milton Keynes, MK14 6LE, United Kingdom.
The quickest contact is via the web at www.bsigroup.com

A-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

Basic EMC Installation Guidelines
Enclosures
The simplest way to meet the safety requirements of the Machinery and Low Voltage Directives
is to house all control equipment in an industry standard lockable steel enclosure. This
normally has an added benefit because it will also help to reduce EMC emissions. Although
the RF emissions from the programmable controller equipment, when measured in the open
air, are well below the EMC Directive limits, certain configurations can increase emission
levels. Holes in the enclosure, for the passage of cables or to mount operator interfaces, can
increase emissions.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

A-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Mains Filters
All AC powered BRX units must be wired through an in line mains filter of type Schaffner FN
2010-1-06, or similar design. The equipment must be properly installed while adhering to the
guidelines of the BRX user guide, the BRX installation manual and the installation standards
IEC 1000-5-1, IEC 1000-5-2 and IEC 1131-4. It is a requirement that all PLC equipment
be housed in a protective steel enclosure, which limits access to operators by a lock and power
breaker and that all cables which exit the enclosure, do so through metallic conduit. If access
is required by operators or untrained personnel, the PLC equipment must be installed inside
an internal cover or secondary enclosure. It should be noted that the safety requirements of
the machinery directive standard EN60204-1 state that all PLC power circuits must be wired
through isolation transformers or isolating power supplies, and that one side of all AC or DC
control circuits must be earthed. Both power input connections to the PLC equipment must
be separately fused using 3 amp T-type anti-surge fuses, and a transient suppressor fitted to
limit supply over voltages.

Suppression and Fusing
In order to comply with the fire risk requirements of the Low Voltage and Machinery Directive
standards EN 61010–1 and EN 60204–1, it is necessary to fuse both sides of the power inputs
(on both AC and DC units).
Transient suppressors must be protected by fuses and the capacity of the transient suppressor
must be greater than the blow characteristics of the fuses or circuit breakers to avoid a fire risk.
A recommended AC supply input arrangement for the BRX is to use twin 3 amp TT fused
terminals with fuse blown indication, such as DINnectors DN–F10L terminals, or twin circuit
breakers.

Internal Enclosure Grounding
A heavy-duty star earth terminal block should be provided in every cubicle for the connection
of all earth ground straps, protective earth ground connections, mains filter earth ground wires,
and mechanical assembly earth ground connections. This should be installed to comply with
safety and EMC requirements, local standards, and the requirements found in IEC 61000–5–
2. The Machinery Directive also requires that the common terminals of the programmable
controller input modules, and common supply side of loads driven from programmable
controller output modules should be connected to the protective earth ground terminal.

Equipotential Grounding
Adequate site earth grounding must be provided for equipment containing modern electronic
circuitry. The use of isolated earth electrodes for electronic systems is forbidden in some
countries. Make sure you check any requirements for your particular destination. IEC 61000–
5–2 covers equipotential bonding of earth grids adequately, but special attention should be
given to apparatus and control cubicles that contain I/O devices, remote I/O racks, or have
inter-system communications with the primary CPU system enclosure.

A-6

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

An equipotential bond wire must be provided alongside all serial communications cables, and
to any separate items of the plant which contain I/O devices connected to the programmable
controller. The diagram above shows an example of four physical locations connected by a
communications cable.

Communications and Shielded Cables
Screened
Cable

Conductive
Adapter
Serial
I/O

To Earth
Block
Equi-potential
Bond
Control Cubicle

Good quality 24AWG minimum twisted-pair shielded cables, with overall foil and braid shields
are recommended for analog cabling and communications cabling outside of the programmable
controller enclosure. To date it has been a common practice to only provide an earth ground
for one end of the cable shield in order to minimize the risk of noise caused by earth ground
loop currents between apparatus. The procedure of only grounding one end, which primarily
originated as a result of trying to reduce hum in audio systems, is no longer applicable to the
complex industrial environment. Shielded cables are also efficient emitters of RF noise from
the CPU system, and can interact in a parasitic manner in networks and between multiple
sources of interference.
The recommendation is to use shielded cables as electrostatic “pipes” between apparatus and
systems, and to run heavy gauge equipotential bond wires alongside all shielded cables. When
a shielded cable runs through the metallic wall of an enclosure or machine, it is recommended
in IEC 61000–5–2 that the shield should be connected over its full perimeter to the wall,
preferably using a conducting adapter, and not via a pigtail wire connection to an earth ground
bolt. Shields must be connected to every enclosure wall or machine cover that they pass
through.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

A-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Analog and RS232 Cables
Providing an earth ground for both ends of the shield for analog circuits provides the perfect
electrical environment for the twisted pair cable as the loop consists of signal and return, in a
perfectly balanced circuit arrangement, with connection to the common of the input circuitry
made at the module terminals. RS232 cables are handled in the same way.

Multi-drop Cables
RS422 twin twisted pair, and RS485 single twisted pair cables also require a 0V link, which
has often been provided in the past by the cable shield. It is now recommended that you use
triple twisted pair cabling for RS422 links, and twin twisted pair cable for RS485 links. This is
because the extra pair can be used as the 0V inter-system link. With loop DC power supplies
earth grounded in both systems, earth loops are created in this manner via the inter-system 0v
link. The installation guides encourage earth loops, which are maintained at a low impedance
by using heavy equipotential bond wires. To account for non–European installations using
single-end earth grounds, and sites with far from ideal earth ground characteristics, we
recommend the addition of 100 ohm resistors at each 0V link connection in network and
communications cables.
Last Slave

TXD 0V RXD
+ –
+ –

Slave n

Master

TXD 0V RXD
+ –
+ –

RXD 0V TXD
+ –
+ –

100

100
Termination

Termination

Shielded Cables Within Enclosures
When you run cables between programmable controller items within an enclosure which also
contains susceptible electronic equipment from other manufacturers, remember that these
cables may be a source of RF emissions. There are ways to minimize this risk. Standard data
cables connecting CPUs and/or operator interfaces should be routed well away from other
equipment and their associated cabling. You can make special serial cables where the cable
shield is connected to the enclosure’s earth ground at both ends, the same way as external cables
are connected.

Analog I/O and RF Interference
The readings from all analog I/O will be affected by the use of devices that exhibit high field
strengths, such as mobile phones and motor drives.
All AutomationDirect products are tested to withstand field strength levels up to 10V/m, which
is the maximum required by the relevant EU standards. While all products pass this test,
analog I/O will typically exhibit deviations of their readings. This is quite normal, however,
systems designers should be aware of this and plan accordingly.
When assembling a control system using analog I/O, these issues must be adhered to and should be
integrated into the system design. This is the responsibility of the system builder/commissioner.

A-8

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

Network Isolation
For safety reasons, it is a specific requirement of the Machinery Directive that a keyed switch
must be provided that isolates any network input signal during maintenance, so that remote
commands cannot be received that could result in the operation of the machinery. To avoid
the introduction of noise into the system, any keyed switch assembly should be housed in its
own earth grounded steel box and the integrity of the shielded cable must be maintained.
Again, for further information on EU directives we recommend that you get a copy of our EU
Installation Manual (DA–EU–M) on-line. Also, you can check the EU Commission’s official
web site at:
http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/european-standards/harmonised-standards.
It is good Engineering practice to install toroid inductors on the I/O wiring and the
communications cables such as listed in the table below.
Toroid Inductors
Manufacturer
RS Online
Fair-Rite
Wurth Elektronick

Mfg. Part Number Outside Diameter

Inside Diameter

Length

2606795

17.5 mm

9.5 mm

28.5 mm

2643665702

17.45 mm

9.5 mm

28.6 mm

7427009

17.5 mm

9.5 mm

28.5 mm

Items Specific to BRX
• The rating between all circuits in this product are rated as basic insulation only, as appropriate for
single fault conditions.
• It is the responsibility of the system designer to earth one side of all control and power circuits, and
to earth the braid of screened cables.
• This equipment must be properly installed while adhering to the guidelines of the in house CPU
installation manual DA–EU–M, and the installation standards IEC 61000–5–1, IEC 61000–5–2
and IEC 61131–4.
• It is a requirement that all CPU equipment must be housed in a protective steel enclosure,
which limits access to operators by a lock and power breaker. If access is required by operators
or untrained personnel, the equipment must be installed inside an internal cover or secondary
enclosure.
• It should be noted that the safety requirements of the machinery directive standard EN60204–1
state that all equipment power circuits must be wired through isolation transformers or isolating
power supplies, and that one side of all AC or DC control circuits must be earthed.
• Both power input connections to the programmable controller must be separately fused using three
(3) amp T-type anti–surge fuses, and a transient suppressor fitted to limit supply over-voltages.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

A-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: EU Directives (CE)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

NOTES:

A-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

BRX MPU
Power Budgeting

Appendix

In This Appendix...
Power Budget Form.................................................................................................... B-2
Power Budget Worksheet........................................................................................... B-3
BRX MPU Available Expansion Power........................................................................ B-4
BRX MPU POM Power Consumed............................................................................. B-5
BRX MPU Expansion Module Power Consumed....................................................... B-6
Power Budget Examples............................................................................................. B-9

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

1 BRX MPU Power Budget
The BRX MPU has a limited amount of power available to supply the expansion modules.
When designing a BRX system the power budget should be taken into account to be sure that
2
your system will perform as expected.
A general rule of thumb is that when there are 32 or more points of relay expansion modules
3
in a system, a power budget calculation must be performed to ensure that there is
enough available power to accommodate all expected modules.
4
On the following pages you will find a worksheet and power budget tables to help you determine
your system total power budget requirement. If the calculations exceeds the total available
power, you may need to consider using an additional MPU or using a Remote I/O solution to
5
satisfy the system requirements.
Examples are also included to help show how the calculations should be performed.
6
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,
7
the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage.
8
Power Budget Form
9
1. Find the Watts available for the BRX MPU that you will be using. Put this value in line 1 MPU section of the worksheet.
10
2. If you are using a POM (Pluggable Option Module), find the watts consumed and put this
value in line 2 - POM section of the worksheet.
11
3. For each Expansion Module that you will be using, find the watts consumed and put this value
in the appropriate slot that the module will reside in, lines 3 through 10.
4. Add the values located in the POM Watts and Slot 1 through 8, lines 2 through 10. Write the
12
value of this sum in line 11 - Total Watts Consumed.
5. Subtract line 11 - Total Watts Consumed from line 1 - MPU Watts Available. Write this value
13
in line 12 - Watts Remaining.
6. If the value in line 12 - Watts Remaining is a negative number, your system is consuming more
14
Watts than the MPU is capable of providing. This system would be unsafe as designed. You will
need to reconsider your design. If the remaining wattage is zero or more than zero, the system design
is good.
15
A
B
C
D
B-2

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

Power Budget Worksheet

Power Budget Worksheet
Line

Item

Part #

MPU

POM

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Total Watts Consumed (Add lines 2 thru 10)

Watts Remaining (Line 1 - line 11)

Watts

WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,
the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

B-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX MPU Available Expansion Power
The following tables show the available power for each of the BRX MPU’s. Use the wattages
shown as the total available power when calculating the power budget.

MPU Total Power Available
# Built-in
Inputs

# Built-in
Outputs

BX-DM1E-M

21.3

BX-DM1E-M-D

21.3

BX-DM1-10ED1-D

8.5

BX-DM1-10ED2-D

8.5

BX-DM1-10ER-D

8.3

BX-DM1-10AR-D

8.3

BX-DM1E-10ED13-D

7.3

BX-DM1E-10ED23-D

7.3

BX-DM1E-10ER3-D

7.0

BX-DM1E-10AR3-D

7.0

BX-DM1-18ED1

20.2

BX-DM1-18ED2

20.2

BX-DM1-18ER

19.6

BX-DM1-18AR

19.6

BX-DM1-18ED1-D

20.2

BX-DM1-18ED2-D

20.2

BX-DM1-18ER-D

19.6

BX-DM1E-18ED13

18.8

BX-DM1E-18ED23

18.8

BX-DM1E-18ER3

17.9

BX-DM1E-18AR3

17.9

BX-DM1E-18ED13-D

18.8

BX-DM1E-18ED23-D

18.8

BX-DM1E-18ER3-D

17.9

Model

Total Available
Power (W)

BX 10

BX 10E

BX 18

BX 18E

B-4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

MPU Total Power Available, continued

Total MPU Power Available
# Built-in
Inputs

# Built-in Total Available
Outputs Power (W)

BX-DM1-36ED1

18.7

BX-DM1-36ED2

18.7

BX-DM1-36ER

17.6

BX-DM1-36AR

17.6

BX-DM1-36ED1-D

18.7

BX-DM1-36ED2-D

18.7

BX-DM1-36ER-D

17.6

BX-DM1E-36ED13

16.4

BX-DM1E-36ED23

16.4

BX-DM1E-36ER3

15.3

BX-DM1E-36AR3

15.3

BX-DM1E-36ED13-D

16.5

BX-DM1E-36ED23-D

16.5

BX-DM1E-36ER3-D

15.3

Model
BX 36

BX 36E

BRX MPU POM Power Consumed
The following chart shows the power consumed by each of the BRX POMs. Use the wattages
shown as the amount to be subtracted from the total available wattage when calculating the
power budget.

POM Power Consumption
Model

Consumption (W)

BX-P-SER2-RJ12

0.2

BX-P-SER2-TERM

0.2

BX-P-SER4-TERM

0.2

BX-P-USB-B

0.1

BX-P-ECOMLT

0.4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

B-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX MPU Expansion Module Power Consumed
The following tables show the power consumed by each of the BRX Expansion Modules.
Use the wattages shown as the total amount to be subtracted from the available wattage when
calculating the power budget.

BRX Discrete Input Expansion Modules

BRX Input Expansion Modules
Power Consumption
Model

Inputs/
Module

Outputs/
Module

Consumption
(W)

BX-08NA

0.2

BX-08NB

0.2

BX-08ND3

0.2

BX-08NF3

0.2

BX-12NA

0.3

BX-12NB

0.3

BX-12ND3

0.3

BX-16NA

0.3

BX-16NB

0.3

BX-16ND3

0.3

BRX Discrete Output Expansion Modules

BRX Output Expansion Modules
Power Consumption
Model

B-6

Inputs/
Module

Outputs/
Module

Consumption
(W)

BX-05TRS

1.8

BX-08TA

0.4

BX-08TD1

0.4

BX-08TD2

0.4

BX-08TR

1.7

BX-12TA

0.5

BX-12TD1

0.5

BX-12TD2

0.5

BX-12TR

2.5

BX-16TD1

0.5

BX-16TD2

0.5

BX-16TR

3.4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

BRX Discrete Input/Output Combination Expansion Modules

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX Combination Expansion
Modules Power Consumption
Model

Inputs/
Module

Outputs/
Module

Consumption
(W)

BX-08CD3R

1.0

BX-12CD3D1

0.3

BX-12CD3D2

0.3

BX-16CD3D1

0.4

BX-16CD3D2

0.4

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

B-7

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

BRX Analog Input/Output Expansion Modules

BRX Analog Expansion Modules
Power Consumption
Type Model

B-8

BX-08AD-1

BX-08AD-2B

BX-04THM

Out

BX-08DA-1

Out

BX-08DA-2B

Inputs/
Module

Outputs/
Module

Consumption
(W)

0.1

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

Power Budget Examples
Example 1

Power Budget Worksheet
Line

Item

Part #

Watts

MPU

BX-DM1-18ED1

20.20

POM

Slot 1

BX-08ND3

0.20

Slot 2

BX-16ND3

0.30

Slot 3

BX-16TR

3.40

Slot 4

BX-16TR

3.40

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Total Watts Consumed (Add lines 2 thru 10)

7.30

Watts Remaining (Line 1 - line 11)

12.90

This example shows that the selected configuration is within the power budget. This is a
sound configuration and will work as designed.
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,
the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

B-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Example 2

Power Budget Worksheet
Line

Item

Part #

Watts

MPU

BX-DM1E-36ER3

15.30

POM

BX-P-ECOMLT

0.40

Slot 1

BX-08NA

0.20

Slot 2

BX-16ND3

0.30

Slot 3

BX-16ND3

0.30

Slot 4

BX-16TD1

0.50

Slot 5

BX-16TD1

0.50

Slot 6

BX-16TR

3.40

Slot 7

BX-05TRS

1.80

Slot 8

BX-05TRS

1.80

Total Watts Consumed (Add lines 2 thru 10)

9.20

Watts Remaining (Line 1 - line 11)

6.10

This example shows that the selected configuration is within the power budget. This is a sound
configuration and will work as designed.
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget, the
system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment
damage.

B-10

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

Example 3

Power Budget Worksheet
Line

Item

Part #

Watts

MPU

BX-DM1E-36ER3

15.30

POM

BX-P-SER2-TERM

0.20

Slot 1

BX-16NA

0.30

Slot 2

BX-16NA

0.30

Slot 3

BX-16NA

0.30

Slot 4

BX-16TR

3.40

Slot 5

BX-16TR

3.40

Slot 6

BX-16TR

3.40

Slot 7

BX-16TR

3.40

Slot 8

BX-16TR

3.40

Total Watts Consumed (Add lines 2 thru 10)

18.10

Watts Remaining (Line 1 - line 11)

-2.80

This example shows that the selected configuration will exceed the power budget. This is an
unsafe configuration and will not work as designed. One way to correct this is to add Remote
I/O to this system for additional I/O capability.
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,
the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which could result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage.

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

B-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: BRX MPU Power Budgeting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D

NOTES:

B-12

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : AutomationDirect
Create Date                     : 2017:08:03 13:58:36-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:08:25 10:16:42-04:00
Subject                         : Do-more! BRX Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
Has XFA                         : No
Language                        : en-US
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Metadata Date                   : 2017:08:25 10:16:42-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CC 2017 (Windows)
Instance ID                     : uuid:00fcd47f-699b-4eab-b6c5-f662a29d20b7
Original Document ID            : xmp.did:CD8117340C206811822ABDC16248B012
Document ID                     : xmp.id:c4326782-ac49-5346-9730-263c2840caab
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:58cbdd1c-5766-c74e-80f9-313cba7638a4
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:f0628330-3170-1340-8fff-37175cb9c4aa
Derived From Original Document ID: xmp.did:CD8117340C206811822ABDC16248B012
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
History Action                  : converted
History Parameters              : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign CC 2017 (Windows)
History Changed                 : /
History When                    : 2017:08:03 13:58:36-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition
Description                     : Do-more! BRX Micro PLC Unit (MPU)
Creator                         : AutomationDirect
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 15.0
Trapped                         : False
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 734

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

BRX User Manual, 2nd Edition View / The Manual Brxuserm

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation